Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
PR 21494: CITY OF PORT ARTHUR LANDFILL SCALE INSTALLATION PROJACT - AWARD OF CONTRACT TO PERRY CONSTRUCTION OF CYPRESS, TEXAS
Ciry of _ nrl rill7lY�_ Teras www.PortArthurTx.gov INTEROFFICE MEMORANDUM Date: July 28, 2020 To: The Honorable Mayor and City Council Through: Ron Burton, City Manager From: Alberto Elefano, P.E., Public Works Director RE: P.R. 21494: City of Port Arthur Landfill Scale Installation Project—Award of contract to Perry Construction of Cypress, Texas. Introduction: The intent of this Agenda Item is to authorize the City Manager to execute a contract with Perry Construction of Cypress, Texas for the construction of permanent scales at the City of Port Arthur's Municipal Landfill for the amount of$267,125.00. Background: The City of Port Arthur's Municipal Landfill is in need of a more accurate measuring tool of wastes being received for disposal. Additionally, accurate measurements of waste received can facilitate more accurate billing to capture revenue based on weight. Also,weighing of waste can be a better predictor of the life expectancy of the current operating cell. To that end, it was determined that a permanent scale be installed. The City previous bided this project on January 22, 2020, but did not receive any bids. The City rebidded it and received one bid May 27, 2020 from Perry Construction of Cypress, TX. The bid had sections for the scales, gate house building, and site work. Due to the bid exceeding the budget, Public Works decided to award only the scales. Budget Impact: Funds for this project are partially available in Landfill Account No. 625-1801-533.92-00. The account is short$128,984.85. A funding source will be required in order to move forward. Recommendation: It is recommended that the City of Port Arthur City Council approve PR 21494 with Perry Construction of Cypress, Texas for the construction of permanent scales at the City of Port Arthur's Municipal Landfill for the amount of$267,125.00. "Remember,we are here to serve the Citizens of Port Arthur" 444 4'h Street X Port Arthur,Texas 77641-1089 X 409.983.8182 X FAX 409.983.8294 PR No.21494 7/14/20 mje Page 1 of 3 RESOLUTION NO. A RESOLUTION AUTHORIZING THE CITY MANAGER TO ENTER INTO A CONTRACT WITH PERRY CONSTRUCTION OF CYPRESS, TEXAS FOR THE INSTALLATION OF A PERMANENT SCALE AT THE CITY OF PORT ARTHUR MUNICIPAL LANDFILL FOR THE AMOUNT OF $267,125.00. APPROVAL IS CONTINGENT ON A FUNDING SOURCE WHEREAS, the contract was advertised on April 24, 2020 and May 1, 2020 in the Port Arthur News; and WHEREAS, one (1) bid was received and opened on May 27, 2020; and WHEREAS, this was the 2nd bid due to no bids received on January 22, 2020; and WHEREAS, with Perry Construction of Cypress, Texas being the only bid in the total amount of amount of $1,192,878 for the scale, gate house, and site work attached as Exhibit A ; and WHEREAS, Public Works recommend awarding only the scale in the amount of $267,125.00 attached as Exhibit B and has been evaluated by the Public Works staff; now, therefore, BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF PORT ARTHUR: THAT, the facts and opinions in the preamble are true and correct; and, THAT, the City Council of the City of Port Arthur hereby awards the contract for the Installation of a Permanent Scale to Perry Construction of Cypress, Texas in the amount of $267,125.00; and, THAT, the City Manager of the City of Port Arthur is hereby authorized and directed to execute on behalf of the City, a contract between the City of Port Arthur and PR No. 21494 7/14/2020 mje Page 2 of 3 Perry Construction of Cypress, Texas in the amount of $267,125.00 attached in substantially the same form as Exhibit "C". THAT, approval is contingent on a funding source. THAT, a copy of the caption of this Resolution be spread upon the Minutes of the City Council. READ, ADOPTED AND APPROVED this the day of , A.D. 2020 at a meeting of the City of Port Arthur, Texas by the following vote: Ayes: Mayor: Councilmembers: Noes: Thurman "Bill" Bartle Mayor ATTEST: Sherri Bellard City Secretary APPROVED AS TO FORM: APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION: Valecia Tizeno Ron Burton City Attorney City Manager PR No.21494 7/14/20 mje Page 3 of 3 APPROVED AS FOR AVAILABILITY OF FUNDS: Kandy Daniel Interim Director of Finance Alberto Elefano, P.E. Director of Public Works / - IvatiL • Clifton Williams, CPPB Purchasing Manager EXHIBIT "A" CITY OF PORT ARTHUR TEXAS City of- — BID TABULATION NEW LANDFILL SCALES AND GATE HOUSE FACILITY plirr rh MAY 27, 2— 020 Name of Bidders PERRY CONSTRUCTION Days to Item # DESCRIPTION Complete Cost LANDFILL SCALE& 1 FOUNDATION 180 $331,379.00 2 GATE HOUSE 180 $649,919.00 3 SITE WORK 180 $211,580.00 4 TOTAL 180 $1,192,878 Location CYPRESS TX EXHIBIT " B " PEPPY CONSTRUCTION PORT ARTHUR LANDFILL SCALES&GATE HOUSE FACILITY GATE HOUSE SCALE & FOUNDATION PRICE SCALE $62,539.00 SCALE DIRT WORK $110,000.00 SCALE CONCRETE $27,300.00 GENERAL CONDITIONS:OH, INS, BONDS,& PROFIT $ 67,286.00 TOTAL $267,125.00 EXHIBIT " C" CONSTRUCTION OF SCALE AT LANDFILL THIS AGREEMENT, made this day of 2020, by and between the City of Port Arthur, a municipal corporation organized under the laws of the State of Texas, hereinafter called "OWNER" or "CITY" and Perry Construction. hereinafter called "CONTRACTOR" WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payment terms, conditions and agreements set forth herein, OWNER and CONTRACTOR agree as follows: 1. This contract shall be 180 days from the date stated on the Notice to Proceed The City can terminate this contract at its convenience which includes, but is not limited to, funding not being available in any budget cycle with ten (10) days written notice. 2. The Contractor will perform work as stated in the Contract Documents. 3. During the term of this Contract, the Contractor will furnish at his own expense all of the materials, supplies, tools, equipment, labor and other services necessary to connection therewith, excepting those supplies specifically not required of Contractor in the Specifications. 4. The CONTRACTOR agrees to perform all the work described in the specifications and contract documents and to comply with the terms therein for the following cost: DESCRIPTION COST SCALE $ 62,539.00 SCALE DIRT WORK $110,000.00 SCALE CONCRETE $ 27,300.00 GENERAL CONDITIONS: OH,INS,BONDS $ 67,286.00 TOTAL $267,127.00 5. The term "Contract Documents" means and includes the following: a) Agreement b) General Information c) Specifications d) Quote e) Notice of Award f) Notice to Proceed 6. This Agreement shall be binding upon all parties hereto and their respective heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. 7. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed, or caused to be executed by their duly authorized officials, this Agreement in (2 copies) each of which shall be deemed an original on the date first above written. Signed on the day of , 2020. ATTEST: CITY OF PORT ARTHUR BY: Sherri Bellard Ron Burton City Secretary City Manager Signed on the day of , 2020. ATTEST PERRY CONSTRUCTION BY: Sherri Bellard City Secretary Print Name: Title: PROJECT MANUAL CITY OF PORT ARTHUR NEW LANDFILL SCALES AND GATE HOUSE FACILITY 4732 TEXAS 73 , PORT ARTHUR , TEXAS 77642 rt,of - 1, orV4rtrI � 7i la, 141 II II , 4 McDp4' fj���i •���i c 15180 % • '2/6q 27. 2020 McDonald IT 1 Architects, LLC !!. www.mcdonaldarchitectsdfw.com TBAE Firm#BR 2685 Iamarr.mcdonald(a icloud.com 817-793-9026 SCS ENGINEERS STEARNS, CONRAD AND SCHMIDT CONSULTING ENGINEERS 1901 CENTRAL DRIVE,SUITE 550,BEDFORD,TX 76021 PH(817)571-2288 FAX NO.(817)571-2188 www.scsengineers.com PROJECT NUMBER 14-2018-00 COPYRIGHT© 2019 McDonald Architects&SCS Engineers THURMAN BILL BARTIE,MAYOR RON BURTON HAROLD DOUCET,SR.MAYOR PRO TEM CITY MANAGER COUNCIL MEMBERS: City of SHERRI BELLARD,TRMC RAYMOND SCOTT,JR. �,� CITY SECRETARY CAL J.JONES THOMAS J.KINLAW HI u rt r t h u r VAL TIZENO CHARLOTTE MOSES �� CITY ATTORNEY KAPRINA FRANK Texas April 28,2020 INVITATION TO BID CONSTRUCTION OF CITY OF PORT ARTHUR NEW LANDFILL SCALES AND GATE HOUSE FACILITY DEADLINE: Sealed Bid submittals must be received and time stamped by 3:00 p.m., Central Standard Time, Wednesday, May 27, 2020. (The clock located in the City Secretary's office will be the official time.) All bids received will be read aloud at 3:15 p.m. on Wednesday, May 27, 2020 in the City Council Chambers, City Hall, 5th Floor, Port Arthur, TX. You are invited to attend. MARK ENVELOPE: P20-045 DELIVERY ADDRESS: Please submit one(1) original and one (1) copy of your bid to: CITY OF PORT ARTHUR CITY OF PORT ARTHUR CITY SECRETARY or CITY SECRETARY P.O. BOX 1089 444 4TH STREET,4th Floor PORT ARTHUR,TEXAS 77641 PORT ARTHUR, TEXAS 77640 POINTS OF CONTACT: Questions concerning the Invitation to Bid or Scope of Work should be directed in writing to: City of Port Arthur,TX Clifton Williams, Purchasing Manager P.O. Box 1089 Port Arthur,TX 77641 clifton.williamsC portarthurtx.gov Purchasing Division/Finance Department I Purchasing Manager,Clifton Williams,CPPB P.O.Box 10891444 4th Street1 Port Arthur,Texas 776411 409.983.8160 I Fax 409.983.8291 Page 1 of 2 The enclosed INVITATION TO BID (ITB) and accompanying GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS, CONDITIONS SPECIFICATIONS, are for your convenience in submitting bids for the enclosed referenced services for the City of Port Arthur. Bids must be signed by a person having authority to bind the firm in a contract. Bids shall be placed in a sealed envelope, with the Vendor's name and address in the upper left-hand corner of the envelope. ALL BIDS MUST BE RECEIVED IN THE CITY SECRETARY'S OFFICE BEFORE OPENING DATE AND TIME. It is the sole responsibility of the firm to ensure that the sealed ITB submittal arrives at the above location by specified deadline regardless of delivery method chosen by the firm. Faxed or electronically transmitted ITB submittals will not be accepted. Clifton Williams, CPPB Purchasing Manager CITY OF PORT ARTHUR LANDFILL 4732 TEXAS 73 , PORT ARTHUR , TEXAS 77642 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00-PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 23 14 BID FORM 00 60 00 SCHEDULE OF STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS 00 62 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 00 70 00 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM DIVISION 01-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 1100 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 21 00 ALLOWANCES 01 22 14 SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 26 00 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 10 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 32 00 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0133 00 SUBMITTALS 0140 00 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0142 00 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 01 50 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 60 00 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 72 50 FIELD ENGINEERING 01 73 00 EXECUTION 0177 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 79 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DIVISION 02-EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 32 00 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 03 31 10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DIVISION 04-MASONRY (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISION 05- METALS 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS DIVISION 06-WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 40 20 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK TOC- 1 DIVISION 07-THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 2100 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION 07 21 19 SPRAYED INSULATION AND THERMAL BARRIER 07 62 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08-OPENINGS 08 11 13 STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 14 16 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS 08 7100 FINISH HARDWARE 08 80 00 GLAZING 08 91 19 LOUVERS AND VENTS DIVISION 09-FINISHES 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 65 13 RESILENT WALL BASE,AND ACCESSORIES 09 68 16 CARPET TITLE 09 91 13 PAINTING DIVISION 10-SPECIALTIES 10 14 19 SIGNAGE 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 21 13.40 TOILET COMPARTMENTS(PHENOLIC) 10 44 16 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS DIVISION 11-EQUIPMENT 1100 00 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11 12 05 TRUCK SCALE DIVISION 12-FURNISHINGS 12 24 13 ROLLER SHADES DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISION 14-CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISION 21- FIRE SUPPRESSION (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISION 22-PLUMBING (REFER TO DRAWINGS) TOC-2 DIVISION 23 - HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (REFER TO DRAWINGS) DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL (REFER TO DRAWINGS) DIVISION 27 -COMMUNICATIONS (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISION 28- ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISIONS 29 and 30 (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) DIVISION 31- EARTHWORK 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING 31 20 00 EARTHWORK 31 22 00 TRENCH SAFETY 31 23 00 EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES 31 24 00 CEMENT STABLIZED SAND BASE 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL DIVISION 32-EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20 CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33-UTILITIES 33 26 68 WATER IMPROVEMENTS 33 27 30 SANITARY SEWERAGE DIVISION 34 through 48 (NOT IN THIS PROJECT) - END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS - TOC-3 00 21 14 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Definitions: 1. Bidding documents (the drawings and project manual) include the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Summary of Work, the Bid Form, the Contract Documents as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract, Materials and Systems Specifications,and any Addenda issued before the receipt of Bids. 2. All definitions included in the General Conditions or in other Contract Documents apply to all Bidding Documents. 3. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect before the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. 4. A Bid is a completed and properly signed Bid Form in which the Bidder proposes to perform the Work or designated portion of the Work for the sum or sums stipulated therein and supported by information called for by the Bidding Documents. 5. A Base Bid is an amount stated on the Bid Form for all work shown or contained in the Contract Documents not shown or described as alternate work. 6. An Alternate Bid is an amount stated on the Bid Form to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Scope of the Work is accepted by the Owner. 7. A Unit Price is an amount per unit of Work stated on the Bid Form which will be incorporated into the Contract Documents for the purpose of adjusting the Contract Sum either as an add or deduct when the original Contract quantities are either increased or decreased. 8. A Bidder is one who submits a Bid to the Owner for the Work described in the Contract Documents. 9. A Sub-Bidder is one who submits a Bid to the Bidder described in Paragraph 8 above, for performing a portion of the Work. B. General Requirements: 1. Each Bidder, in submitting his Bid, represents that he has read and understands the Bidding Documents and that his bid is made in accordance therewith. 2. Each Bidder represents that he has visited the Site, familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed,compared the site with the Drawings and Specifications, satisfied himself as to the conditions of delivery, handling and storage of materials, and all other matters that may be incidental to the Work. 3. Each Bidder represents that his Bid is based upon materials and equipment described in the Bidding Documents without exception. 4. Each Bidder will use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids;neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete Documents. 5. Submission of a Bid will be considered as evidence of the Bidder's representation, and no allowance will subsequently be made by reason of any error or omission on his part due to his neglect in complying with the requirements of the bid. If a bidder finds discrepancies in or omissions from the bid documents, or has doubt as to their meaning, he shall at once notify the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 14-1 Architect who will issue written interpretations and instructions to all Bidders. Neither Owner nor Architect will be responsible for any oral instructions. 6. In making copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use of the Bidding Documents. C. Preparation of Bid: 1. All bids must be submitted on forms prepared by the Architect and shall be subject to all requirements of the drawings,the project manual and other documents issued. A sample set of Bid Forms is enclosed herein. It is for the convenience of the bidders only and is not to be detached from the project manual,filled out, or executed. Two (2)copies of the Bid Forms are to be copied from the Project Manual for the purpose of submitting Bids, one to be submitted with the bid and one to be retained by the bidder for his record. All blank spaces for bid prices must be filled in,in ink or typewritten,in both words and figures. Conditional or incomplete bids will not be accepted. 2. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, his address,and the name of the project. 3. The bid shall provide for all work to be performed under one contract. 4. All addenda issued prior to the bid date shall be included in the bid. 5. Bidders are required to provide alternate and unit price information if requested on the Bid Form. D. Bidding Procedures: 1. Sealed Bids for furnishing all labor and materials for this Project will be received and privately opened. 2. The person whose duty it is to open the Bids will decide when the Bid opening time is at hand and no Bids received thereafter will be considered. The Owner or Architect will not be responsible for the premature opening of any Bid which is not properly addressed and identified. 3. A Bid is invalid if it has not been deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Invitation to Bid or any revisions thereof issued to the Bidders. 4. In case of ambiguity or lack of clearness in stating prices in the Bid, the Owner reserves the right to adopt the most advantageous interpretation thereof or to reject the Bid. 5. Any interlineation, alterations or erasure on the Bid Form must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. 6. Bidder shall not make additional stipulations on the Bid Form or qualify his Bid in any manner. 7. Oral,telephonic,facsimile,or email bids will not be considered. 8. Each copy of the Bid shall include the legal name of Bidder and a statement whether Bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation, or other legal entity, and each copy shall be signed by the person legally authorized to bind the bidder to a Contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the State of Incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have current power of attorney attached certifying agent's authority to bind Bidder. 9. Modification or Withdrawal of Bid: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 14-2 a. No Bidder shall modify,withdraw or cancel his Bid or any part thereof for sixty(60)days after the time designated for the receipt of Bids in the Invitation to Bid. b. Before the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, Bids submitted early may be modified or withdrawn only by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place and before the time and date designated for receipt of Bids. c. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder or be by telegram. If by telegram,written confirmation over the signature of Bidder must have been mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids. It shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. d. Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. E. Substitutions(Prior to Bidding): 1. Substitution requests will not be considered unless received ten days prior to the bidding deadline. 2. All substitution requests shall be submitted in writing and be supported by adequate technical and cost data, including a complete description of the proposed substitution; complete cost information; the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted; drawings, catalog cuts,performance,and test data; and any other data or information necessary for proper evaluation. 3. Substitution requests made after award of Contract are referenced in Division 1 Section "Product Substitutions". F. Performance and Payment Bonds: 1. Required,see section 00 60 00 for forms. G. Examination of Bidding Documents;Addenda: 1. Each Bidder shall examine the Bidding Documents carefully and, not later than seven days before the date for receipt of Bids, shall make written request to the Architect for interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein which he may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents or the site and local conditions. 2. No interpretation of the meaning of the drawings, specifications or other pre-bid documents will be made orally to any Bidder. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions shall be in the form of written addenda to the specifications. All addenda shall become a part of the Contract documents. 3. Addenda will be forwarded to each person or firm recorded by the Architect as having received the Bidding Documents and will be available for inspection wherever the Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. 4. Addenda issued during the time of Bidding shall be acknowledged by the Bidder by being listed on the Bid Form in the space provided. Failure of a Bidder to receive any Addendum shall not release the Bidder from any obligations under his Bid, provided said Addendum was sent by telegram, U.S. Mail, facsimile or email to the address or number furnished by the Bidder for transmittal of mail. H. Rejection of Bids: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 14-3 1. The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all Bids. In addition,the Bidder recognizes the right of the Owner to reject a bid if the Bidder fails to submit any required Bid security,or fails to submit the data required by the Bidding Documents,or if the bid is in any way incomplete or irregular. Qualification of Bidders: 1. The Owner may make such investigations as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose. The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if, in his opinion, the contractor is not qualified to satisfactorily complete the work contemplated. 1. Laws and Regulations: 1. All applicable state laws, municipal ordinances, and the rules and regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction over construction of the project shall apply to this contract throughout, and will have deemed to be included in the contract the same as though herein written out in full. K. Time of Completion and Liquidated Damages: 1. The date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Contract. The Bidder must agree that the work will be prosecuted regularly and diligently at such rate of progress as will insure completion thereof within the time set forth in the Bid. 2. For the purposes of this Contract,a calendar day constitutes twenty-four(24)hours of time and is any one of seven days of a week,including Saturday,Sunday,and Holidays,regardless of whether such day is a "working day" or not, weather conditions, or any condition or situation which may delay construction. 3. If the Contractor shall neglect, fail or refuse to complete the work within the time stipulated, or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner,then the Contractor must agree to pay to the Owner the sum of$500.00 per day,not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for each and every calendar day that the work remains incomplete after the time stipulated. 4. Basis for completion in establishing liquidated damages clause requirements will be substantial completion as defined in the"General Conditions". 5. If, after execution of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor fails to fully complete items found incomplete or deficient during a final inspection within thirty(30)calendar days or fails to provide specified project close-out documents within sixty(60)calendar days,then the liquidated damages provision set forth in paragraph 3 above will again commence and continue until all such defective items are remedied and all close-out data is received. -END OF INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 21 14-4 00 23 14 BID FORM Perry Building& Design LLC dba Perry Construction Name of Bidder 5/27/2020 Date of Bid The undersigned, in compliance with the Invitation to Bid for the construction of the referenced project, having examined the drawings and specifications together with related documents and all conditions surrounding the work, and having visited the location of the proposed project, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and services to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the time set forth herein, and at the prices stated below. These prices are to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work under the Contract Documents of which this Bid is a part. It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and Owner that the date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential conditions of the Agreement. The Contractor agrees that the work will be prosecuted regularly and diligently at such a rate of progress as will ensure Substantial Completion within the calendar days stated below. Bid amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words will govern. PROPOSAL ITEMS: 1. SCALE AND FOUNDATION INSTALLATION. 2. GATE HOUSE BUILDING INCLUDING RAMPS AND WALK WAYS. 3. SITE WORK INCLUDING GRADING PARKING AND UTILITIES WORK. 1. FOR THE COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION OF A NEW LANDFILL SCALE AND FOUNDATION INCLUDING CONCRETE RAMPS FOR THE CITY OF PORT ARTHUR, 4732 TEXAS 73, PORT ARTHUR,TEXAS 77642 AS PER THE "CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS",THE SUM OF: Three hundred thirty-one thousand three hundred seventy-nine dollars and 0/00 Dollars ($331.379.00 ). Calendar Days for Completion 180 total (In Figures) 2. FOR THE COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION A NEW LANDFILL GATE HOUSE BUILDING INCLUDING WALKWAYS AND RAMPS FOR THE CITY OF PORT ARTHUR, 4732 TEXAS 73, PORT ARTHUR, TEXAS 77642 AS PER THE "CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS",THE SUM OF: Six hundred and forty-nine thousand nine hundred and nineteen dollars 00/00 Dollars ($649,910.00 ). Calendar Days for Completion 180 total (In Figures) BID FORM 00 23 14- 1 3. FOR THE COMPLETE CONSTRUCTION OF ALL SITE WORK INCLUDING SITE GRADING, PAVING AND UTILITIES FOR THE CITY OF PORT ARTHUR LANDFILL, 4732 TEXAS 73, PORT ARTHUR,TEXAS 77642 AS PER THE "CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS",THE SUM OF: Two Hundred and Eleven thousand five hundred and eighty dollars 00/00 Dollars ($211:580.00 ). Calendar Days for Completion 180 total INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS: It is further agreed that the Instructions to Bidders as set forth in the Specifications have been read and understood and that this proposal has been executed with the full knowledge as to the intent of that document. ADDENDUM RECEIPT: Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addendum No. 1 dated 12/27/2019 Addendum No. 2 dated 12/31/2019 Addendum No. 3 dated 1/612020 Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated Addendum No. dated BID ACKNOWLEDGEMENT: The undersigned affirms that they are duly authorized to execute this contract, that this company, corporation, firm, partnership or individual has not prepared this bid in collusion with any other Bidder, and that the content of this bid as to prices,terms or conditions has not been communicated by the undersigned. nor by any employee or agent to any other nercon engaged in this tvre of business prior to the official opening of this bid. Respectfully submitted, Contractor Perry Buildin4'Design LLC.. dba Perry Construction ( a partnership) By Sean Perry SEAL Title CEO (if Corporation) Business Address 17713 Telge Rd., Cypress Tx 77429 Telephone 832-953-2796 McDonald J., ' Architects ' BID FORM 00 23 14- 2 00 06 00 SCHEDULE OF STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS The following forms will be required for the execution of the Contract on the subject project: 1. STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR: AIA Document A101 2. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION: AIA Document A201 3. BID BOND: AIA Document A310 4. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS: AIA Document A312 5. LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS: AIA Document G805 6. APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT: AIA Documents G702 and G703. 7. CHANGE ORDER: AIA Document G701 8. CONSENT OF SURETY TO REDUCTION IN OR PARTIAL RELEASE OF RETAINAGE: AIA Document G707A 9. CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: AIA Document G704 10. CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS: AIA Document G706 11. CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS: AIA Document G706A 12. CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT: AIA Document G707 13. CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY: Form provided by local governing authority. \ST" .4qptis -END OF SCHEDULE OF STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS- SCHEDULE OF STANDARD CONTRACT FORMS 00 60 00- 1 Document A201 TM - 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) City of Port Arthur New Landfill Scales and Gate House 4732 Texas Highway 73,Port Arthur,Texas 77642 This document has important legal consequences. THE OWNER: Consultation with an attorney is (Name, legal status and address) encouraged with respect to its City of Port Arthur Texas completion or modification. 444 4th St. For guidance in modifying this Port Arthur,Texas 77640 document to include supplementary conditions,see THE ARCHITECT: AIA Document A503T"",Guide for (Name, legal status and address) Supplementary Conditions. McDonald Architects,LLC 19 Chelsea Drive Fort Worth,Texas 76134 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright 5 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 1 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. INDEX Architect's Authority to Reject Work (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) 3.5,4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work Architect's Decisions 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,4.2.14,6.3, Acceptance of Work 7.3.4,7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4.1,9.5,9.8.4,9.9.1, 9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.3 13.4.2, 15.2 Access to Work Architect's Inspections 3.16,6.2.1, 12.1 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Accident Prevention Architect's Instructions 10 3.2.4,3.3.1,4.2.6,4.2.7, 13.4.2 Acts and Omissions Architect's Interpretations 3.2,3.3.2,3.12.8,3.18,4.2.3,8.3.1,9.5.1, 10.2.5, 4.2.11,4.2.12 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Architect's Project Representative Addenda 4.2.10 1.1.1 Architect's Relationship with Contractor Additional Costs,Claims for 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2, 3.7.4,3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 3.5,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.9.3,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16, Additional Inspections and Testing 3.18,4.1.2,4.2,5.2,6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5, 9.4.2,9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Additional Time,Claims for Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,8.3.2, 15.1.6 1.1.2,4.2.3,4.2.4,4.2.6,9.6.3,9.6.4, 11.3 Administration of the Contract Architect's Representations 3.1.3,4.2,9.4,9.5 9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Architect's Site Visits 1.1.1 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Aesthetic Effect Asbestos 4.2.13 10.3.1 Allowances Attorneys'Fees 3.8 3.18.1,9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3 Applications for Payment Award of Separate Contracts 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5.1,9.5.4,9.6.3,9.7,9.10 6.1.1,6.1.2 Approvals Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for 2.1.1,2.3.1,2.5,3.1.3,3.10.2,3.12.8,3.12.9, Portions of the Work 3.12.10.1,4.2.7,9.3.2, 13.4.1 5.2 Arbitration Basic Definitions 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 1.1 ARCHITECT Bidding Requirements 4 1.1.1 Architect,Definition of Binding Dispute Resolution 4.1.1 8.3.1,9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, Architect,Extent of Authority 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 2.5,3.12.7,4.1.2,4.2,5.2,6.3,7.1.2,7.3.4,7.4,9.2, Bonds,Lien 9.3.1,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.8,9.10.1,9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 7.3.4.4,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.3 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Bonds,Performance,and Payment Architect,Limitations of Authority and 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Responsibility Building Information Models Use and Reliance 2.1.1,3.12.4,3.12.8,3.12.10,4.1.2,4.2.1,4.2.2, 1.8 4.2.3,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.10,4.2.12,4.2.13,5.2.1,7.4, Building Permit 9.4.2,9.5.4,9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 3.7.1 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses Capitalization 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3, 14.2.4 1.3 Architect's Administration of the Contract Certificate of Substantial Completion 3.1.3,3.7.4, 15.2,9.4.1,9.5 9.8.3,9.8.4,9.8.5 Architect's Approvals 2.5,3.1.3,3.5,3.10.2,4.2.7 AIA Document A201''—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. • Certificates for Payment Conditions of the Contract 4.2.1,4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7, 1.1.1,6.1.1,6.1.4 9.10.1,9.10.3, 14.1.1.3,14.2.4, 15.1.4 Consent,Written Certificates of Inspection,Testing or Approval 3.4.2,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3, 13.2, 13.4.4 15.4.4.2 Certificates of Insurance Consolidation or Joinder 9.10.2 15.4.4 Change Orders CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.8.2.3,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,5.2.3, SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7.1.2,7.1.3,7.2,7.3.2,7.3.7,7.3.9,7.3.10,8.3.1, 1.1.4,6 9.3.1.1,9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Construction Change Directive,Definition of Change Orders,Definition of 7.3.1 7.2.1 Construction Change Directives CHANGES IN THE WORK 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1.1,7.1.2,7.1.3, 2.2.2,3.11,4.2.8,7,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 7.3,9.3.1.1 11.5 Construction Schedules,Contractor's Claims,Definition of 3.10,3.11,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 15.1.1 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts Claims,Notice of 5.4, 14.2.2.2 1.6.2, 15.1.3 Continuing Contract Performance CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.1.4 3.2.4,6.1.1,6.3,7.3.9,9.3.3,9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Contract,Definition of Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 1.1.2 15.4.1 CONTRACT,TERMINATION OR Claims for Additional Cost SUSPENSION OF THE 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4,7.3.9,9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 5.4.1.1,5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Claims for Additional Time Contract Administration 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.7.4,6.1.1,8.3.2,9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 Concealed or Unknown Conditions,Claims for Contract Award and Execution,Conditions Relating 3.7.4 to Claims for Damages 3.7.1,3.10,5.2,6.1 3.2.4,3.18,83.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, Contract Documents,Copies Furnished and Use of 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 1.5.2,2.3.6,5.3 Claims Subject to Arbitration Contract Documents,Definition of 15.4.1 1.1.1 Cleaning Up Contract Sum 3.15,6.3 2.2.2,2.2.4,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.8,3.10.2,5.2.3,7.3,7.4, Commencement of the Work,Conditions Relating to 9.1,9.2,9.4.2,9.5.1.4,9.6.7,9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 2.2.1,3.2.2,3.4.1,3.7.1,3.10.1,3.12.6,5.2.1,5.2.3, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5,15.2.5 6.2.2,8.1.2,8.2.2,8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Contract Sum,Definition of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 9.1 8.1.2 Contract Time Communications 1.1.4,2.2.1,2.2.2,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.10.2,5.2.3,6.1.5, 3.9.1,4.2.4 7.2.1.3,7.3.1,7.3.5,7.3.6,7,7,7.3.10,7.4,8.1.1, Completion,Conditions Relating to 8.2.1,8.2.3,8.3.1,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 3.4.1,3.11,3.15,4.2.2,4.2.9,8.2,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 Contract Time,Definition of COMPLETION,PAYMENTS AND 8.1.1 9 CONTRACTOR Completion,Substantial 3 3.10.1,4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1, Contractor,Definition of 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 3.1,6.1.2 Compliance with Laws Contractor's Construction and Submittal 2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, 10.2.2, Schedules 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,4.2.3,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Contractor's Employees Concealed or Unknown Conditions 2.2.4,3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 3.7.4,4.2.8,8.3.1, 10.3 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 MA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright O 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAD Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Contractor's Liability Insurance Damages,Claims for 11.1 3.2.4,3.18,6.1.1,8.3.3,9.5.1,9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 and Owner's Forces Damages for Delay 3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,6, 11.3, 12.2.4 6.2.3,8.3.3,9.5.1.6,9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors Date of Commencement of the Work,Definition of 1.2.2,2.2.4,3.3.2,3.18.1,3.18.2,4.2.4,5,9.6.2, 8.1.2 9.6.7,9.10.2, 11.2, 11.3, 11.4 Date of Substantial Completion,Definition of Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 8.1.3 1.1.2, 1.5,2.3.3,3.1.3,3.2.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.3.1,3.4.2, Day,Definition of 3.5.1,3.7.4,3.10,3.11,3.12,3.16,3.18,4.2,5.2, 8.1.4 6.2.2,7,8.3.1,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.7,9.8,9.9, 10.2.6, Decisions of the Architect 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 3.7.4,4.2.6,4.2.7,4.2.11,4.2.12,4.2.13,6.3,7.3.4, Contractor's Representations 7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.4.2, 3.2.1,3.2.2,3.5,3.12.6,6.2.2,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.8.2 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Decisions to Withhold Certification Work 9.4.1,9.5,9.7, 14.1.1.3 3.3.2,3.18,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,9.5.1, 10.2.8 Defective or Nonconforming Work,Acceptance, Contractor's Review of Contract Documents Rejection and Correction of 3.2 2.5,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.3,9.5.1,9.5.3,9.6.6,9.8.2,9.9.3, Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 9.10.4, 12.2.1 2.2.2,9.7 Definitions Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,5.1, 14.1 6.1.2,7.2.1,7.3.1,8.1,9.1,9.8.1, 15.1.1 Contractor's Submittals Delays and Extensions of Time 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, 3.2,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 9.8.3,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 10.3.2,10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Contractor's Superintendent Digital Data Use and Transmission 3.9, 10.2.6 1.7 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Disputes Procedures 6.3,7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, Documents and Samples at the Site 7.1.3,7.3.4,7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 3.11 Coordination and Correlation Drawings,Definition of 1.2,3.2.1,3.3.1,3.10,3.12.6,6.1.3,6.2.1 1.1.5 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications Drawings and Specifications,Use and Ownership of 1.5,2.3.6,3.11 3.11 Copyrights Effective Date of Insurance 1.5,3.17 8.2.2 Correction of Work Emergencies 2.5,3.7.3,9.4.2,9.8.2,9.8.3,9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2. 12.3, 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Employees,Contractor's Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 3.3.2,3.4.3,3.8.1,3.9,3.18.2,4.2.3,4.2.6, 10.2, 1.2 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Cost,Definition of Equipment,Labor,or Materials 7.3.4 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, Costs 4.2.6,4.2.7,5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3, 2.5,3.2.4,3.7.3,3.8.2,3.15.2,5.4.2,6.1.1,6.2.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 7.3.3.3,7.3.4,7.3.8,7.3.9,9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, Execution and Progress of the Work 11.2, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2,2.3.4,2.3.6,3.1,3.3.1,3.4.1,3.7.1, Cutting and Patching 3.10.1,3.12,3.14,4.2,6.2.2,7.1.3,7.3.6,8.2,9.5.1, 3.14,6.2.5 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Extensions of Time Contractors 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3,7.4,9.5.1,9.7, 10.3.2, 3.14.2,6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Damage to the Work Failure of Payment 3.14.2,9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 AIA Document A201' —2017.Copyright 0 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966.1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Document on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Faulty Work Insurance Companies,Consent to Partial Occupancy (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) 9.9.1 Final Completion and Final Payment Insured loss,Adjustment and Settlement of 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.8.2,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 11.5 Financial Arrangements,Owner's Intent of the Contract Documents 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 1.2.1,4.2.7,4.2.12,4.2.13 GENERAL PROVISIONS Interest 1 13.5 Governing Law Interpretation 13.1 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4,4.1.1,5.1,6.1.2, 15.1.1 Guarantees(See Warranty) Interpretations,Written Hazardous Materials and Substances 4.2.11,4.2.12 10.2.4,10.3 Judgment on Final Award Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 15.4.2 5.2.1 Labor and Materials,Equipment Indemnification 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 3.17,3.18,9.6.8,9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 10.2.1, Information and Services Required of the Owner 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10.1,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, Labor Disputes 9.6.1,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 8.3.1 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Laws and Regulations Initial Decision 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.2.4,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4, 15.2 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, Initial Decision Maker,Definition of 15.4 1.1.8 Liens Initial Decision Maker,Decisions 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Limitations,Statutes of Initial Decision Maker,Extent of Authority 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 14.2.4, 15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Limitations of Liability Injury or Damage to Person or Property 3.2.2,3.5,3.12.10,3.12.10.1,3.17,3.18.1,4.2.6, 10.2.8, 10.4 4.2.7,6.2.2,9.4.2,9.6.4,9.6.7,9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, Inspections 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, Limitations of Time 9.9.2,9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2.7, Instructions to Bidders 5.2,5.3,5.4.1,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, 1.1.1 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15, Instructions to the Contractor 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 3.2.4,3.3.1,3.8.1,5.2.1,7,8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Materials,Hazardous Instruments of Service,Definition of 10.2.4, 10.3 1.1.7 Materials,Labor,Equipment and Insurance 1.1.3, 1.1.6,3.4.1,3.5,3.8.2,3.8.3,3.12,3.13,3.15.1, 6.1.1,7.3.4,8.2.2,9.3.2,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, 10.2.5, 5.2.1,6.2.1,7.3.4,9.3.2,9.3.3,9.5.1.3,9.10.2, 11 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Insurance,Notice of Cancellation or Expiration Means,Methods,Techniques,Sequences and 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Procedures of Construction Insurance,Contractor's Liability 3.3.1,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,9.4.2 11.1 Mechanic's Lien Insurance,Effective Date of 2.1.2,9.3.1,9.3.3,9.6.8,9.10.2,9.10.4, 15.2.8 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Mediation Insurance,Owner's Liability 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 11.2 15.4.1.1 Insurance,Property Minor Changes in the Work 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.12.8,4.2.8,7.1,7.4 Insurance,Stored Materials MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9.3.2 13 INSURANCE AND BONDS Modifications,Definition of 11 1.1.1 AIA Document A201T"—2017.Copyright©1911,1915.1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA°Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Modifications to the Contract Owner's Right to Stop the Work 1.1.1, 1.1.2,2.5,3.11,4.1.2,4.2.1,5.2.3,7,8.3.1,9.7, 2.4 10.3.2 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work Mutual Responsibility 14.3 6.2 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract Nonconforming Work,Acceptance of 14.2, 14.4 9.6.6,9.9.3, 12.3 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications Nonconforming Work,Rejection and Correction of and Other Instruments of Service 2.4,2.5,3.5,4.2.6,6.2.4,9.5.1,9.8.2,9.9.3,9.10.4, 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5,2.3.6,3.2.2,3.11,3.17,4.2.12, 12.2 5.3 Notice Partial Occupancy or Use 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2,2.1.2,2.2.2.,2.2.3,2.2.4,2.5,3.2.4, 9.6.6,9.9 3.3.1,3.7.4,3.7.5,3.9.2,3.12.9,3.12.10,5.2.1,7.4, Patching,Cutting and 8.2.2 9.6.8,9.7,9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 3.14,6.2.5 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, Patents 15.1.6, 15.4.1 3.17 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance Payment,Applications for 11.1.4, 11.2.3 4.2.5,7.3.9,9.2,9.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.3,9.7,9.8.5,9.10.1, Notice of Claims 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 1.6.2,2.1.2,3.7.4,9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, Payment,Certificates for 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 4.2.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.4,9.5,9.6.1,9.6.6,9.7,9.10.1, Notice of Testing and Inspections 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Payment,Failure of Observations,Contractor's 9.5.1.3,9.7,9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 3.2,3.7.4 Payment,Final Occupancy 4.2.1,4.2.9,9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 2.3.1,9.6.6,9.8 Payment Bond,Performance Bond and Orders,Written 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 1.1.1,2.4,3.9.2,7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, Payments,Progress 14.3.1 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 OWNER PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 2 9 Owner,Definition of Payments to Subcontractors 2.1.1 5.4.2,9.5.1.3,9.6.2,9.6.3,9.6.4,9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 Owner,Evidence of Financial Arrangements PCB 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 10.3.1 Owner,Information and Services Required of the Performance Bond and Payment Bond 2.1.2,2.2,2.3,3.2.2,3.12.10,6.1.3,6.1.4,6.2.5, 7.3.4.4,9.6.7,9.10.3, 11.1.2 9.3.2,9.6.1,9.6.4,9.9.2,9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, Permits,Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 2.3.1,3.7,3.13,7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 Owner's Authority PERSONS AND PROPERTY,PROTECTION 1.5,2.1.1,2.3.32.4,2.5,3.4.2,3.8.1,3.12.10,3.14.2, OF 4.1.2,4.2.4,4.2.9,5.2.1,5.2.4,5.4.1,6.1,6.3,7.2.1, 10 7.3.1,8.2.2,8.3.1,9.3.2,9.5.1,9.6.4,9.9.1,9.10.2, Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 10.3.1 15.2.7 Product Data,Definition of Owner's Insurance 3.12.2 11.2 Product Data and Samples,Shop Drawings Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 1.1.2,5.2,5.3,5.4,9.6.4,9.10.2, 14.2.2 Progress and Completion Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work 4.2.2,8.2,9.8,9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 2.5, 14.2.2 Progress Payments Owner's Right to Clean Up 9.3,9.6,9.8.5,9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 6.3 Project,Definition of Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to 1.1.4 Award Separate Contracts Project Representatives 6.1 4.2.10 AIA Document A2011"—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 6 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Property Insurance Shop Drawings,Definition of 10.2.5, 11.2 3.12.1 Proposal Requirements Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples 1.1.1 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY Site,Use of 10 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Regulations and Laws Site Inspections 1.5,2.3.2,3.2.3,3.6,3.7,3.12.10,3.13,9.6.4,9.9.1, 3.2.2,3.3.3,3.7.1,3.7.4,4.2,9.9.2,9.4.2,9.10.1, 13.4 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, Site Visits,Architect's 15.4 3.7.4,4.2.2,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.9.2,9.10.1, 13.4 Rejection of Work Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Releases and Waivers of Liens Specifications,Definition of 9.3.1,9.10.2 1.1.6 Representations Specifications 3.2.1,3.5,3.12.6,8.2.1,9.3.3,9.4.2,9.5.1,9.10.1 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5,3.12.10,3.17,4.2.14 Representatives Statute of Limitations 2.1.1,3.1.1,3.9,4.1.1,4.2.10, 13.2.1 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work Stopping the Work 3.3.2,3.18,4.2.2,4.2.3,5.3,6.1.3,6.2,6.3,9.5.1, 10 2.2.2,2.4,9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Retainage Stored Materials 9.3.1,9.6.2,9.8.5,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 6.2.1,9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Subcontractor,Definition of Conditions by Contractor 5.1.1 3.2,3.12.7,6.1.3 SUBCONTRACTORS Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and 5 Architect Subcontractors,Work by 3.10.1,3.10.2,3.11,3.12,4.2,5.2,6.1.3,9.2,9.8.2 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,3.18,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4, Review of Shop Drawings,Product Data and 9.3.1.2,9.6.7 Samples by Contractor Subcontractual Relations 3.12 5.3,5.4,9.3.1.2,9.6,9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Rights and Remedies Submittals 1.1.2,2.4,2.5,3.5,3.7.4,3.15.2,4.2.6,5.3,5.4,6.1, 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,7.3.4,9.2,9.3, 6.3,7.3.1,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 9.8,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.3 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Submittal Schedule Royalties,Patents and Copyrights 3.10.2,3.12.5,4.2.7 3.17 Subrogation,Waivers of Rules and Notices for Arbitration 6.1.1, 11.3 15.4.1 Substances,Hazardous Safety of Persons and Property 10.3 10.2, 10.4 Substantial Completion Safety Precautions and Programs 4.2.9,8.1.1,8.1.3,8.2.3,9.4.2,9.8,9.9.1,9.10.3, 3.3.1,4.2.2,42.7,5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 12.2, 15.1.2 Samples,Definition of Substantial Completion,Definition of 3.12.3 9.8.1 Samples,Shop Drawings,Product Data and Substitution of Subcontractors 3.11,3.12,4.2.7 5.2.3,5.2.4 Samples at the Site,Documents and Substitution of Architect 3.11 2.3.3 Schedule of Values Substitutions of Materials 9.2,9.3.1 3.4.2,3.5,7.3.8 Schedules,Construction Sub-subcontractor,Definition of 3.10,3.12.1,3.12.2,6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 5.1.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors Subsurface Conditions 1.1.4,3.12.5,3.14.2,4.2.4,4.2.7,6,8.3.1, 12.1.2 3.7.4 Separate Contractors,Definition of Successors and Assigns 6.1.1 13.2 AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966.1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The !mt. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA`Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Superintendent 9.4.1,9.5,9.6,9.7,9.8,9.9,9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 3.9, 10.2.6 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Supervision and Construction Procedures Time Limits on Claims 1.2.2,3.3,3.4,3.12.10,4.2.2,4.2.7,6.1.3,6.2.4, 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 7.1.3,7.3.4,8.2,8.3.1,9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Title to Work Suppliers 9.3.2,9.3.3 1.5,3.12.1,4.2.4,4.2.6,5.2.1,9.3,9.4.2,9.5.4,9.6, UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF 9.10.5, 14.2.1 WORK Surety 12 5.4.1.2,9.6.8,9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, Uncovering of Work 15.2.7 12.1 Surety,Consent of Unforeseen Conditions,Concealed or Unknown 9.8.5,9.10.2,9.10.3 3.7.4,8.3.1, 10.3 Surveys Unit Prices 1.1.7,2.3.4 7.3.3.2,9.1.2 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience Use of Documents 14.3 1.1.1, 1.5,2.3.6,3.12.6,5.3 Suspension of the Work Use of Site 3.7.5,5.4.2, 14.3 3.13,6.1.1,6.2.1 Suspension or Termination of the Contract Values,Schedule of 5.4.1.1, 14 9.2,9.3.1 Taxes Waiver of Claims by the Architect 3.6,3.8.2.1,7.3.4.4 13.3.2 Termination by the Contractor Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause Waiver of Claims by the Owner 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 9.9.3,9.10.3,9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.4 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Termination of the Architect Waiver of Liens 2.3.3 9.3,9.10.2,9.10.4 Termination of the Contractor Employment Waivers of Subrogation 14.2.2 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 3.5,4.2.9,9.3.3,9.8.4,9.9.1,9.10.2,9.10.4, 12.2.2, CONTRACT 15.1.2 14 Weather Delays Tests and Inspections 8.3, 15.1.6.2 3.1.3,3.3.3,3.7.1,4.2.2,4.2.6,4.2.9,9.4.2,9.8.3, Work,Definition of 9.9.2,9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 1.1.3 TIME Written Consent 8 1.5.2,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.12.8,3.14.2,4.1.2,9.3.2,9.10.3, Time,Delays and Extensions of 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 3.2.4,3.7.4,5.2.3,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3,9.5.1,9.7, Written Interpretations 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 4.2.11,4.2.12 Time Limits Written Orders 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, 1.1.1,2.4,3.9,7,8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 5.2,5.3,5.4,6.2.4,7.3,7.4,8.2,9.2,9.3.1,9.3.3, AIA Document A201""—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966.1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor(hereinafter the Agreement)and consist of the Agreement,Conditions of the Contract(General,Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract,other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.A Modification is(1)a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties,(2)a Change Order,(3)a Construction Change Directive,or(4)a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect.Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement,the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid,Instructions to Bidders,sample forms,other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals,the Contractor's bid or proposal,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. §1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction.The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations,representations,or agreements,either written or oral.The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification.The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind(1)between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,(2)between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor,(3)between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants,or(4)between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall,however,be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. §1.1.3 The Work The term"Work"means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents,whether completed or partially completed,and includes all other labor,materials,equipment,and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations.The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. §1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. §1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design,location and dimensions of the Work,generally including plans,elevations,sections,details,schedules,and diagrams. §1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment,systems,standards and workmanship for the Work,and performance of related services. §1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations,in any medium of expression now known or later developed,of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements.Instruments of Service may include,without limitation,studies,surveys,models, sketches,drawings,specifications,and other similar materials. §1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2.The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents §1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor.The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all;performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. AIA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 9 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions.If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law,or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable,then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed,to the fullest extent permitted by law,to give effect to the parties' intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. §1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions,sections and articles,and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. §1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. §1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are(1)specifically defined,(2)the titles of numbered articles,or(3)the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. §1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as"all"and"any"and articles such as"the"and"an,"but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. §1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings,Specifications,and Other Instruments of Service §1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service,including the Drawings and Specifications,and retain all common law,statutory,and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service,including copyrights.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub- subcontractors,and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service.Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' reserved rights. §1.5.2 The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them,subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8,solely and exclusively for execution of the Work.All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice,if any,shown on the Instruments of Service.The Contractor,Subcontractors,Sub-subcontractors,and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner,Architect,and the Architect's consultants. §1.6 Notice §1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2,where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party,such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person,by mail,by courier,or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. §1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail,or by courier providing proof of delivery. §1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form.The parties will use AIA Document E203T"_2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,to establish the protocols for the development,use,transmission,and exchange of digital data. §1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of,or reliance on,all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of,and reliance on,the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203Tm-2013,Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit,and the requisite AIA Document G202Tt`42013,Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form,shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk MA Document A201 T"—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915.1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The snit American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants,the authors of,or contributors to,the building information model,and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER §2.1 General §2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization.Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1,the Architect does not have such authority.The term"Owner"means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. §2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor,within fifteen days after receipt of a written request,information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate,give notice of,or enforce mechanic's lien rights.Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,usually referred to as the site,and the Owner's interest therein. §2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements §2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract.The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence.If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. §2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract only if(1)the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2)the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due; or(3)a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. If the Owner fails to provide such evidence,as required,within fourteen days of the Contractor's request,the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and,in that event,shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped.However,if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under(3)above,the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided.If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. §2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2,the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. §2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as"confidential,"the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person.However,the Contractor may disclose"confidential"information,after seven(7)days'notice to the Owner,where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity,or by court or arbitrator(s)order.The Contractor may also disclose"confidential"information to its employees,consultants,sureties, Subcontractors and their employees,Sub-subcontractors,and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. §2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner §2.3.1 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,including those required under Section 3.7.1,the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals,easements,assessments and charges required for construction,use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. §2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture,or an entity lawfully practicing architecture,in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. §2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates,the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 11 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics,legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project,and a legal description of the site.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. §2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness.The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. §2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. §2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work,or any portion thereof,until the cause for such order has been eliminated;however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity,except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. §2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness,the Owner may,without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have,correct such default or neglect.Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may,pursuant to Section 9.5.1,withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies,including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default,neglect,or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect,or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner,the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR §3.1 General §3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed,if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract.The term"Contractor"means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. §3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract,or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. §3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor §3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed,and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. §3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary,the Contractor shall,before starting each portion of the Work,carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work,as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4,shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work,and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it.These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions,or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents;however,the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors,inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in AIA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961.1963.1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 12 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. such form as the Architect may require.It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional,unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. §3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. §3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3,the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner,subject to Section 15.1.7,as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations.If the Contractor performs those obligations,the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents,for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents,or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances, codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities. §3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures §3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work,using the Contractor's best skill and attention.The Contractor shall be solely responsible for,and have control over,construction means,methods,techniques,sequences, and procedures,and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures,the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and shall be solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means,methods, techniques,sequences,or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures may not be safe,the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect,and shall propose alternative means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction.Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor's proposed alternative,the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means,methods, techniques,sequences,or procedures. §3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees,and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for,or on behalf of,the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. §3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. §3.4 Labor and Materials §3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,materials, equipment,tools,construction equipment and machinery,water,heat,utilities,transportation,and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work,whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. §3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4,the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner,after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. §3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work.The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. §3.5 Warranty §3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise.The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit.Work,materials,or AlA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AlA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective.The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse,alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor,improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation,or normal wear and tear and normal usage.If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. §3.5.2 All material,equipment,or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner,or shall be transferable to the Owner,and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. §3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales,consumer,use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded,whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. §3.7 Permits, Fees,Notices and Compliance with Laws §3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits,fees,licenses,and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. §3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. §3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of public authorities,the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. §3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are(1)subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or(2)unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions.The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and,if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of,or time required for,performance of any part of the Work,will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified,the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor,stating the reasons.If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation,that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15. §3.7.5 If,in the course of the Work,the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers,archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect.Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations.The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. §3.8 Allowances §3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents.Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. §3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes,less applicable trade discounts; AIA Document A201^"—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951.1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997.2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site,labor,installation costs,overhead,profit,and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances;and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances,the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order.The amount of the Change Order shall reflect(1)the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and(2)changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. §3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. §3.9 Superintendent §3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work.The superintendent shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. §3.9.2 The Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent.Within 14 days of receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor,stating whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or(2)requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. §3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. §3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules §3.10.1 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract,shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work.The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project,including(1)the date of commencement of the Work,interim schedule milestone dates,and the date of Substantial Completion;(2)an apportionment of the Work by construction activity;and(3)the time required for completion of each portion of the Work.The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents.The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. §3.10.2 The Contractor,promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule,shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval.The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld.The submittal schedule shall(1)be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule,and(2)allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals.If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule,or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule,the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. §3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. §3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available,at the Project site,the Contract Documents,including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives,and other Modifications,in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction,and the approved Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,and similar required submittals.These shall be in electronic form or paper copy,available to the Architect and Owner,and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. §3.12 Shop Drawings,Product Data and Samples §3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings,diagrams,schedules,and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor,Sub-subcontractor,manufacturer,supplier,or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. §3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations,standard schedules,performance charts,instructions,brochures,diagrams,and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915.1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 15 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials,equipment,or workmanship,and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. §3.12.4 Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals are not Contract Documents.Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals.Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7.Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. §3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents,approve,and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents,in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or,in the absence of an approved submittal schedule,with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. §3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,and similar submittals,the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has(1)reviewed and approved them,(2)determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto,or will do so,and(3)checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. §3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. §3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings,Product Data,Samples,or similar submittals,unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and(1)the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work,or(2)a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation.The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,by the Architect's approval thereof. §3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention,in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples,or similar submittals,to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals.In the absence of such notice,the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. §3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,and procedures.The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. §3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems,materials,or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents,the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional,whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings,calculations,specifications,certifications,Shop Drawings,and other submittals prepared by such professional.Shop Drawings,and other submittals related to the Work,designed or certified by such professional,if prepared by others,shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect.The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications,and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals,provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy.Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10,the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201 T"'—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA•Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand•Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria,the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. §3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,lawful orders of public authorities,and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. §3.14 Cutting and Patching §3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting,fitting,or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly.All areas requiring cutting,fitting,or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting,fitting,or patching,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. §3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting,patching,or otherwise altering such construction,or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold,from the Owner or a Separate Contractor,its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. §3.15 Cleaning Up §3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract.At completion of the Work,the Contractor shall remove waste materials,rubbish,the Contractor's tools,construction equipment,machinery,and surplus materials from and about the Project. §3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. §3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. §3.17 Royalties,Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof,but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design,process,or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents,or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications,or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect.However,if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by,or made known to,the Contractor,the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. §3.18 Indemnification §3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,Architect, Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims,damages,losses,and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys' fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim,damage,loss,or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,regardless of whether or not such claim,damage,loss,or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. §3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,anyone directly or indirectly employed by them,or anyone for whose acts they may be liable,the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, AIA Document A201"'—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966.1970,1976,1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. compensation,or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts,or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT §4.1 General §4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement. §4.1.2 Duties,responsibilities,and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted,modified,or extended without written consent of the Owner,Contractor,and Architect.Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. §4.2 Administration of the Contract §4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment.The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. §4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction,or as otherwise agreed with the Owner,to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work,when fully completed,will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However,the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work.The Architect will not have control over,charge of,or responsibility for the construction means,methods,techniques,sequences or procedures,or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work,since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. §4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits,the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,and promptly report to the Owner(1)known deviations from the Contract Documents,(2)known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor,and(3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work.The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.The Architect will not have control over or charge of,and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of,the Contractor,Subcontractors,or their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities.The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect.Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor.Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner.The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. §4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. §4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable,the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3,whether or not the Work is fabricated,installed or completed. However,neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor,Subcontractors,suppliers, their agents or employees,or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. §4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve,or take other appropriate action upon,the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings,Product Data,and Samples,but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents.The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review.Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of AIA Document A201' -2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. other details such as dimensions and quantities,or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems,all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3,3.5,and 3.12.The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means,methods,techniques,sequences,or procedures.The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. §4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives,and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4.The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. §4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion;issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8;receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records,written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10;and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. §4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree,the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties,responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. §4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under,and requirements of,the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. §4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of,and reasonably inferable from,the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings.When making such interpretations and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor,will not show partiality to either,and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. §4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. §4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents.The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.If appropriate,the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS §5.1 Definitions §5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor.The term"Subcontractor"does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. §5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site.The term"Sub-subcontractor"is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. §5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work §5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents,the Contractor,as soon as practicable after award of the Contract,shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design.Within 14 days of receipt of the information,the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect(1)has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or(2)requires additional time for review.Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. init. AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright S 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection.The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. §5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection.If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference,if any,occasioned by such change,and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However,no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. §5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor,person,or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. §5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor,to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents,and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor,by these Contract Documents,assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights,and shall allow to the Subcontractor,unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement,the benefit of all rights,remedies,and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor,by the Contract Documents,has against the Owner.Where appropriate,the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors.The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor,prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound,and,upon written request of the Subcontractor,identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents.Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. §5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts §5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner,provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor;and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any,obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement,the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract. §5.4.2 Upon such assignment,if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days,the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. §5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4,the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity,the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS §6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts §6.1.1 The term"Separate Contractor(s)"shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements.The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces,and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract,including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. AIA Document A201"'—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand•Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site,the term"Contractor"in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. §6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor,who shall cooperate with them.The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules.The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement.The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor,Separate Contractors,and the Owner until subsequently revised. §6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or with Separate Contractors,the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract,including, without excluding others,those stated in Article 3,this Article 6,and Articles 10, 11,and 12. §6.2 Mutual Responsibility §6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities,and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. §6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor,the Contractor shall,prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work,promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor's Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or Separate Contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work.The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent. §6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor's delays,improperly timed activities or defective construction.The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor's delays,improperly timed activities,damage to the Work or defective construction. §6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. §6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. §6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor,Separate Contractors,and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish,the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK §7.1 General §7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract,and without invalidating the Contract,by Change Order,Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. §7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner,Contractor,and Architect.A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. AIA Document A201""—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work,unless otherwise provided in the Change Order,Construction Change Directive,or order for a minor change in the Work. §7.2 Change Orders §7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,Contractor,and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum;and .3 The extent of the adjustment,if any,in the Contract Time. §7.3 Construction Change Directives §7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect,directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment,if any,in the Contract Sum or Contract Time,or both.The Owner may by Construction Change Directive,without invalidating the Contract,order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions,deletions,or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. §7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. §7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. §7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change,including,in case of an increase in the Contract Sum,an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement,or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement,a reasonable amount.In such case,and also under Section 7.3.3.3,the Contractor shall keep and present,in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data.Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor,including applicable payroll taxes,fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers' compensation insurance,and other employee costs approved by the Architect; .2 Costs of materials,supplies,and equipment,including cost of transportation,whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment,exclusive of hand tools,whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance,permit fees,and sales,use,or similar taxes,directly related to the change;and .5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. §7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time,the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. §7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method,if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. §7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. AIA Document A201 T"'—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987, 1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA°Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect.When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change,the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase,if any,with respect to that change. §7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner,the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment.The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines,in the Architect's professional judgment,to be reasonably justified.The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order,subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. §7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time,or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order.Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. §7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time.The Architect's order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work.If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect's order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME §8.1 Definitions §8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided,Contract Time is the period of time,including authorized adjustments,allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. §8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. §8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. §8.1.4 The term"day"as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. §8.2 Progress and Completion §8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract.By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. §8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly,except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. §8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. §8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time §8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by(1)an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect,of an employee of either,or of a Separate Contractor;(2)by changes ordered in the Work;(3) by labor disputes,fire,unusual delay in deliveries,unavoidable casualties,adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2,or other causes beyond the Contractor's control;(4)by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution;or(5)by other causes that the Contractor asserts,and the Architect determines,justify delay,then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. §8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 23 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand•Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION §9.1 Contract Sum §9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and,including authorized adjustments,is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. §9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon,and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor,the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. §9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price,the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment,allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work.The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form,and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy,required by the Architect.This schedule,unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require,and unless objected to by the Architect,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's subsequent Applications for Payment. §9.3 Applications for Payment §9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment,the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values,if required under Section 9.2,for completed portions of the Work.The application shall be notarized,if required,and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment that the Owner or Architect require,such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers,and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9,such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives,or by interim determinations of the Architect,but not yet included in Change Orders. §9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier,unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. §9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.If approved in advance by the Owner,payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing.Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest,and shall include the costs of applicable insurance,storage,and transportation to the site,for such materials and equipment stored off the site. §9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment.The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall,to the best of the Contractor's knowledge,information,and belief,be free and clear of liens,claims,security interests,or encumbrances,in favor of the Contractor,Subcontractors,suppliers,or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials,and equipment relating to the Work. §9.4 Certificates for Payment §9.4.1 The Architect will,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,either(1)issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment,with a copy to the Contractor;or (2)issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due,and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1;or AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Inrt American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. (3)withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment,and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. §9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment,that,to the best of the Architect's knowledge,information,and belief,the Work has progressed to the point indicated,the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified.The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion,and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect.However,the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has(1)made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work;(2)reviewed construction means,methods, techniques,sequences,or procedures;(3)reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment;or(4)made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. §9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification §9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part,to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner,if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made.If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application,the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1.If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner.The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or,because of subsequently discovered evidence,may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued,to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2,because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims,unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor,materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time,and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part,that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. §9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed,certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. §9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3,the Owner may,at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered.If the Owner makes payments by joint check,the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment. §9.6 Progress Payments §9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment,the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents,and shall so notify the Architect. §9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor,no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled,reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work.The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright©1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §9.6.3 The Architect will,on request,furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable,information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. §9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work.If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days,the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid.Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay,or to see to the payment of money to,a Subcontractor or supplier,except as may otherwise be required by law. §9.6.5 The Contractor's payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. §9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment,a progress payment,or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials,or both,under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner.Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor,create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust,or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. §9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss,liability,damage or expense,including reasonable attorney's fees and litigation expenses,arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment,the Owner shall notify the Contractor.If approved by the applicable court,when required,the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. §9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment,through no fault of the Contractor,within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment,or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents,the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution,then the Contractor may,upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and Architect,stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received.The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown,delay and start-up,plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. §9.8 Substantial Completion §9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. §9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. §9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list,the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete.If the Architect's inspection discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use,the Contractor shall,before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case,the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. AIA Document A201 T"'-2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion;establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,maintenance,heat,utilities,damage to the Work and insurance;and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate.Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. §9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate.Upon such acceptance,and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof.Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use §9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor,provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project.Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete,provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,retainage, if any,security,maintenance,heat, utilities,damage to the Work and insurance,and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents.When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld.The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or,if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. §9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use,the Owner,Contractor,and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. §9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon,partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment §9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment,the Architect will promptly make such inspection.When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief,and on the basis of the Architect's on-site visits and inspections,the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable.The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. §9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect(1)an affidavit that payrolls,bills for materials and equipment,and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered(less amounts withheld by Owner)have been paid or otherwise satisfied,(2)a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect,(3)a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents,(4) consent of surety,if any,to final payment,(5)documentation of any special warranties,such as manufacturers' warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties,and(6)if required by the Owner,other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations,such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens,claims,security interests,or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner,the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance.If a lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien,claim,security interest,or encumbrance,including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demande Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §9.10.3 If,after Substantial Completion of the Work,final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion,and the Architect so confirms,the Owner shall,upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect,and without terminating the Contract,make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed,corrected,and accepted.If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents,and if bonds have been furnished,the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment.Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. §9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from .1 liens,Claims,security interests,or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents;or .4 audits performed by the Owner,if permitted by the Contract Documents,after final payment. §9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a supplier,shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY §10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. §10.2 Safety of Persons and Property §10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of,and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage,injury,or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,whether in storage on or off the site, under care,custody,or control of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,or a Sub-subcontractor;and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto,such as trees,shrubs,lawns,walks,pavements,roadways, structures,and utilities not designated for removal,relocation,or replacement in the course of construction. §10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with,and give notices required by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes, rules and regulations,and lawful orders of public authorities,bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage,injury,or loss. §10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement,erect,and maintain,as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards;promulgating safety regulations;and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. §10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment,or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work,the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. §10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss(other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents)to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3.The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them,or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. AIA Document A201 Tm—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents.This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. §10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. §10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party,or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible,notice of the injury or damage,whether or not insured,shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery.The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. §10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances §10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance,including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl(PCB),encountered on the site by the Contractor,the Contractor shall,upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition. §10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice,the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to cause it to be rendered harmless.Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance.The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner.If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner,the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor.By Change Order,the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown,delay,and start-up. §10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law,the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,losses,and expenses,including but not limited to attorneys'fees,arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless,provided that such claim,damage,loss,or expense is attributable to bodily injury,sickness,disease or death,or to injury to or destruction of tangible property(other than the Work itself),except to the extent that such damage, loss,or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. §10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents.The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents,except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. §10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs(1)for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles,or(2)where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1,except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. §10.3.6 If,without negligence on the part of the Contractor,the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA°Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property,the Contractor shall act,at the Contractor's discretion,to prevent threatened damage,injury,or loss.Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS §11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds §11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability,containing the endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located.The Owner,Architect, and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. §11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types,for such penal sums,and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. §11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance. Within three(3)business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration.Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor,the Owner shall,unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner,have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor.The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. §11.2 Owner's Insurance §11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability,containing the endorsements,and subject to the terms and conditions,as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents.The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. §11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance,with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents,the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work.Upon receipt of notice from the Owner,the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub-Subcontractors in the Work.When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved,the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted.In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage,the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub- subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner.The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order.If the Owner does not provide written notice,and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance,the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. §11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance. Within three(3)business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents,the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration.Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor:(1)the Contractor,upon receipt of notice from the Owner,shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor;(2)the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted;and(3)the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor,Subcontractors,and Sub- subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled.If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage,the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by AIA Document A2011"—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. an appropriate Change Order.The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. §11.3 Waivers of Subrogation §11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against(1)each other and any of their subcontractors,sub- subcontractors,agents,and employees,each of the other;(2)the Architect and Architect's consultants;and(3)Separate Contractors,if any,and any of their subcontractors,sub-subcontractors,agents,and employees,for damages caused by fire,or other causes of loss,to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project,except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance.The Owner or Contractor,as appropriate,shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect,Architect's consultants,Separate Contractors,subcontractors,and sub- subcontractors.The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation.This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity(1)even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise,(2)even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or(3)whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. §11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties,real or personal or both,at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project,or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period,to the extent permissible by such policies,the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. §11.4 Loss of Use,Business Interruption,and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner,at the Owner's option,may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property,or the inability to conduct normal operations,due to fire or other causes of loss.The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property,due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss §11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds,as their interests may appear,subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2.The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner,and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. §11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss,the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds.The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds.If the Contractor does not object,the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation.Upon receipt,the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions.Thereafter,if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience,the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds,the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss,and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15.Pending resolution of any dispute,the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK §12.1 Uncovering of Work §12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents,it must,if requested in writing by the Architect,be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. §12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered,the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to the Contract MA Document A201 T"-2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925.1937.1951,1958,1961.1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Inst American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AIA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document,or any portion of It,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate.If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,the costs of uncovering the Work,and the cost of correction,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2 Correction of Work §12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents,discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work,including additional testing and inspections,the cost of uncovering and replacement,and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §12.2.2 After Substantial Completion §12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5,if,within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1,or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so,unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition.The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work,if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction,the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty.If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect,the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. §12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. §12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. §12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors,whether completed or partially completed,caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents.Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work,and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. §12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction,in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS §13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located,excluding that jurisdiction's choice of law rules.If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution,the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. §13.2 Successors and Assigns §13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves,their partners,successors,assigns,and legal representatives to covenants,agreements,and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.Except as provided in AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlAe Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. Section 13.2.2,neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other.If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent,that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. §13.2.2 The Owner may,without consent of the Contractor,assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project,if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. §13.3 Rights and Remedies §13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties,obligations,rights,and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. §13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner,Architect,or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract,nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder,except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. §13.4 Tests and Inspections §13.4.1 Tests,inspections,and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules,and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities.Unless otherwise provided,the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests,inspections,and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner,or with the appropriate public authority,and shall bear all related costs of tests,inspections,and approvals.The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.The Owner shall bear costs of tests,inspections,or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded.The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests,inspections,or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. §13.4.2 If the Architect,Owner,or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing,inspection,or approval not included under Section 13.4.1,the Architect will,upon written authorization from the Owner,instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing,inspection,or approval,by an entity acceptable to the Owner,and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures.Such costs,except as provided in Section 13.4.3,shall be at the Owner's expense. §13.4.3 If procedures for testing,inspection,or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents,all costs made necessary by such failure,including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses,shall be at the Contractor's expense. §13.4.4 Required certificates of testing,inspection,or approval shall,unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents,be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. §13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests,inspections,or approvals required by the Contract Documents,the Architect will do so promptly and,where practicable,at the normal place of testing. §13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. §13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or,in the absence thereof,at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT §14.1 Termination by the Contractor §14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work,for any of the following reasons: AIA Document A201 TM-2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result In severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand'Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government,such as a declaration of national emergency,that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1,or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents;or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. §14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if,through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub- subcontractor,their agents or employees,or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work,repeated suspensions,delays,or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3,constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion,or 120 days in any 365-day period,whichever is less. §14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven days'notice to the Owner and Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed,as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed,and costs incurred by reason of such termination. §14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor,a Subcontractor,a Sub-subcontractor,or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work,the Contractor may,upon seven additional days'notice to the Owner and the Architect,terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. §14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause §14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or Suppliers; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws,statutes,ordinances,codes,rules and regulations,or lawful orders of a public authority;or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. §14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist,and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action,the Owner may,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety,if any,seven days'notice,terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials,equipment,tools,and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4;and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.Upon written request of the Contractor,the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. §14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1,the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. §14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby,and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived,such excess shall be paid to the Contractor.If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner.The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner,as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker,upon application,and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. §14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience §14.3.1 The Owner may,without cause,order the Contractor in writing to suspend,delay or interrupt the Work,in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. AIA Document A201" —2017.Copyright @ 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand®Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay,or interruption under Section 14.3.1.Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit.No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is,was,or would have been,so suspended,delayed,or interrupted,by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible;or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. §14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience §14.4.1 The Owner may,at any time,terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. §14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary,or that the Owner may direct,for the protection and preservation of the Work;and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. §14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience,the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed;costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts;and the termination fee,if any,set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims §15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking,as a matter of right,payment of money,a change in the Contract Time,or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.The term"Claim"also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. §15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract,whether in contract,tort,breach of warranty or otherwise,in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work.The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. §15.1.3 Notice of Claims §15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim,whichever is later. §15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor,where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2,shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event,no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required. §15.1.4 Continuing Contract Performance §15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim,except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14,the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. §15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision,subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15.The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. init. AIA Document A201' —2017.Copyright®1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961.1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997.2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This Ale Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlAe Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim.Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. §15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time §15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time,notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given.The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.In the case of a continuing delay,only one Claim is necessary. §15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time,such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time,could not have been reasonably anticipated,and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. §15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract.This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses,for losses of use,income,profit,financing,business and reputation,and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there,for losses of financing,business and reputation,and for loss of profit,except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable,without limitation,to all consequential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14.Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages,when applicable,in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. §15.2 Initial Decision §15.2.1 Claims,excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4,and 11.5,shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision.The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker,unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1,an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim.If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker,the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered.Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree,the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. §15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions:(1)request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party,(2)reject the Claim in whole or in part,(3)approve the Claim,(4)suggest a compromise,or(5)advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that,in the Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion,it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. §15.2.3 In evaluating Claims,the Initial Decision Maker may,but shall not be obligated to,consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision.The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. §15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data,such party shall respond,within ten days after receipt of the request,and shall either(1)provide a response on the requested supporting data,(2)advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished,or(3)advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished.Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any,the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. AIA Document A201 TM—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976.1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document Is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA°Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand°Order No.2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. §15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim,or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim.This initial decision shall(1)be in writing;(2)state the reasons therefor;and(3)notify the parties and the Architect,if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker,of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both.The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and,if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation,to binding dispute resolution. §15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time,subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. §15.2.6.1 Either party may,within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision,demand in writing that the other party file for mediation.If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. §15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety,if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim.If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default,the Owner may,but is not obligated to,notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. §15.2.8 I t a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien,the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. §15.3 Mediation §15.3.1 Claims,disputes,or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract,except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4,9.10.5,and 15.1.7,shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. §15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement.A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation.The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but,in such event,mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings,which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing,unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order.If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2,the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s)and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. §15.3.3 Either party may,within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute,demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof,then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. §15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally.The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4 Arbitration §15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement,any Claim subject to,but not resolved by,mediation shall be subject to arbitration which,unless the parties mutually agree otherwise,shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement.The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon.A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract,and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration.The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. §15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations.For statute of limitations purposes,receipt of a written demand AIA Document A2017"—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA®Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 37 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of It,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demands Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. §15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final,and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement,shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. §15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder §15.4.4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that(1)the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation,(2)the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,and(3)the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). §15.4.4.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules,either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder.Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim,dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. §15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4,whether by joinder or consolidation,the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. AIA Document A2017"—2017.Copyright m 1911,1915,1918,1925,1937.1951,1958,1961,1963,1966,1970,1976,1987,1997,2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects.All rights reserved.WARNING:This AlA`Document is protected by U.S.Copyright Law and International Treaties. 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AlA®Document,or any portion of it,may result in severe civil and criminal penalties,and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law.This document was created on 12/03/2019 15:48:29 under the terms of AIA Documents on Demand•Order No. 2010417952 ,and is not for resale.This document is licensed by The American Institute of Architects for one-time use only,and may not be reproduced prior to its completion. 00 70 00 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM This substitution request form may be used for Pre-Bid Substitution Requests or Post-Bid Substitution Requests as specified in Divisions 1 Section-"Substitutions". TO: PROJ ECT: SPECIFICATION ITEM: Section Page Paragraph Description Substitution approval is an acceptance of only the manufacturer and product for general conformance with the design concept reflected in the Contract Documents.The A/E has made no attempt to verify specific performance data,or to check the details of the proposed substitution as to special features,capacities, physical dimensions or code and/or regulatory compliance,all of which remain the responsibility of the person/entity submitting the proposed substitution. The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION: Attached data includes product description,specifications,drawings, photographs, performance and test data, adequate for evaluation of the request;applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct: 1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on the Drawings.2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including engineering design,detailing,and construction costs caused by the requested substitution.3.The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades,the construction schedule, or specified warranty requirements.4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution. The undersigned further certifies that the function,appearance,and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the specified item. The undersigned agrees that,if this page is reproduced,the terms and conditions for substitutions found in the Bidding Documents apply to this request. SUBMITTED BY: Name(Printed) Signature Firm Name Address Telephone Email McDonald Architects, LLCi For use by the A/E©Approved ©Approved as noted @ Not Approved @Received too late By Date Comments SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM 00 70 00-1 SECTION 01 1100-SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by the Contract Documents is entitled "New Landfill Scales and Gate House Facility",as prepared by McDonald Architects, LLC TBAE Firm#BR 2685, 19 Chelsea Drive, Fort Worth,Texas 76134. B. The project site is located at 4732 Texas 73, Port Arthur,Texas 77642. Reference the vicinity map on the drawings. C. The project consists of a: 1. Scale and foundation installation 2. Building including ramps and walk ways. 3. Site work including grading parking and utilities work 1.3 PROJECT NAME IDENTIFICATION/DEFINITIONS A. Project Name:The term"Project Name"as used in the Contract Documents refers to: "New Landfill Scales and Gate House Facility". B. Owner:The term"Owner"as used in the Contract Documents refers to City of Port Arthur, C. Architect:The term"Architect"as used in the Contract Documents refers to McDonald Architects,TBAE Firm#BR 2685,5605 N. MacArthur Blvd.,Suite 1000, Irving,Texas 75038,dated December 07,2017. 1.4 PROJECT REFERENCES A. Summary of References:Work of the Contract can be summarized by references to the Contract, General Conditions,Supplementary Conditions,specification sections,drawings, addenda and modifications to the contract documents issued subsequent to the initial printing of the Project Manual and including but not necessarily limited to printed material referenced by any of the aforementioned documents. It is recognized that work of the Contract is also unavoidably affected or influenced by governing regulations,natural phenomenon including weather conditions and other forces outside the Contract Documents. 1.5 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. General: Space available for all construction purposed is limited to the areas indicated on the drawings as the area of project. 1. Limit use of site and premises to allow: a. Owner occupancy. b. Work by Others and Work by Owner. c. Use of surrounding streets by public. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100- 1 B. Vehicular parking for Contractor employees and all construction personnel is restricted to Owner approved parking areas. C. Contractor's access to the site,use of the premises and conduct of the job shall be in strict compliance and accordance with rules and policies set forth by the Owner,and in accordance with applicable City,County, State of Texas and Federal Government regulations and requirements. D. Contractor is responsible for familiarization with Owner's rules and policies prior to beginning any work. E. Contractor is to abide with Owner's instructions for scheduling work,accessing the site,and maintaining construction site security. F. Contractor is responsible for providing all safety measures required or implied as necessary to protect all persons on the construction site and all persons and public in occupied areas adjacent to construction zones. 1. Comply with applicable safety and security regulations of all authorities having jurisdiction. These regulations set forth minimum requirements. Contractor shall not reduce his normal safety provisions or ignore safety regulations required by other authorities having jurisdiction where other requirements are more stringent. G. No alcoholic beverages,illegal drugs, controlled substances or firearms of any kind are permitted on the construction site. Any person found on site with such in their possession will be escorted from the premises and not permitted to return. H. Fighting and horseplay on the construction site are absolutely forbidden. Participants in fights will be escorted from the premises and not permitted to return. I. Cameras are not permitted on the construction site without prior authorization from the Owner. J. Maintain streets and sidewalks around the Project site in a clean condition. Remove all spillage and tracking arising from the performance for the Work from such areas, and establish a regular maintenance program of sweeping and hosing to minimize accumulation of dirt and dust upon such area. K. Access to Site: Limited to construction personnel. L. Parking and Staging Areas: Limited to Owner approved areas. M. Construction Operations and Building Access: Limited to Owner approved areas. 0. Utility Outages and Shutdown:Coordinate work with Owner. P. Construction signage to be in both English and Spanish. 1.6 WORK BY OWNER A. Permits and Inspections:The Building Permit will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. All other permits shall be secured by the Contractor.All inspections and the obtaining of a valid Certification of Occupancy will be the responsibility of the Contractor. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100- 2 B. The Owner may award additional separate contracts for work related to this project. Confirm with the Owner. Work under these contracts include: 1. Access control equipment and installation.All other rough-in by Contractor. 2. Electronic Communications and Network systems except raceway. 3. Security systems equipment and installation except raceway and cabeling. 4. Furnishings and art. 5. Site fencing&gates 6. Water filtration and softening system C. Items noted "NIC"(Not in Contract),will be furnished and installed by Owner. 1.7 CONTRACTOR DUTIES A. VOC Compliance: Ensure that all assemblies, components,and systems comply with all VOC(Volatile Organic Components) requirements and regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)Occupational Safety Health Administration (OSHA),State,County, City,and Local Air Control District.See LEED's section for other requirements. B. Except as specifically noted,provide and pay for: 1. Labor, materials and equipment. 2. Tools, construction equipment and machinery. 3. Other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of work. C. Secure and pay for, as necessary for proper execution and completion of Work, and as applicable at time of receipt of bids: 1. Licenses. D. Give required notices. E. Comply with all applicable local Building Codes,ordinances,rules, regulations,orders and other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of Work. F. Promptly submit written notice to Architect of observed variance of Contract Documents from requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Assume responsibility for Work performed without such notice known to be contrary to code or regulatory requirements. 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Accommodate Owner's occupancy as scheduled. B. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: The Owner reserves the right to place and install equipment in completed areas of the project and to occupy such completed areas prior to substantial completion, provided that such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the work or any part of the work. 1. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict,and to facilitate Owner's operations. SUMMARY OF WORK 01 1100- 3 2. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. C. Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. D. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. E. On occupancy,Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. 1.9 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR GENERAL WORK A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with applicable requirements of current electrical for mechanical codes. 1. Service Connections: Mechanical and electrical services to be connected to units of general work. Provide units manufactured or fabricated for proper connection to and utilization of available services,as indicated. Except as otherwise indicated,final connection of mechanical services to general construction work is defined as being mechanical work,and final connection of electrical service to general construction work is defined as electrical work. B. Electrical Requirements: Except as otherwise indicated,comply with applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code(NEC)and standards by National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA),for electrical components of general work. Provide Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled products where applicable. 1.10 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY A. The Contractor shall maintain adequate protection of the Work from damage and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from the Work. Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA-required danger signs,guards, and obstructions necessary to protect the public and construction personnel from any dangers inherent with or created by the Work in progress. 1. All federal,state,and city rules and requirements pertaining to safety, and all EPA standards, OSHA standards,and NESHAP regulations pertaining to asbestos as required shall be complied with. B. Twenty-four(24) Hour Call: The Contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours per day, for emergencies during the course of the Project. The Owner shall be provided with a 24- hour emergency contact number of Contractor's personnel. Contractor shall be able to respond to any emergency call and have personnel on-site within two(2) hours after contact. Numbers to be made available to the Owner shall include home,office and mobile numbers for the following: 1. Contractor's project manager. 2. Contractor's field superintendent. 3. Owner or company officer of Contractor. PART 1) -PRODUCTS(Not applicable). PART 2) -EXECUTION(Not applicable). -END OF SECTION 01 11 00- SUMMARY OF WORK 01 11 00- 4 SECTION 01 2100-ALLOWANCES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Schedule of monetary amounts of allowances in contract sum for designated products or services. 2. Costs in contract sum other than in allowances. 3. Procedures for administration of allowances. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance No. 1—Signage/Graphics: Include a lump sum for the provision and installation of signage and graphics as directed by the Architect. Roadway signage is not included in this allowance. 1. Allowance No. 1:$1,000.00. 1.4 COST INCLUDED IN ALLOWANCES A. Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts. B. Delivery to site. C. Labor required under allowance,only when labor is specified to be included. D. Applicable taxes. 1.5 CONTRACTOR COSTS INCLUDED IN CONTRACT A. Products handling at site,including unloading, uncrating,and storage. B. Protection of products from elements and from damage. C. Labor for installation and finishing, except when installation is specified as part of allowance. D. Other expenses required to complete installation. E. Contractor overhead and profit. 1.6 ADJUSTMENTS OF COSTS A. Should the net cost be more or less than the specified amount of the allowance,the Contract Sum will be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. ALLOWANCES 01 21 00- 1 B. Submit claims for anticipated additional costs at the site, or other expenses caused by the selection under the allowance, prior to execution of the work. C. Submit documentation for actual additional costs at the site,or other expenses caused by the selection under allowance, prior to execution of the work. D. Failure to submit claims within the designated time will constitute a waiver of claims for additional costs. 1.7 ARCHITECT RESPONSIBILITIES A. Consult with Contractor in consideration of products,suppliers, and installers. B. Select products,obtain Owner's written decision,and transmit full information to Contractor as follows: 1. Manufacturer, product, model or catalog number,accessories, attachments,and finishes. 2. Supplier and installer as applicable. 3. Cost to Contractor,delivered to site, and installed,if so specified. 1.8 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Assist Architect in determining suppliers and installers; obtain proposals when requested. B. Make recommendations for Architect consideration. C. Promptly notify Architect of any reasonable objections against supplier or installer. D. On notification of selection,execute purchase agreement with designated supplier and installer. E. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. F. Arrange for delivery. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness,damage, and defects.Submit claims for transportation damage. G. Install,adjust, and finish products. H. Provide warranties for products and installation. 1.9 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS A. Schedule shop drawings, product data,samples,and delivery dates,in Progress Schedule for products selected under allowances. 1.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING ALLOWANCES A. Inspection and testing allowances include the costs of engaging the inspection or testing agencies and costs for reporting the results as well as costs for the actual inspections and tests. B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency,or costs for retesting upon failure of previous tests and inspections.The allowance also does not include costs of services not required by the Contract ALLOWANCES 01 21 00- 2 Documents. C. At Project Closeout,credit unused amounts remaining in the inspection and testing allowance to Owner by Change Order or transfer the remaining amounts to other allowances as directed by the Architect. 1.11 HVAC TESTING ALLOWANCE A. Testing allowance includes the cost of engaging the testing agency and costs for reporting the results as well as costs for the actual inspections and tests. THE WORK TO BE TESTED MUST HAVE BEEN INSPECTED AND TESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR PRIOR TO REQUESTING THE TESTING SET FORTH HEREIN. B. The allowance does not include incidental labor required to assist the testing agency,or costs for retesting upon failure of previous tests and inspections. The allowance also does not include costs of services not required by the Contract Documents. 1. At Project Closeout,credit unused amounts remaining in the HVAC testing allowance to Owner by Change Order or transfer the remaining amounts to other allowances as directed by the Architect. 1.12 UNUSED MATERIALS A. Return unused materials to the manufacturer or supplier for credit to the Owner, after installation has been completed and accepted. B. Where it is not economically feasible to return unused material for credit and when requested by the Architect,prepare unused material for the Owner's storage,and deliver to the Owner's storage space as directed.Otherwise,disposal of excess materials is the Contractor's responsibility. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not applicable. PART 3-EXECUTION Not applicable. -END OF SECTION 01 2100- ALLOWANCES 01 21 00- 3 00 22 14-SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS I. MODIFICATIONS TO GENERAL CONDITIONS The following supplements modify, change, delete from, or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction",AIA Document A201-1997.Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. References to Contractor or General Contractor shall be deemed to refer to the Contractor named in the "Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1.1 Revise to read: "The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor; (hereinafter the Agreement or Contract), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications,Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contractor's Proposal, the Contractor's Proposal, and other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or(4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements(advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements)." 1.1.2 Delete the third sentence and add: "After execution of the original Contract Documents,the Contract may thereafter be amended or modified only by a written Modification." 1.1.7 Revise to read: "The Project Manual is the volume assembled for the Work which includes the bidding requirements,sample forms,Conditions of the Contract and Specifications." 1.2.1.1 Add new Subparagraph 1.2.1.1 as follows: "During the course of the Work, should any conflict be found in or between the Contract Documents the Contractor shall be deemed to have estimated the Work on the basis of the greater quantity or better quality,unless he shall have obtained a decision in writing from the Architect as to what shall govern before the submission of his Proposal. The Architect, in case of such conflict, may interpret or construe the documents so as to obtain the most substantial and complete performance of the Work consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable therefrom and the Architect's decision shall be final" 1.2.1.2 Add new Subparagraph 1.2.1.2 as follows: "The mechanical,electrical,and plumbing drawings show the general arrangement and extent of the Work. Exact location and arrangement of the various parts shall be determined with the approval of the Architect after equipment has been selected and as the Work progresses. All Work shall, insofar as possible, be installed in such a manner as will not interfere with architectural or structural portions of the building. Should changes become necessary because of a failure of the Contractor to comply with the bidding instructions concerning equipment requiring area not shown on the Construction Documents, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for completing any required Modifications. The Contractor shall be required to submit material data and drawings on all equipment which may vary from the Drawings and Specifications and any interferences must be eliminated before Work proceeds." 1.2.3 Revise the second sentence to read: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-1 "The Contract Documents are complementary,and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results." 1.2.4 Add new Subparagraph 1.2.4 as follows: "Where noted in the Drawings and Specifications,certain products,manufacturer's trade names,or catalog numbers are given,it is done for the express purpose of establishing a standard of function,dimension,and appearance,and quality of design,in harmony with the Work,and is not intended for the purpose of limiting competition. Materials or equipment shall not be substituted unless the Architect has specifically accepted such substitution for use on this Project." 1.2.5 Add new Subparagraph 1.2.5 as follows: "When the work is governed by reference to standards,building codes,manufacturers'instructions,or other documents, unless otherwise specified,the current edition as of the Agreement date shall apply." 1.2.6 Add new Subparagraph 1.2.6 as follows: "Requirements of public authorities apply as minimum requirements only and do not supersede more stringent specified requirements." 1.5.1 Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 1.5.1: "Signing the Construction Agreement shall be considered as signing all Contract Documents identified." 1.5.3 Add new Subparagraph 1.5.3 as follows: "The Owner and Contractor agree that the Contract Documents may not be free from errors, inconsistencies,or omissions,and further agree that the Owner makes no warranty as to the completeness or accuracy of the Contract Documents, either expressed or implied. Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has thoroughly reviewed and become familiar with the Contract Documents and that the Contractor is not aware of any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions in the Contract Documents which would delay the Contractor in the performance of the Contract Work. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any damages or increase in the Contract Sum due to delays or disruptions to the Work. This limitation on damages is further subject to the limitations set forth in Subparagraph 4.3.10." 1.6.2 Add new Subparagraph 1.6.2 as follows: "Representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall meet periodically at mutually agreed upon intervals for the purpose of establishing procedures to facilitate cooperation, communication, and timely responses among the participants. By participating in this arrangement,the parties do not intend to create additional contractual obligations or modify the legal relationships,which may otherwise exist.CAD drawing files may be released by the Architect to the Contractor and/or his Subcontractors after execution of a formal electronic document release and payment of$50.00 per requested individual sheet." ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1.1 Delete Subparagraph 2.1.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Owner is The City of Port Arthur, and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.The Owner may designate in writing one or more persons to represent the Owner; however, such representatives shall have the authority to bind the Owner only to the extent expressly authorized by the Owner and shall have no implied authority. Except as otherwise provided in Subparagraph 4.2.1, the Architect does not have the authority to bind the Owner. The Owner has contracted with San Roc Group as Architect who will carry out the functions of administration of the Project." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-2 2.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.1 in its entirety. 2.2.2 Revise to read: "Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction." 2.2.3 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations, and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. Owner does not guarantee the accuracy of the survey as describing the site of the Project and Contractor should determine the sufficiency of same before beginning the work. The Owner does not guarantee the utility lines to be in the exact locations as shown on plans and surveys. Contractor shall verify with the utilities the location of utility lines. Any water, gas or sewer line,telephone,telegraph or electric wire, or cable broken or cut by the Contractor or any of his workmen or subcontractors, shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense, or by the responsible subcontractor at its own expense,and will not be paid for by the Owner. Repairs shall be made immediately and no other work shall be done until breaks or damage have been repaired and service restored. Any delay caused by the cut or break shall be solely attributed to the Contractor." 2.2.4 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.4 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents shall be furnished by the Owner within a reasonable time following actual receipt of a written request." 2.2.5 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,twenty(20)sets of the Drawings and Project Manuals.The Contractor will be furnished,at its sole cost and expense,any additional copies." 2.3.1 Delete Subparagraph 2.3.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "If the Contractor fails to correct non-conforming or defective Work as required by Paragraph 12.2,or fails to complete the Work on time as required by Article 4 of the Agreement or is in default of any of its material obligations hereunder,the Owner, by a written order signed by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner, may order the Contractor to stop the Work or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. This right shall be in addition to,and not in restriction of,the Owner's right under Paragraph 12.2." 2.4.1 Amend Subparagraph 2.4.1 as follows: 1. Replace phrase"seven-day period"with "three-day period" throughout. 2. Delete the fourth sentence in its entirety. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1.1 Revise the second sentence of Subparagraph 3.1.1 to read as follows: "The term"Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative." 3.1.2 Delete Subparagraph 3.1.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor shall perform the Work in a good and workmanlike manner except to the extent the Contract Documents expressly specify a higher degree of finish or workmanship.Workmanship shall be of a SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 012214-3 quality to produce satisfactory results. This shall mean that all material shall be installed in a true and straight alignment, level and plumb, patterns shall be uniform, and jointing of materials shall be flush and level unless otherwise directed by the Architect." 3.2.1.1 Add new Subparagraph 3.2.1.1 as follows: "The Contractor represents and warrants by submission of a Proposal that he has carefully examined the Plans,Specifications and the site of the Work and that from his own investigations, he has satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the Work, the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the Work, the general and local conditions and all other materials which may in any way affect the Work or its performance. No allowance on behalf of the Contractor will be made subsequently by the Owner for any error or negligence on the part of the Contractor not having visited the site, or not having thoroughly studied and compared all of the Construction Documents before submitting a Proposal." 3.2.4 Add new Subparagraph 3.2.4 as follows: "Notwithstanding the delivery of a survey or other documents by the Owner, Contractor shall use reasonable efforts to perform all Work in such a manner so as to avoid damaging any utility lines, cables, pipes,or pipelines on the property.Contractor shall be responsible for,and shall repair at Contractor's own expense,any damage done to lines,cables, pipes,and pipelines identified to Contractor." 3.2.5 Add new Subparagraph 3.2.5 as follows: "The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor's request for information,where such information was available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents,field conditions, other Owner-provided information, Contractor-prepared coordination drawings, or prior project correspondence or documentation." 3.3.3 Revise to read: "At appropriate times the Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work." 3.3.4 Add new Subparagraph 3.3.4 as follows: "Contractor shall bear responsibility for design and execution of acceptable trenching and shoring procedures, in accordance with Texas Government Code, Section 2166.303 and Texas Health and Safety Code,Subchapter C, Sections 756.021, et seq." 3.3.5 Add new Subparagraph 3.3.5 as follows: "It is understood and agreed that the relationship of Contractor to Owner shall be that of an independent Contractor. Nothing contained herein or inferable here from shall be deemed or construed to (1) make Contractor the agent, servant, or employee of the Owner, or(2) create any partnership,joint venture, or other association between Owner'and Contractor. Any direction or instruction by Owner in respect of the Work shall relate to the results the Owner desires to obtain from the Work, and shall in no way affect Contractor's independent Contractor status as described herein." 3.3.6 Add new Subparagraph 3.3.6 as follows: "The Contractor shall review Subcontractor safety programs, procedures, and precautions in connection with performance of the Work. However,the Contractor's duties shall not relieve in any Subcontractor(s)or any other person or entity(e.g. a supplier) including any person or entity with whom the Contractor does not have a contractual relationship, or their responsibility or liability relative to compliance with all applicable federal,state,and local laws,rules,regulations,and ordinances which shall include the obligation to provide for the safety of their employees, persons, and property and their requirements to maintain a work environment free of recognized hazards. The forgoing notwithstanding, the requirements of this SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-4 Paragraph are not intended to impose upon the Contractor any additional obligations that the Contractor would not have under any applicable state or federal laws, including, but not limited to, any rules, regulations, or statutes pertaining to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration." 3.4.2 Delete Subparagraph 3.4.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "1. Substitutions and alternates may be rejected without explanation and will be considered only under one or more of the following conditions: (i)the proposal is required for compliance with interpretation of code requirements or insurance regulations then existing;(ii)specified products are unavailable through no fault of the Contractor; (iii) and when in the judgment of the Owner or the Architect, a substitution would be substantially in the Owner's best interests,in terms of cost,time,or other considerations. 2. The Contractor must submit to the Architect and the Owner (i) a full explanation of the proposed substitution and submittals of all supporting data,including technical information,catalog cuts,warranties, test results, installation instructions, operating procedures, and other like information necessary for a complete evaluation for the substitution; (ii)a written explanation of the reasons the substitution should be considered, including the benefits to the Owner and the Work in the event the substitution is acceptable; (iii)the adjustment,if any, in the Contract Sum; (iv)the adjustment,if any,in the time of completion of the Contract and the construction schedule; and (v)an affidavit stating (a)the proposed substitution conforms to and meets all the requirements of the pertinent Specifications and the requirements shown on the Drawings, and (b)the Contractor accepts the warranty and will coordinate the Work to be complete in all respects,as if originally specified by the Architect.Proposals for substitutions shall be submitted in triplicate to the Architect in sufficient time to allow the Architect no less than twelve (12) working days for review. No substitutions will be considered or allowed without the Contractor's submittals of complete substantiating data and information as stated herein before. 3. Whether or not the Owner or the Architect accepts any proposed substitution, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for any fees charged by the Architect or other consultants for evaluating each proposed substitute. 4. Any such substitution request shall be made to the Architect (according to Paragraph 3.4.2.2) within fifteen (15)days after execution of the Contract." 3.4.3 Add the following sentences at the end of Subparagraph 3.4.3 as follows: "The Contractor shall be responsible for the actions of Contractor's forces, Subcontractor's forces and all tiers of Sub-Subcontractor's forces.The Contractor will prohibit the possession or use of alcohol,controlled substances, tobacco, and any prohibited weapons on the Project Site and shall require adequate dress of the Contractor's forces consistent with the nature of the work being performed, including wearing shirts at all times. Sexual harassment of employees of the Contractor or any person on the Owner's premises by employees of the Contractor is strictly forbidden. Any employee of the Contractor who is found to have engaged in such conduct shall be subject to appropriate disciplinary action by the Contractor, including removal from the job site." 3.4.4 Add new Subparagraph 3.4.4 as follows: "The Contractor shall only employ or use labor in connection with the Work capable of working harmoniously with all trades,crafts,and any other individuals associated with the Project." 3.5.2 Add new Subparagraph 3.5.2 as follows: "The Contractor agrees to assign to the Owner at the Time of final completion of the Work any and all manufacturers' warranties relating to materials and labor used in the Work and further agrees to perform the Work in such manner so as to preserve any and all such manufacturers'warranties." 3.5.3 Add new Subparagraph 3.5.3 as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-5 "Contractor's express warranty herein shall be in addition to, and not in lieu of, any other remedies Owner may have under this Agreement, at law,or in equity for defective Work." 3.5.4 Add new Subparagraph 3.5.4 as follows: "The warranty provided in Paragraph 3.5.1 shall be in addition to and not in limitation of any other warranty or remedy required by law or by the Contract Documents,and such warranty shall be interpreted to require Contractor to replace defective materials and equipment and re-execute defective Work which is disclosed to the Contractor by the Owner within a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion of the entire Work or if latent defect,within one(1)year after discovery thereof by Owner." 3.5.5 Add new Subparagraph 3.5.5 as follows: "The Contractor shall issue in writing to the Owner as a condition precedent to final payment a "General Warranty"reflecting the terms and conditions of Paragraphs 3.5.1 and 3.5.2 for all Work under the Contract Documents. This General Warranty shall be assignable. Submittals of all warranties and guarantees are required as prerequisite to the final payment." 3.5.6 Add new Subparagraph 3.5.6 as follows: "Except when a longer warranty time is specifically called for in the Specification Sections or is otherwise provided by law, the General Warranty shall be for twelve (12) months and shall be in form and content otherwise satisfactory to the Owner. Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate schedule of the dates of Substantial Completion,dates upon which the one-year warranty on each phase or building which is substantially complete will expire, and dates of Final Completion.Contractor agrees to provide notice of the warranty expiration date to Owner and Architect at least one (1) month prior to the expiration of the one-year warranty period.Prior to termination of the one-year warranty period,Contractor shall accompany the Owner and Architect on re-inspection of the building and be responsible for correcting any reasonable additional deficiencies not caused by the Owner or by the use of the Project which are observed or reported during the re-inspection. For extended warranties required by various sections, i.e. roofing, compressors, mechanical equipment,Owner will notify the Contractor of deficiencies and Contractor shall start remedying these defects within three (3) days of initial notification from Owner. Contractor shall prosecute the work without interruption until accepted by the Owner and the Architect, even though such prosecution should extend beyond the one-year warranty period. If Contractor fails to provide notice of the expiration of the one-year warranty period at least one (1) month prior to the expiration date, Contractor's warranty obligations described in this Paragraph shall continue until such inspection is conducted and any deficiencies found in the inspection corrected." 3.5.7 Add new Subparagraph 3.5.7 as follows: "Warranties shall become effective on a date established by the Owner and Architect in accordance with the Contract Documents.This date shall be the Date of Substantial Completion of the entire Work, unless otherwise provided in any Certificate of Partial Substantial Completion approved by the parties, except for Work to be completed or corrected after the date of Substantial Completion and prior to final payment. Warranties for work to be completed or corrected after the date of Substantial Completion and prior to final payment shall become effective on the later of the date the Work is completed or corrected and accepted by the Owner and Architect or the date of final payment." 3.6.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.6.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor will not include in the Contract Sum or any Modification any amount for sales,use,or similar taxes for which (1) the Owner is exempt, and (2) the Owner has provided the Contractor with a tax exemption certificate or other documentation necessary to establish the Owner's exemption from such taxes." 3.7.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.7.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor shall be responsible for making and submitting application for the building permit. The Owner shall pay the municipality directly for the building permit and all other development "impact" fees, if any. The Contractor shall continue to be responsible for payment of other permits,governmental fees, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-6 licenses,and inspections necessary for proper execution of the contract and which are legally required when bids are received. The Contractor shall also obtain all permits and approvals,and pay all fees and expenses, if any,associated with Storm Water Pollution Prevention and Pollution Control Plan (SWPPP) regulations administered by the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ) and local authorities. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph do not require it to perform engineering services during the pre-construction phase to prepare proper drainage for the construction sites. However, any drainage alterations made by Contractor during the construction process,which require the issuance of a permit shall be at Contractor's sole cost." 3.7.3 Revise the second sentence to read: "However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and necessary changes may be accomplished by appropriate Modification." 3.8.3 Delete Subparagraph 3.8.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner within such time as is reasonably specified by the Contractor as necessary to avoid delay in the Work." 3.9.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.9.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Contractor shall employ a competent job superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site at all times during performance of the work. Such superintendents shall represent the Contractor,and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. Questions about plan interpretation or directions shall be submitted to the Architect in the form of a written request for information and the Architect shall respond to such request for information in a reasonable and timely fashion.Contractor's selection of Project Manager or superintendent(s) shall be approved by Owner, and Contractor shall not replace the Project Manager or superintendent(s) without Owner's consent or until a replacement Project Manager or superintendent(s) has been selected in accordance with this paragraph. Such superintendents shall remain on the project until all items of the punch list are completed and accepted by the Architect." 3.9.2 Add new Subparagraph 3.9.2 as follows: "Prior to execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall furnish a list to the Architect and Owner of all engineers,consultants,job-site superintendent(s),Subcontractors and suppliers involved in Construction." 3.9.2.1 Add new Subparagraph 3.9.2.1 as follows: "The Owner may reject or require removal of any job superintendent, or employee of the Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-Subcontractor involved in the Project." 3.9.2.2 Add new Subparagraph 3.9.2.2 as follows: "Contractor shall provide an adequate staff for the proper coordination and expedition of the Work.Owner reserves right to require Contractor to dismiss from the Work any employee or employees that Owner may deem incompetent, careless, insubordinate, or in violation of any provision in these Contract Documents. This provision is applicable to Subcontractors,Sub-Subcontractors and their employees." 3.11.1 Revise the second sentence to read: "These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for delivery to the Owner upon completion of the Work." 3.12.10 Add the following at the end of Subparagraph 3.12.10 as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 0122 14-7 "In the event that Contractor retains a licensed design professional under the terms of this paragraph, Contractor shall require that the licensed design professional to carry comprehensive general liability and errors and omissions insurance coverage in the same amounts and forms as required of the Architect on this Project.In the event that the licensed design professional retained by the Contractor will be conducting on-site services or observations, the licensed design professional shall also carry worker's compensation insurance and comprehensive automobile liability in the same amounts and forms as required of the Architect on this Project." 3.12.11 Add new Subparagraph 3.12.11 as follows: "The Architect's review of Contractor's submittals shall be limited to examination of an initial submittal and one (1) re-submittal.The Architect's review of additional submittals will be made only with the consent of the Owner after notification by the Architect. The Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor of amounts paid to the Architect for evaluation of such additional re-submittals." 3.13.2 Add new Subparagraph 3.13.2 as follows: "The Contractor will abide by all applicable rules and regulations of the Owner with respect to conduct, including smoking, access to the Project site, parking of vehicles, and entry to any adjacent facilities which are owned by the Owner." 3.14.3 Add new Subparagraph 3.14.3 as follows: "No cutting of structural members will be permitted unless specifically approved in writing by Architect." 3.15.1.1 Add new Subparagraph 3.15.1.1 as follows: "Immediately after unpacking materials, all packing case lumber or other packing materials, wrapping or other like flammable waste shall be collected and removed from the building and premises." 3.15.1.2 Add new Subparagraph 3.15.1.2 as follows: "Care shall be taken by all workmen not to mark, soil,or otherwise deface any finish. In the event that any finish becomes defaced in any way by mechanics or workmen, the Contractor or any of his Subcontractors shall clean and restore such surfaces to their original condition." 3.15.1.3 Add new Subparagraph 3.15.1.3 as follows: "Besides the general broom cleaning, the following cleaning shall be done just before final acceptance of the Work: (1) remove putty stains and paint from all glass and wash and polish same taking care not to scratch the glass and replacing any glass damaged by cleaning or otherwise; (2) remove all marks, stains, fingerprints and other soil or dirt from all painted, decorated and other stained work, ceiling and wall surfaces and clean as required to leave in satisfactory condition; (3) remove all temporary protection and clean and polish all floors at completion; (4)clean and polish all hardware for all trades which shall include removal of stains, dust, dirt, paint, etc. upon completion; (5) remove all spots, soil and paint from all tile work and wash same upon completion;(6)remove temporary labels from and clean all fixtures,equipment, doors and windows, removing all stains,paint, dirt,dust and polishing all glass." 3.18.1 Delete Subparagraph 3.18.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Owner's Representative,Architect,Architect's consultants,and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself)including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-8 construed to negate,abridge,or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person in this Paragraph 3.18." 3.18.3 Add new Subparagraph 3.18.3 as follows: "Indemnification hereunder shall include, without limiting the generality of the foregoing, liability which could arise to the Owner, its agents, consultants, and representatives or the Architect pursuant to state statutes for the safety of workmen and in addition, all federal statutes and rules existing thereunder for protection, occupational safety and health to workmen. The primary obligation of the Contractor is to comply with said statutes in performance of the Work by Contractor and that the obligations of the Owner, its agents,consultants,and representatives under said statutes are secondary to that of the Contractor." 3.19 Add new Paragraph 3.19 as follows: "REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES" 3.19.1 Add new Subparagraph 3.19.1 as follows: "The Contractor represents and warrants the following to the Owner (in addition to the other representations and warranties contained in the Contract Documents), as an inducement to the Owner to execute this Contract,which representations and warranties shall survive the execution and delivery of the Contract and the final completion of the Work: .1 that it is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature and possessed of sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform its obligations under the Contract Documents; .2 that it is able to furnish the plant,tools,materials,supplies,equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform its obligations hereunder and has sufficient experience and competence to do so; .3 that it is authorized to do business in the State where the Project is located and properly licensed by all necessary governmental and public quasi-public authorities having jurisdiction over it and over the Work and the site of the Project; .4 that the execution of the Contract and its performance thereof is within its duly authorized powers;and .5 that by submission of a proposal that it has carefully examined the plans,specifications,and the site of the work, and that from its own investigations, has satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work,the character,quality,and quantity of surface and subsurface materials likely to be encountered, the character of equipment and other facilities needed for the performance of the work, the general and local conditions and all other materials which may in any way affect the work or its performance. No allowance in behalf of the Contractor shall be made subsequently by the Owner for any error or negligence on the part of the Contractor not having visited the site or having thoroughly familiarized itself with all of the documents before submitting a proposal." ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1.2 Revise the first sentence to read as follows: "Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner." 4.2.1 Revise the first sentence to read as follows: "The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents,and will act on the Owner's behalf (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence,from time to time during the one-year correction period described in Paragraph 12.2." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-9 4.2.2.1 Add new Subparagraph 4.2.2.1 as follows: "The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for compensation paid to the Architect for additional site visits made necessary by the fault,neglect or request of the Contractor." 4.2.5 Modify by adding the words"with the Owner's Representative"after the word "Contractor." 4.2.7 Delete second sentence of Subparagraph 4.2.7 in its entirety and replace with following:The Architect will respond to submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples pursuant to the procedures set forth in Division 1 of the Project Specifications. 4.2.9 Delete Subparagraph 4.2.9 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Architect and the Owner will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of Final Completion.The Architect will receive and forward to the Owner,for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents." 4.2.10 Delete Subparagraph 4.2.10 in its entirety. 4.2.13 Delete Subparagraph 4.2.13 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Architect's decision on matters related to aesthetic effect, as approved by the Owner,shall be final if consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents." 4.3.2 Delete Subparagraph 4.3.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Claims by the Contractor must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim.Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Architect and the Owner." 4.3.4 Delete Subparagraph 4.3.4 in its entirety and replace with the following: "If conditions are encountered at the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which were not known to the Contractor and which differ substantially from those indicated in the Contract Documents,then the Contractor shall notify the Owner and the Architect of such conditions promptly before conditions are disturbed, and in no event less than 3 days after first observation of the conditions. The Architect or Owner's consultants will promptly investigate such conditions and report its findings to the Owner. If the Owner and the Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time,the adjustment shall be subject to mediation pursuant to Article 4.5." 4.3.7.2 Delete Subparagraph 4.3.7.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Claims for increase in the Contract Time shall set forth in detail the circumstances that form the basis for the Claim,the date upon which each cause of delay began to affect the progress of the Work,the date upon which each cause of delay ceased to affect the progress of the Work and the number of days increase in the Contract Time claimed as a consequence of each such cause of delay.The Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions,and shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Sum by reason of such delays or disruptions. Requests for an extension of time pursuant to the Subparagraph shall be submitted to the Architect not later than the fifteenth day of the month following the month during which the delays or disruptions occurred,and shall include documentation demonstrating the nature and duration of the delays or disruptions. Where appropriate, a revised construction schedule indicating all the activities affected by the circumstances shall be included with the documentation." 4.3.7.3 Add new Subparagraph 4.3.7.3 as follows: "The Contractor shall not be entitled to a separate increase in the Contract Time for each one of the number of causes of delay which may have concurrent or interrelated effects on the progress of the Work, or for concurrent delays due to the fault of the Contractor." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-10 4.3.8 Delete reference to"21 days" and replace with "3 days". 4.3.10 Delete Subparagraph 4.3.10 in its entirety. 4.4.1 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Claims by the Contractor against the Owner, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 and 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Architect for consideration and recommendation to the Owner. An initial recommendation by the Architect shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation or litigation of all Claims by the Contractor arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect with no recommendation having been rendered by the Architect." 4.4.2 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Architect will review Claims and within 10 days of receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1)request additional supporting data from the Contractor;(2)issue an initial recommendation;(3) suggest a compromise; or (4) advise the parties that the Architect is unable to issue an initial recommendation due to a lack of sufficient information or conflict of interest." 4.4.3 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Following receipt of the Architect's initial recommendation regarding a Claim, the Owner and Contractor shall attempt to reach agreement as to any adjustment to the Contract Price and/or Contract Time. If no agreement can be reached either party may request mediation of the dispute pursuant to Paragraph 4.5." 4.4.4 Delete the last sentence of Subparagraph 4.4.4 in its entirety. 4.4.5 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.5 in its entirety. 4.4.6 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.6 in its entirety. 4.4.7 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.7 in its entirety. 4.4.8 Delete Subparagraph 4.4.8 in its entirety. 4.5.1 Delete Subparagraph 4.5.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Any Claim arising out of or related to the Contract, except Claims relating to aesthetic effect and except those waived under the terms of the Contract Documents, shall,after initial decision by the Architect or 30 days after submission of the Claim to the Architect, be subject to mediation at the request of either party. Owner and Contractor expressly agree that mediation shall be a condition precedent to the initiation of any litigation arising out of such Claims or the initiation of arbitration (if mutually agreed in writing by the parties)." 4.5.2 Delete Subparagraph 4.5.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation. Requests for mediation shall be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract. Mediation shall be conducted by any mutually agreed mediator or,if agreement cannot be reached,with the American Arbitration Association. If the mediation is conducted by the American Arbitration Association, requests for mediation shall be filed with the American Arbitration Association and shall be conducted in accordance with the Construction Industry Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association currently in effect." 4.5.3 Delete Subparagraph 4.5.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The parties shall share the mediator's fee equally and, if any filing fee is required with the American Arbitration Association, shall share filing fees equally. Mediation shall be held within the county where SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-11 the Project is located,unless another location is mutually agreed upon by the parties. Agreements reached in mediation shall be reduced to writing,signed by the parties,and shall then be enforceable as provided by the laws of the State of Texas." 4.6 Delete Paragraph 4.6 in its entirety, including all Subparagraphs. Delete all references to arbitration throughout the General Conditions. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.3.2 Add new Subparagraph 5.3.2 as follows: "Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect of any material defaults by any Subcontractor. Notwithstanding any provision contained in Article 5 to the contrary,it is hereby acknowledged and agreed that Owner has in no way agreed, expressly or implicitly, nor will Owner agree,to allow any Subcontractor or other material man or workman employed by Contractor the right to obtain a personal judgment or create a lien against Owner for the amount due from the Contractor." ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2.3 Add new Subparagraph 7.2.3 as follows: "Acceptance of a Change Order by the Contractor shall constitute full accord and satisfaction for any and all Claims, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact or delay damages, arising from the subject matter of the Change Order;or attorney's fees and costs arising from a dispute with a subcontractor over the Change Order." 7.2.4 Add new Subparagraph 7.2.4 as follows: "In no event shall an individual change nor the aggregate of all changes result in the total costs, reimbursements and fees to exceed the Contract Amount unless agreed to in writing by Owner prior to the commencement of such modified or changed Work." 7.3.6.1 Add new Subparagraph 7.3.6.1 as follows: "The allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule: .1 For the Contractor,for Work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10 percent of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor's Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved,for Work performed by that Sub-contractor's or Sub-subcontractor's own forces, a mutually-acceptable fixed fee or percentage of the cost, maximum 10 percent of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor's Sub-contractor, a mutually-acceptable fixed fee or percentage of the cost, maximum 10 percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. .5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. .6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection,shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs, including labor, materials and Subcontractor's cost. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts,they shall be also itemized." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-12 .7 Costs for combined overhead and profit shall be as scheduled above, but in no case shall it exceed twenty percent(20%)." 7.3.7 Delete the first sentence of Subparagraph 7.3.7 and replace with the following: "The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Amount shall be actual net cost plus the Contractor's allocated percent for profit and overhead as confirmed by the Architect, subject to equitable adjustment recommended by the Architect and approved by the Owner." ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.3.1 Delete Subparagraph 8.3.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Owner,except as provided for in this Subparagraph 8.3.1,shall not be liable to the Contractor for delay to the Contractor's Work by the act, neglect or default of the Owner or the Architect, or by reason of fire, act of God, riot, strike, action of workmen or others,or any cause beyond the Owner's control.Should the Owner or Architect delay the Contractor in the Work, Contractor shall receive an extension of time for completion equal to the delay if a written Claim is made within forty-eight (48) hours, and under no circumstances shall the Owner be liable to pay the Contractor any compensation for such delays." 8.3.3 Delete Subparagraph 8.3.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "This Agreement does not permit the recovery of damages by the Contractor for delay or disruption or for extensions of time due to bad weather or acts of God. Contractor agrees that Contractor shall be fully compensated for all delays solely by an extension of time." 8.3.3.1 Add new Subparagraph 8.3.3.1 as follows: "The extensions of time may be granted for rain days in any month when the cumulative number of rain days during that month exceeds the number typically expected,which shown in the following Rainfall Table, provided that the rainfall prevented the execution of major items of work. A rain day is defined as a day when rainfall exceeds one-tenth (.1) inch during a 24 hour period. The number of rain days expected for each month during the term of the Contract is shown in the Rainfall Table as follows: January 4 calendar days February 4 calendar days March 3 calendar days April 3 calendar days May 6 calendar days June 5 calendar days July 5 calendar days August 6 calendar days September 6 calendar days October 5 calendar days November 3 calendar days December 3 calendar days The number of rain days shown in the Rainfall Table for the first and last months of the Contract will be prorated in determining the total number of rain days expected during the period of the Contract." 8.3.3.2 Add new Subparagraph 8.3.3.2 as follows: "Time extensions may also be granted for any day following a period of precipitation during which muddy conditions exist which prevent the performance of major items of work conducted on normal working days." 8.3.4 Add new Subparagraph 8.3.4 as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-13 "Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages:The time,as set out in the Proposal of this Contract,will be the maximum number of calendar days allowed to substantially complete this Project. Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the number of calendar days bid by Contractor will result in damages being sustained by the Owner. Such damages are, and will continue to be, impracticable and extremely difficult to determine. Due consideration will be given to any delay falling within 8.3.1. The Contractor will pay the Owner Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)for each calendar day(including Sundays and holidays)of delay in finishing the Work in excess of time specified for completion,plus any authorized time extensions. Execution of the Contract under these Specifications shall constitute agreement by the Owner and Contractor that Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)is the minimum value of the costs and actual damage caused by failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time, that such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty,and that such sum may be deducted from payments due the Contractor if such delay occurs. Owner and Contractor agree that late completion of the Work will result in Owner being damaged by the following, but not limited to this listing: .1 Additional professional services (e.g., Architectural, engineering, administrative and legal) and inspectional costs. .2 Storage costs by reason of Owner being unable to store materials arriving to be displayed or stored in new facility, since such facility is not completed and thus having to store such materials in substitute facility. .3 Transportation and labor cost by having to handle materials twice because the new facility was not ready for display or storage of such materials upon its original arrival." ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.3.2 Delete the phrase "and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site"and replace with the following: "The Contractor shall be solely responsible for payment of all costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for materials and equipment stored off the site." 9.3.3 Add the following new sentence to the end of Subparagraph 9.3.3: "Contractor shall indemnify and hold Owner harmless from any liens, claims, security interest or encumbrances filed by the Contractor, Subcontractors, or anyone claiming by, through or under the Contractor or Subcontractor for items covered by payments made by the Owner to Contractor." 9.3.4 Add new Subparagraph 9.3.4 as follows: "In each Request for Payment,the Contractor shall certify as follows:" 9.3.4.1 Add new Subparagraph 9.3.4.1 as follows: "There are no known mechanics' or materialness' liens outstanding at the date of this requisition, that all due and payable bills with respect to the Work have been paid to date or are included in the amount requested in the current application and that except for such bills not paid but so included,there is no known basis for the filing of any mechanics' or materialness' liens on the Work, and that releases from all Subcontractors and material men have been obtained in such form as to constitute an effective release of lien under the laws of the State of Texas covering all Work theretofore performed and for which payment has been made by the Owner to the Contractor." 9.5.2 Add the following new sentence to the end of Subparagraph 9.5.2: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-14 "The Owner shall not be deemed in default by reason of withholding payment as provided for in Subparagraph 9.5.1." 9.5.3 Add new Subparagraph 9.5.3 as follows: "Notwithstanding any provision contained within this Article, if the work has not attained Substantial Completion within the contract time, subject to extensions of time allowed under these Conditions, Architect may withhold any further payment to Contractor to the extent necessary to preserve sufficient funds to complete the construction of the Project and to cover liquidated damages assessed against Contractor up to the time of the Application for Payment and to the time it is reasonably anticipated that Substantial Completion will be achieved." 9.6.1.1 Add new Subparagraph 9.6.1.1 as follows: "Once each month, the Owner shall make a progress payment to the Contractor on the basis of a duly certified and approved estimate of the work performed during the preceding month under this Contract. To insure the proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain ten percent(10%)of the amount of each estimate of the completed work." 9.6.1.2 Add new Subparagraph 9.6.1.2 as follows: "All materials and work covered by partial payments made shall thereupon become the sole property of the Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for the care and protection of materials and work upon which payments have been made,or the restoration of any damaged work, or as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require the fulfillment of all of the terms of the Contract." 9.6.1.3 Add new Subparagraph 9.6.1.3 as follows: "Payments to the Contractor shall not be construed as releasing the Contractor or his Surety from any obligations under this Contract." 9.6.2 Delete Subparagraph 9.6.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days following receipt of payment from the Owner, pay all bills for labor and materials performed and furnished by others in connection with the Work,and shall,if requested, provide the Owner with evidence of such payment.Contractor's failure to make payments within such time shall constitute a material breach of this Contract. Contractor shall include a provision in each of its subcontracts imposing the same payment obligations on its Subcontractors as are applicable to the Contractor hereunder, and if the Owner so requests, shall provide copies of such Subcontractor payments to the Owner. If the Contractor has failed to make payment promptly to the Contractor's Subcontractors or for materials or labor used in the Work for which the Owner has made payment to the Contractor, the Owner shall be entitled to withhold payment to the Contractor in part or in whole to the extent necessary to protect the Owner." 9.7.1 Delete the phrase"or awarded by arbitration"in Subparagraph 9.7.1. 9.8.3 Revise the second sentence to read as follows: "If the Architect's observation discloses any item,whether or not included on the Contractor's list,which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Architect shall inform the Contractor in writing of such item or items and the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion,complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect." 9.8.3.1 Add new Subparagraph 8.3.1 as follows: "Except with the consent of the Owner, the Architect shall perform no more than two inspections to determine whether the Work or a designated portion thereof has attained Substantial Completion in SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-15 accordance with the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor for amounts paid to the Architect for any additional inspections." 9.8.5 Delete Subparagraph 9.8.5 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate.Thirty (30) days after completion of all incomplete work or correction of defective work as outlined in the Certificate,Consent of Surety, and upon the Owner's receipt of all Close-out documents as described in the Specifications, the Owner shall make payment of retainage,except for amounts required to be withheld pursuant to§53.081 thru§53.084 of the Texas Property Code." 9.9.2 Revise to read as follows: "Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used and shall determine and record the condition of the Work." 9.9.4 Add new Subparagraph 9.9.4 as follows: "In the event that Owner takes partial occupancy prior to Substantial Completion of the Project,Contractor shall obtain an endorsement to Contractor's Builder's Risk Policy to provide extended coverage for partial occupancy if Contractor's Builder's Risk Coverage required by Article 11.1.1 would not otherwise provide such coverage." 9.10.1 Delete Subparagraph 9.10.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "When all of the Work is finally completed and the Contractor is ready for a final inspection it shall notify the Owner and the Architect thereof in writing. Thereupon, the Architect and Owner will make final inspection of the Work and, if the Work is complete in full accordance with this Contract and this Contract has been fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment certifying to the Owner that the Project is complete and the Contractor is entitled to the remainder of the unpaid Contract Sum, less any amount withheld pursuant to this final Certificate for Payment and is required to repeat its final inspection of the Work,the Contractor shall bear the cost of such repeat final inspection(s)which cost may be deducted by the Owner,and from the Contractor's final payment." 9.10.4 Delete Subparagraph 9.10.4 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Owner shall make final payment of all sums due the Contractor not more than thirty (30) days after the Architect's execution of a final Certificate for Payment." ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1.1 Add the following to the end of Subparagraph 10.1.1: "and to conform to all provisions of the"Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction", published by the Associated General Contractors of America, Inc. latest edition and the Contractor further agrees to fully comply with all safety standards required by"OSHA"(Occupational Safety and Health Administration)." 10.1.1.2 Add new Subparagraph 10.1.1.2 as follows: "Contractor's employees, agents, and Subcontractors shall not perform any service for Owner while under the influence of alcohol or any controlled substance. Contractor,its employees,agents,and Subcontractors shall not use, possess, distribute, or sell illicit or unprescribed controlled drugs or drug paraphernalia, or misuse legitimate prescription drugs while performing the Work. Contractor, its employees, agents, and Subcontractors shall not use, possess,distribute,or sell alcoholic beverages while performing the Work. Contractor has adopted or will adopt its own policy to assure a drug and alcohol free work place while performing the Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14- 16 Contractor will remove any of its employees from performing the Work any time there is suspicion of alcohol and/or drug use, possession, or impairment involving such employee, and at any time an incident occurs where drug or alcohol use could have been a contributing factor.Owner has the right to require Contractor to remove employees from performing the Work any time cause exists to suspect alcohol or drug use. In such cases,Contractor's employees may only be considered for return to work after the Contractor certifies as a result of a for-cause test, conducted immediately following removal that said employee was in compliance with this Contract.Contractor will not use an employee to perform the Work who either refuses to take,or tests positive in,any alcohol or drug test. Contractor will comply with all applicable federal, state, and local drug and alcohol related laws and regulations (e.g., Department of Transportation regulations, Department of Defense Drug-free Work-free Workforce Policy, Drug-Free Workplace Act of 1988). Owner has also banned the presence of all weapons on the Project site,whether the owner thereof has a permit for a concealed weapon or not." 10.2.1.3 Delete Subparagraph 10.2.1.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as fencing, trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction." 10.2.3 Add the following as the second sentence of Subparagraph 10.2.3: "Contractor shall provide reasonable fall protection safeguards and provide approved fall protection safety equipment for use by all exposed Contractor employees." 10.2.5 Delete Subparagraph 10.2.5 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Contractor shall be responsible for and shall hold Owner free and harmless from liability resulting from loss of or damage to any property that is on or off the site and/or in transit as referred to in Clause 10.2.1.2 even if such loss or damage results from Owner, Owner's consultants, or Architect's negligence.As to property referred to in Clause 10.2.1.3, Contractor shall hold Owner free and harmless from liability resulting from loss of or damage caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them,anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,regardless of whether or not such damage is caused in part by the negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, Owner's consultants, or Architect.The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the obligations under Paragraph 3.18; provided that where the negligence of Owner or Architect is a concurring cause, Contractor's obligation to indemnify is limited to the amount necessary to cause the relative liability of Owner,Architect and Contractor to reflect the comparative negligence findings of the trier of fact(judge or jury)or as agreed in a settlement agreement to which Owner,Architect and Contractor are all parties." 10.2.3 Add "trained in industry recognized and approved safety practices"after"site" in the first sentence. 10.3.3 Delete the word "sole" in the last line of the first sentence. 10.6.1 Delete the second sentence of Subparagraph 10.6.1. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 Revise the title of Paragraph 11.1 to read as follows: "CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE" 11.1.1 Delete Subparagraph 11.1.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in a company or companies authorized to do business in the State of Texas the following types of insurance with coverages not less than the limits stated or as required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages shall be written on an "occurrence" basis and shall be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-17 maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment.The stipulated limits for liability aggregate coverages shall be for this project. Builder's Risk:In an amount at least that of the initial Guaranteed Maximum Price,as well as any subsequent modifications thereto,for the entire Work on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles." 11.1.2 Delete Subparagraph 11.1.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, written on an occurrence basis,shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. Nothing contained herein shall limit or waive Contractor's legal or contractual responsibilities to Owner or others.The stipulated limits of liability aggregate coverages shall be for this project: Worker's Compensation: A. State: Statutory B. Applicable Federal: Statutory C. Employer's Liability: $1,000,000 per accident $1,000,000 disease, policy limit $1,000,000 disease,each employee Comprehensive General Liability: A. Bodily Injury: $1,000,000 each occurrence $2,000,000 aggregate B. Property Damage: $50,000 each occurrence(fire damage) C. Products&Completed Operations:$1,000,000 aggregate D. Property Damage Liability Insurance shall provide X, C,and U coverage. E. Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations. F. Broad Form Contractual Liability Coverage. Contractual Liability: A. Property Damage shall be included in Commercial General Liability Coverage. Personal Injury: A. With Employment Exclusion deleted;shall be included in Commercial General Liability Coverage. Business Automobile Liability(including owned, non-owned, hired,or any other vehicles): A. Combined Single Limit: $1,000,000 B. Uninsured Motorists: $500,000 each occurrence C. Underinsured Motorists: $500,000 each occurrence If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial Liability policy,coverages shall be: A. Not less than: $2,000,000 aggregate SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-18 B. Not less than: $1,000,000 each occurrence C. Fire Damage Limit not less than:$1,000,000 on any one fire D. Medical Expenses Limit not less than:$5,000 any one person E. Personal and Adv. Injury: $1,000,000 F. Products-Completed Operations: $2,000,000 aggregate (for 1 year commencing with issuance of Final Certificate for Payment) Umbrella Excess Liability coverages shall be: A. $2,000,000 each occurrence B. $2,000,000 aggregate All liability insurance coverages except Worker's Compensation shall name the Owner and Architect as Additional Insured. Blanket Waiver of Subrogation shall be effected on Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Coverages." 11.1.3 Delete Subparagraph 11.1.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under these policies will not be cancelled or allowed to expire during the full term of this Contract and at least 30 days' prior written notice shall be given of such expiration or cancellation to the Owner and Architect. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both,shall be furnished by the Contractor to the Owner and Architect within five(5) days of such reduction in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief." 11.1.4 Add new Subparagraph 11.1.4 as follows: "Contractor and its Subcontractors shall not commence the shipment of equipment or materials or commence the Work at the site until all of the insurance coverage required of Contractor and its Subcontractors are in force and the necessary certificates and statements pursuant to Subparagraphs 11.1.3 and 11.3.1 hereof have been received by Owner and the Architect has issued a written notice to proceed." 11.1.5 Add new Subparagraph 11.1.5 as follows: "As an alternative and at Owner's option and expense, Owner may elect to furnish or to arrange for Contractor any part or all of the insurance required by Paragraph 11.1 hereof. If Owner so elects, it shall notify, in writing, Contractor and issue a Change Order therefore, but no adjustment to the scheduled completion date or the Contract Sum shall be allowed." 11.1.6 Add new Subparagraph 11.1.6 as follows: "Contractor shall provide Workers'Compensation and employers'liability insurance meeting statutory limits mandated by state and federal laws." 11.1.7 Add new Subparagraph 11.1.7 as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-19 "A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission,or a coverage agreement(TWCC-81,TWCC-82,TWCC-83,orTWCC-84),showing statutory Workers' Compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a Project is required for the duration of the Project. Duration of the Project includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's / person's work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the Owner. Persons providing services on the Project include all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project,regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees.This includes,without limitation, independent Contractors,Subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers,Owner-operators,employees of any such entity,or employees of any entity that furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. Services include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor,transportation,or other service related to a Project.Services do not include activities unrelated to the Project,such as food/beverage vendors,office supply deliveries,and delivery of portable toilets. If applicable, the Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code Section 401.011(44)for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project for the duration of the Project. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must,prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the Owner showing that coverage has been extended. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a Project, and provide to the Owner: a. A certificate of coverage,prior to that person beginning work on the Project,so the Owner will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and b. No later than seven (7)days after receipt by the Contractor,a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one (1)year after thereafter. The Contractor shall notify the Owner in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. The Contractor shall post on each Project site a notice,in the text,form,and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered,and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. If applicable, the Contractor shall contractually require each person whom it contracts to provide services on a Project to: a. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code 401.011(44)for all of its employees providing services on the Project for the duration of the Project; b. Provide to the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project for the duration of the Project; SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-20 c. Provide .the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; d. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts,and provide to the Contractor: (1) A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning the Work on the Project; and (2) A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; e. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for (1) year thereafter. f. Notify the Owner in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the person knew,or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and g. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by items a-f,with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the Owner that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by Workers' Compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the Commissions Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties,criminal penalties,civil penalties,or other civil actions. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor that entitles the Owner to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten (10)days after receipt of notice of breach from the Owner. The coverage requirement recited above does not apply to sole proprietors, partners, and corporate executive officers of a business entity who are excluded from coverage through an endorsement of an insurance policy or certificate of authority to self-insure that is delivered, issued for delivery,or renewed on or after January 1, 1996, pursuant to Tex. Lab. Code Ann.§406.097." 11.1.8 Add new Subparagraph 11.1.8 as follows: "The Owner and Contractor shall waive all rights against (1) each other and the Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees each of the other, and (2) the Architect and separate Contractors, if any, and their Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance applicable to the Work. The foregoing waiver afforded the Architect, his agents and employees shall not extend to the liability imposed by Subparagraph 3.18.3. The Owner or the Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, separate Contractors, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers, each in favor of all other parties enumerated in this Subparagraph 11.1.8." 11.1.3 Delete Subparagraph 11.1.3 including all subparts in their entirety. 11.2 Delete Subparagraph 11.2 including all subparts in their entirety. 11.4.1 Revise the first sentence to read as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-21 "The Contractor shall purchase and maintain,in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance in the amount of the initial Contract Sum as well as subsequent modifications thereto for the entire Work at the site on a replacement cost basis without voluntary deductibles." 11.4.1.2 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1.2 in its entirety. 11.4.1.3 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.1.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "If the property insurance requires minimum deductibles and such deductibles are identified in the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. If the insurer increases the required minimum deductibles above the amounts so identified the Owner shall be responsible for payment of the additional costs not covered." 11.4.2 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Boiler and Machinery Insurance. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law,which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds." 11.4.3 Delete the second sentence of Subparagraph 11.4.3 in its entirety. 11.4.6 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.6 in its entirety and replace with the following: "Before an exposure to loss may occur,the Contractor shall file with the Owner a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Paragraph 11.4. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be cancelled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced during the term of this contract and until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner." 11.4.8 Revise the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.4.6 to read as follows: "A loss insured under Contractor's property insurance shall be adjusted by the Contractor as fiduciary and made payable to the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Subparagraph 11.4.10." 11.4.9 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.9 in its entirety and replace with the following: "If required in writing by a party in interest,the Contractor as fiduciary shall,upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Contractor's, duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary.The Contractor shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Contractor shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or in accordance with a mediation or arbitration award in which case the procedure shall be as provided in Paragraph 4.5. If after such loss no other special agreement is made,replacement of damaged property shall be covered by appropriate Change Order." 11.4.10 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.10 in its entirety and replace with the following: "The Contractor as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five (5) days after occurrence of loss to the Contractor's exercise of this power; if such objection is made, mediators shall be chosen as provided in Paragraph 4.5. The Contractor as fiduciary shall, in that case, make settlement with insurers in accordance with directions of such mediators. If distribution of insurance proceeds by mediation or arbitration is required, the mediators will direct such distribution." 11.5.1 Delete Subparagraph 11.5.1 in its entirety and replace with the following: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-22 "The Contractor is required, as a condition precedent to the execution of the Contract, to execute Performance and Payment Bonds in the form required by Texas Statutes, in the amount equal to One Hundred Percent (100%) of the total bid as security for payment of all persons performing labor and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. (Bonding Company is to furnish such forms.) All bonds shall be issued by a surety company licensed, listed and authorized to issue bonds in the State of Texas by the Texas Department of Insurance.The surety company may be required by the Owner to have a rating of not less than "B" in the latest edition of Best's Insurance Reports, Property-Casualty. The surety company shall provide, if requested, information on bonding capacity, other projects under coverage and shall provide proof to establish adequate financial capacity for this project. Should the bond amount be in excess of ten percent(10%)of the surety company's capital and surplus,the surety company issuing the bond shall certify that the surety company has acquired reinsurance, in a form and amount acceptable to the Owner, to reinsure the portion of the risk that exceeds ten percent(10%) of the surety company's capital and surplus with one or more reinsurers who are duly authorized and admitted to do business in Texas and that amount reinsured by a reinsurer does not exceed ten percent(10%)of the reinsurers capital and surplus. The Sureties shall promptly file a signed copy of the Contract, Performance, and Payment Bonds with the Owner." 11.5.3 Add new Subparagraph 11.5.3 as follows: "All bonds will be reviewed by the Architect for compliance with the Contract Documents prior to execution of the Contract. In the event that the Architect has any questions concerning the sufficiency of the bonds, the bonds will be referred to the Owner or the Owner's Representative for review and decision." 11.5.4 Add new Subparagraph 11.5.4 as follows: "All bonds shall be originals. The Contractor shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the Power-of-Attorney. The name,address,and telephone number of a contact person for the bonding company shall be provided." 11.5.5 Add new Subparagraph 11.5.5 as follows: "Upon the request in writing of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract,the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made." 11.5.6 Add new Subparagraph 11.5.6 as follows: "Bonds shall be signed by an agent resident in the State of Texas and the date of the bond shall be the date of execution of the Contract. If at any time during the continuance of the Contract, the surety of the Contractor's bonds becomes insufficient, Owner shall have the right to require additional and sufficient sureties which the Contractor shall furnish to the satisfaction of the Owner within ten (10) business days after notice to do so. In default thereof, the Contractor may be suspended, and all payment or money due to the Contractor withheld." ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.6 Add new Subparagraph 12.2.6 as follows: "Contractor shall (i) re-execute any parts of the Work that fail to conform with the requirements of this Agreement that appear in the progress of the Work; (ii) remedy any defects in the Work due to faulty materials or workmanship which appear within a period of one(1)year from Substantial Completion of the Work hereunder,or within such longer period of time as may be set forth in the Drawings and Specifications or other Contract Documents; and (iii) replace, repair, or restore any parts of the Project or furniture, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-23 fixtures, equipment, or other items placed therein (whether by Owner or any other party)that are injured or damaged by any such parts of the Work that do not conform to the requirements of this Agreement or defects in the Work." 12.2.7 Add new Subparagraph 12.2.7 as follows: "The provisions of this Paragraph 12.2 apply to Work done by Subcontractors of the Contractor as well as Work done directly by employees of the Contractor. The provisions of this Subparagraph 12.2.7 shall not apply to corrective work attributable solely to the acts or omissions of any separate Contractor of Owner (unless Contractor is acting in such capacities).The cost to Contractor of performing any of its obligations under this Subparagraph 12.2.7 to the extent not covered by insurance shall be borne by Contractor." 12.2.8 Add new Subparagraph 12.2.8 as follows: "If,however,Owner and Contractor deem it inexpedient to require the correction of Work damaged or not done in accordance with the Contract Documents, an equitable deduction from the Contract Sum and the Stipulated Sum shall be made by agreement between Contractor and Owner. Until such settlement,Owner may withhold such sums as Owner deems just and reasonable from moneys, if any, due Contractor. The settlement shall not be unreasonably delayed by the Owner and the amount of money withheld shall be based on estimated actual cost of the correction to Owner." 12.2.9 Add new Subparagraph 12.2.9 as follows: "Contractor's express warranty herein shall be in addition to,and not in lieu of,any other remedies Owner may have under this Agreement, at law,or in equity for defective Work." ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1.1 Delete the first sentence of Subparagraph 13.1.1 and replace with the following: "The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Texas. The Contract is deemed performable entirely in Jefferson County,Texas. Any litigation to enforce or interpret any terms of the Contract, or any other litigation arising out of or as a result of the Contract shall be brought in the State courts of Jefferson County,Texas." 13.3.1 Insert the words"or by electronic facsimile transmission"after"certified mail". 13.5.1 Delete the second sentence of Subparagraph 13.5.1 and replace with the following: "The Owner will contract for, independently of the Contractor, the inspection services, the testing of construction materials engineering,and the verification testing services necessary for the acceptance of the Work by the Owner.The Contractor shall give timely notice to the persons or entities selected by the Owner of the need for such services." 13.7 Delete Subparagraph 13.7, including all subparts,in their entirety. 13.8 Add new Paragraph 13.8 as follows: "CONTRACTOR'S RECORDS" 13.8.1 Add new Subparagraph 13.8.1 as follows: "Contractor agrees to furnish Owner such information as may be available in Contractor's files and records for the Project for the purpose of aiding Owner in establishing a depreciation schedule for the Project or such portions thereof as Owner may determine." 13.9 Add new Paragraph 13.9 as follows: "MECHANIC'S AND MATERIALMEN'S LIENS" SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-24 13.9.1 Add new Subparagraph 13.9.1 as follows: "Contractor shall save and keep Owner, Owner's Bond proceeds and Owner's property free from all mechanic's and material men's liens and all other liens and claims, legal or equitable arising out of Contractor's Work hereunder. In the event any such lien or claim is filed by anyone claiming by,through or under Contractor,Contractor shall remove and discharge same within ten (10)days of the filing thereof." 13.9.2 Add new Subparagraph 13.9.2 as follows: "Contractor shall and hereby does subordinate any and all liens, rights and interest (whether choate or inchoate and include, without limitation, all mechanic's and material men's liens under the applicable laws of the State of Texas, whether contractual, statutory or constitutional) owned, claimed or held, or to be owned, claimed or held by Contractor in and to any part of the Work or the property on which the Work is performed,to the liens securing payments of sums now or hereafter borrowed by Owner,its successors and assigns, in connection with the development, design and/or construction of the Project. Contractor shall execute such further and additional evidence of the subordination of liens, rights and interests as Owner, Owner's interim or permanent lenders may require.The subordination of lien is made in consideration of and as an inducement to the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents, and shall be applicable despite any dispute between the parties hereto or any others, or any default by Owner under the Contract Documents or otherwise." 13.9.3 Add new Subparagraph 13.9.3 as follows: "Contractor shall include in every subcontract relating to the Work in which it is a party and in each and every lower tier subcontract, provisions (1) that the person or entity doing Work, performing labor or furnishing materials pursuant to each subcontract agrees to subordinate any mechanic's or material men's lien or any other claim against any part of the Work of the property on which the Work is performed or materials furnished under the Contract Documents or such subcontract, to the liens securing payment of sums now or hereafter borrowed by Owner,its successors and assigns,in connection with the development, design and/or construction of the Project and to all liens, rights and interests of any long term lessee of the Project, (2) that the required subordinations are made in consideration of and as an inducement to the execution and delivery of the Contract Documents and the subcontract in which it appears, and shall be applicable despite any dispute between or among Owner, Contractor or any Subcontractor or any default by Owner, Contractor or any Subcontractor under the Contract Documents or any other subcontract or agreement and (3) that Owner, its successors and assigns, lenders and any long term lessees are express third-party beneficiaries who have supplied consideration for such subordinations." 13.10 Add new Paragraph 13.10 as follows: "HAZARDOUS MATERIALS CERTIFICATION" 13.10.1 Add new Subparagraph 13.10.1 as follows: "The Contractor shall certify in writing that no materials used in the Work contain lead or asbestos materials in them in excess of amounts allowed by Local /State standards, laws, codes, rules and regulations; the Federal Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) standards and/or the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards, whichever is most restrictive. The Contractor shall provide this written certification as part of submittals under the Section in the Project Manual related to Contract Closeout." 13.11 Add new Paragraph 13.11 as follows: "EQUAL OPPORTUNITY" 13.11.1 Add new Subparagraph 13.11.1 as follows: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-25 'The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, or national origin. Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race,religion, color,sex,or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment, or recruitment advertising;lay-off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants, notices setting forth the nondiscrimination policies." 13.11.2 Add new Subparagraph 13.11.2 as follows: "The Contractor and the Contractor's Subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race,religion,color, sex,or national origin." 13.12 Add new Paragraph 13.12 as follows: "WAGE RATES" 13.12.1 Add new Subparagraph 13.12.1 as follows: "In compliance with the statutes of Texas relating to labor,the wage rates listed elsewhere in the Contract Documents have been ascertained and determined by the Owner as the general prevailing rates in the locality of the Project for the classifications listed. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall pay to all laborers, workman and mechanics employed by them in the execution of this Contract not less than such rates for each craft or type of workman or mechanic needed to execute the Contract. If it becomes necessary to employ any person in a trade or occupation not therein listed, such person shall be paid not less than an hourly rate fairly comparable to the rates shown as part of the Contract Documents. This determination of prevailing wages shall not be construed to prohibit the payment of more than the rates named. In compliance with Article 5159a, Revised Civil Statutes of Texas, the Contractor shall forfeit, as a penalty to the Owner,ten dollars ($10.00)for each laborer, workman or mechanic paid less than the rates stipulated herein for any work done under this Contract by him or by a Subcontractor under him." ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1.3 Delete Subparagraph 14.1.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "If one of the reasons described n Subparagraph 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists,the Contractor may,upon seven(7) days' written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment in an amount which would have been recoverable had the termination been for the Owner's convenience." 14.2.2 Delete Subparagraph 14.2.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: "When any of the above reasons exist,the Owner may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's Surety,if any,seven(7)days'written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may,subject to any prior rights of Surety: 1. take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereof owned by the Contractor. 2. accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4. 3. finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient." 14.4.3 Delete Subparagraph 14.4.3 in its entirety and replace with the following: "In the case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed,for profits only on that portion of the Work executed,and for reasonable costs of demobilization." SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-26 END OF DOCUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 01 22 14-27 SECTION 0125 00 -SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. B. Standards: Refer to Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" for applicability of industry standards to products specified. C. Procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products and product options are included under Section"Materials and Equipment." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents. B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period,and accepted prior to award of Contract,are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions. 2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Request Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 30 calendar days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 30 calendar days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect. 1. Submit 4 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests on the"Request For Substitution"form included at the end of this section. 2. Architect's Action: Within 7 calendar days of receipt of the request for substitution,the Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within 14 calendar days of receipt of the request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of the additional information or documentation,which ever is later,the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated,use the product specified by name. SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 0125 00- 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. 1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely,fully documented and properly submitted. 4. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract Documents. 5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority,and the requested substitution can be approved. 7. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost,time, energy conservation or other considerations of merit,after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services,increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors,and similar considerations. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials,and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility. 9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty. B. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings,Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval. PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Applicable) -END OFSECTION 012500- SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 25 00- 2 SECTION 0126 00- MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit prices. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittals" for requirements for the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for administrative procedures governing applications for payment. 4. Division 01 Section"Construction Progress Documentation"for requirements of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 5. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract. 1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time,will be issued by the Architect on AIA form G710,Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Architect,with a detailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications, if necessary. 1. Proposal requests issued by the Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instruction either to stop work in progress,or to execute the proposed change. 2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 14 calendar days of receipt of the proposal request, submit to the Architect for the Owner's review an estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change. a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested,furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00- 1 b. Indicate applicable delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time. B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable delivery charges,equipment rental,and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements in Section "Product Substitutions" if the proposed change in the Work requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. 5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the Work will have on the Contract Time. C. Proposal Request Form: Use Construction Managers Standard Change Order Proposal Request Form. 1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. Upon the Owner's approval of a Change Order Proposal Request,the Construction Manager will issue a Change Order for signatures of the Owner and Architect on AIA Document G701. 1.6 ALLOWANCES A. Allowance Adjustment:To adjust allowance amounts, base each Change Order proposal on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance,multiplied by final measurement of work-in-place. If applicable, include reasonable allowance for cutting losses,tolerances, mixing wastes,normal produce imperfections,and similar margins. 1. Include installation costs in purchase amount only where indicated as part of the allowance. 2. If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of overhead costs and other margins claimed. 3. Submit substantiation of a change in scope of work, if any, claimed in Change Orders related to unit-cost allowances. 4. Owner reserves the right to establish the quantity of work-in-place by independent quantity survey, measure,or count. B. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents,whether for the Purchase Order amount or Contractor's MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 0126 00- 2 handling, labor, installation,overhead,and profit. Submit claims within twenty one(21) days of receipt of the Change Order or Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed. Owner will reject claims submitted later than twenty one(21)days after such authorization. 1. Do not include Contractor's or subcontractor's indirect expense in the Change Order cost amount unless it is clearly shown that the nature or extent of work has changed from what could have been foreseen from information in the Contract Documents. 2. No change to Contractor's indirect expense is permitted for selection of higher-or lower-priced materials or systems of the same scope and nature as originally indicated. 1.7 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work,for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change,submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Applicable) -END OF SECTION 0126 00- MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 26 00- 3 SECTION 01 26 10- REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative provisions for submitting and processing Requests for Interpretation(RFIs)after execution of the Agreement: 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.4 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION(RFIs) A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting,prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified in Paragraph 1.4.C. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed,legible description of item needing interpretation and the following(fill in software blanks where applicable): 1. RFI ID number,numbered sequentially. 2. Subject. 3. To:(choose Project Architect/Project Manager). 4. Contractor's question,which shall include: a. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs,as appropriate. b. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. c. Field dimensions and conditions,as appropriate. d. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum,Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 5. Attachments: Include drawings,descriptions,measurements,photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings,and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. Provide attachments in .pdf format. REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION 01 26 10-1 a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses,structural grid references,and details of affected materials, C. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1. RFIs may be submitted thru electronic sofeware. a. Software contractor must have computer with internet access and a web browser. D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI,determine action required,and return it. Allow seven(7)calendar days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m.will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. RFIs not submitted per Paragraph 1.4.C. b. Requests for approval of submittals. c. Requests for approval of substitutions. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. h. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section 0126 00"Modification Procedures." j. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten(10)calendar days of receipt of the RFI response. k. RFIs involving request for remedial action to correct nonconforming work, which are returned in more than ten (10)calendar days,are not eligible for Contractor's request for an increase in Contract Sum or an extension of Contract Time. E. On receipt of Architect's action,immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within ten(10)calendar days if Contractor disagrees with response. F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain,and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit updated log at each Construction Progress Meeting. Provide software log with not less than the following: REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION 01 26 10-2 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work,Construction Change Directive,and Proposal Request,as appropriate. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 0126 10 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION 01 26 10-3 SECTION 0129 00- PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and List of Subcontractors. B. The Contractor's Construction Schedule is included in Section "Construction Progress Documentation". 1.3 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative schedules and forms, including: a. Contractor's construction schedule. b. Application for Payment form. c. List of subcontractors. d. Schedule of allowances. e. Schedule of alternates. f. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 2. Submit the Schedule of Values to the Architect at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of the initial Application for Payment. B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual Table of Contents as a guide to establish the format for the Schedule of Values. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of the Architect. c. Project number. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00- 1 d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Generic name. b. Dollar value. c. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. d. Change Orders(numbers)that have affected value. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. 4. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar;the total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Margins of Cost: Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. a. At the Contractor's option,temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense. 6. Substantiating Data: a. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying item amounts in question. b. On allowance items,submit actual invoice from supplier of product or service. c. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show Application number and date,and line item by number and description. 1.4 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT: A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the Architect and paid for by the Owner. 1. The initial Application for Payment, the Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,and the final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is as indicated in the Agreement Form. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Construction Agreement. C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G 702 and Continuation Sheets G 703 as the form for Application for Payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0129 00- 2 D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization and execution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 2. Include amounts of approved Change Orders issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. E. Transmittal: Submit 3 executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours;one copy shall be complete,including waivers of lien and similar attachments,when required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments,and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect. F. Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of the first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors approved for award. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators approved at time of submission. 3. Schedule of Values. 4. Contractor's Construction Schedule(preliminary if not final). 5. List of Contractor's Staff Assignments. 6. Copies of Building Permits. 7. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the work. 8. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 9. Report of pre-construction meeting. G. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment; this application shall reflect any Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. H. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: 1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. 2. Warranties(guarantees)and maintenance agreements. 3. Test/adjust/balance records. 4. Maintenance instructions. 5. Meter readings(if applicable). PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 29 00- 3 6. Start-up performance reports. 7. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy,use,operation and maintenance. 8. Final cleaning. 9. Application for reduction of retainage,and consent of surety. 10. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of Substantial Completion. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with submittal of the final Application for Payment include the following: 1. Completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. 3. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 4. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 5. Removal of surplus materials,rubbish and similar elements. 6. Change of door locks to Owner's access. PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Applicable) -END OFSECTION 012900- PAYMENT PROCEDURES 0129 00- 4 SECTION 01 3100- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes: 1. Coordination of Work of the Contract. 2. Preconstruction conferences. 3. Scheduling and administration of progress meetings. 4. Pre-installation conferences. 1.3 DESCRIPTION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of Specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS A. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 01 Section"Field Engineering"specifies procedures for field engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 2. Division 01 Section "Submittals" specifies procedures for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 01 Section "Materials and Equipment" specifies procedures for coordinating general installation. 4. Division 01 Section"Closeout Procedures"specifies procedures for coordinating contract closeout. 1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Carefully study and compare Contract Documents before proceeding with fabrication and installation of Work. Promptly advise Architect of any error,inconsistency,omission,or apparent discrepancy discovered. B. Allot time in construction scheduling for liaison with Architect,and for establishing procedures for PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 0131 00- 1 handling queries and clarifications. Use standard"Request for Interpretation",form as approved by Architect for requesting information. C. If Architect is able to respond to a request for interpretation by making specific reference to Drawing sheet or Specification Section,Contractor shall reimburse Owner for charges of Architect and Architect's Consultants for performing review services for the Contractor. D. In addition to meetings specified herein, hold coordination meetings and conferences with personnel and subcontractors to ensure coordination of Work. E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of various Specification sections to avoid conflicts and ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. F. Coordinate Work of various Specification sections having interdependent responsibilities for installation,connection,and operation. G. Verify that characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities and services. H. Except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, conduit and wiring in construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. Make provision to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. J. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into the Work. K. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents. L. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items. M. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. N. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision. 0. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. P. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration. Q. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize the necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose. R. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual components at standard mounting heights recognized within the industry for the particular application indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions to the Architect for final decision. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100- 2 S. Cleaning and Protection: 1. During handling and installation,clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 2. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. 3. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, such exposures include, but are not limited to,the following: Excessive static or dynamic loading. Excessive internal or external pressures. Excessively high or low temperatures. Thermal shock. Excessively high or low humidity. Air contamination or pollution. Water or ice. Solvents. Chemicals. Light. Radiation. Puncture. Abrasion. Heavy traffic. Soiling, staining and corrosion. Bacteria. Rodent and insect infestation. Combustion. Electrical current. High speed operation. Improper lubrication. Unusual wear or other misuse. Contact between incompatible materials. Destructive testing. Misalignment. Excessive weathering. Unprotected storage. Improper shipping or handling. Theft. Vandalism. 1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS AND LAYOUTS A. General: 1. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and are not to be submitted to Architect for approval. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 3 2. Coordination drawings show relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in space provided or to function as intended. 3. Prepare composite coordination drawings to scale of 1:50(1/4"=1'-0")or larger;detailing major elements, components, and systems of architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical equipment and materials in relationship with each other, installations, and building components. Include dimensions. 4. Indicate locations where space is limited for installation and access and where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to efficient flow of Work affecting one or more trades. 5. Indicate scheduling,sequencing, movement, and positioning of large equipment into building during construction. 6. Prepare floor plans,elevations,and details to indicate penetrations in floors,walls,and ceilings and their relationship to other penetrations and installations. 7. Prepare reflected ceiling plans to coordinate and integrate installations,air outlets and inlets, light fixtures, communications systems components, sprinklers, and other ceiling-mounted devices. 8. Show interrelationship of components to be shown on separate Shop Drawings. 9. Indicate required installation sequences. 10. CAD drawing files may be released by the Architect to the Contractor(at no charge)and/or his Subcontractors(at$50.00 per requested individual sheet)after execution of a formal electronic document release form which may be obtained from the Architect. B. Structural Systems: Include, but do not necessarily limit to following: 1. Structural frame showing interface with exterior cladding. 2. Location of openings in relation to structure. 3. Show attachments to decking,structural elements,and other systems. C. Mechanical Systems: Include,but do not necessarily limit to following: 1. Proposed locations of piping,ductwork,equipment,and materials. 2. Proposed locations for access panels and doors. 3. Clearances for installing and maintaining insulation. 4. Clearances for servicing and maintaining equipment, including tube removal, filter removal, and space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. Show access locations. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 4 5. Equipment connections and support details. 6. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. 7. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. 8. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. 9. Valve stem movement. D. Electrical Systems: Include, but do not necessarily limit to following: 1. Proposed locations of major raceway systems,equipment, and materials. 2. Clearances for servicing equipment, including space for equipment disassembly required for periodic maintenance. Show access locations. 3. Exterior wall and foundation penetrations. 4. Fire-rated wall and floor penetrations. 5. Equipment connections and support details. 6. Sizes and location of required concrete pads and bases. E. Coordinate in field with affected trades for proper relationship to Work based on Project conditions. F. Notify Architect of conflicts and other coordination issues requiring resolution prior to commencing construction in each affected area. G. Submit Contractor's certification to Architect that coordination documents have been completed and coordination issues have been identified and resolved prior to commencing construction in each affected area. H. Make coordination documents available in field office for review by Architect and Owner during entire period of construction. 1.7 MEETINGS A. In addition to progress meetings, hold coordination meetings and pre-installation conferences with personnel and subcontractors to assure coordination of Work. Provide a minimum two (2) working day notice to the Architect and Owner for meetings. 1.8 COORDINATION OF SUBMITTALS A. Schedule and coordinate submittals specified in Section 01 33 00. B. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to,and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate requests for substitutions to assure compatibility of space, of operating elements, and PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 5 effect on work of other sections. 1.9 COORDINATION OF SPACE A. Coordinate use of Project space and sequence of installation of mechanical,and electrical work which is indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as practicable,with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance, and for repairs. B. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. C. In finished areas except as otherwise shown, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. D. Layout of plumbing,fire protection, mechanical, and electrical systems, equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, conduit, specialty items, and accessories indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic. Variations in alignment,elevation,and details required to avoid interferences and satisfy architectural and structural limitations are not necessarily shown. E. Prior to installation of material and equipment, review and coordinate Work with Architectural and Structural Drawings to establish exact space conditions. Where available space is inadequate or where reasonable modifications are not possible, request information from Architect before proceeding. F. Coordinate installation to prevent conflicts and cooperate in making,without extra charge,reasonable modifications in layout as needed. G. Provide clear access to control points,valves, strainers, control devices, and specialty items of every nature related to such systems and equipment to obtain maximum head room. Provide adequate clearances as necessary for operation and maintenance. 1.10 COORDINATION OF CONTRACT CLOSEOUT A. Coordinate completion and cleanup of work of separate sections in preparation for Substantial Completion of portions of Work designated for Owner partial occupancy. B. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site by various sections for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. C. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified in Section 01 77 00. 1.11 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Architect will schedule conference within 14 calendar days after the"Notice To Proceed". B. Attendance: Owner,Architect,Contractor and representatives of major subcontractors, and others as appropriate. C. Architect presides over meeting and is responsible for recording and distributing minutes. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 6 D. Agenda 1. Submittal of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Execution of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submittal of list of subcontractors, list of products,schedule of values,and progress schedule. 5. Designation of responsible personnel. Staff Names: Within 15 days of Notice to Proceed, submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments, including the Superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the site; identify individuals,their duties and responsibilities; list their addresses and telephone numbers. 6. Procedures, processing, and formats for field decisions,submittals, substitutions, applications for payments,proposal requests,change orders,and Contract closeout procedures. Formats used by Architect and Contractor must be submitted to Architect and Owner at this time and must conform to Owner requirements. 7. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 8. Owner's requirements. 9. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 10. Survey and building layout. 11. Security,safety, and housekeeping procedures. 12. Schedules and sequencing. 13. Procedures for testing. 14. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 15. Requirements for startup and delivery of equipment. 16. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 17. Notification procedures for emergencies: a. Special Note: Contractor is to notify Owner and Architect immediately upon occurrence of any incident involving personal injury, property damage, interruption of a utility source,or an other emergency.Contractor is to file a written follow-up report to Owner within 24 hours of incident. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 7 1.12 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer weekly construction progress meetings,throughout progress of Work. Provide a minimum two(2)working day notice to the Architect and Owner for meetings. 1. Prepare agenda and distribute notice of each meeting to participants. 2. Make physical arrangements. 3. Preside at meetings, record minutes, and distribute copies after meeting to participants, and to entities affected by decisions at meetings.(Minutes from meetings to be distributed within 72 hours after meeting.) 4. Distribute one copy of minutes to Architect and one to Owner. 5. Maintain in field office one copy of agenda and minutes for each conference and meeting. B. Location of Meetings: Contractor's field office. C. Attendance: Contractor, job superintendent, subcontractors, and suppliers as appropriate to agenda; Owner,Architect, and professional consultants as appropriate. D. Anticipated Agenda 1. Approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Work progress since previous meeting: a. Current activities. b. Critical activities. c. Deviations from schedule. 3. Field observations,problems,conflicts,and decisions. 4. Deficiencies: a. Identification of items. b. Status of correction. 5. Requests for Interpretations(RFIs): a. Status of clarification. b. Status of proposal requests. 6. Changes and Modifications: a. Status of change orders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 8 b. Pending changes. c. Pending claims and disputes. d. Clarification decisions of Architect or Owner. 7. Problems and conflicts which impede planned progress. 8. Construction Progress and Submittal Schedules: a. Off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. b. Effect of proposed changes on construction progress schedule and coordination. c. Submittal schedules,status of submittals,and effect on construction progress schedule. d. Corrective measures to regain projected schedule. 9. Planned progress during succeeding Work period. (Provide a"look ahead"schedule). 10. Adequacy of work forces. 11. Coordination between elements of Work. 12. Maintenance of Project Record Documents. 13. Other business relating to progress of Work. E. Meeting Minutes: 1. Include column to indicate who is required to take action and date action is to oe completed. Each of these items requiring action will be carried in subsequent minutes of meeting as"old business" until noted as"resolved." 2. As minimum,separate into following categories: a. Old business. b. New business. c. Work progress. d. Deficiencies. e. RFIs. f. Proposed changes. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 9 g. Schedules. h. Submittals. i. Other business,including events to be accomplished by next meeting. j. "Look ahead"schedule. 1.13 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. Schedule pre-installation conferences required in individual Specification sections. Convene at Project site prior to commencing Work of the section. B. Attendees: 3. Project superintendent;presides over meeting and is responsible for minutes. 4. Subcontractor(installer,applicator,or erector). 5. Material or equipment supplier. 6. Manufacturers'representative. 7. Others directly affecting,or affected by the work. 8. Testing agency(if necessary). 9. Subcontractors,as appropriate. 10. Owner,Architect,and professional consultants may attend as appropriate. 11. Others as appropriate to agenda. C. Notify Architect and Owner minimum four(4)working days in advance of meeting date. D. Minimum Agenda: 12. Access to work and conditions of proper installation. 13. Conditions of installation, such as substrates, existing and surrounding conditions, and environmental conditions. 14. Conditions detrimental to installation. 15. Preparation procedures,including protection of adjacent work. 16. Verify installers' receipt and understanding of installation instructions. 17. Review submittals,installation procedures,and sequence. 18. Review coordination with other work. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100- 10 19. Evaluate delivery schedule and Construction Progress Schedule. 20. Observe sample installation. 21. Required protection procedures. 22. Change order proceures. 23. Safety. 24. Inspection and testing. 25. Required performance results. 26. Recording requirements. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related work. 1.14 CLOSEOUT CONFERENCE A. Schedule Project Closeout conference prior to requesting Substantial Completion. B. Attendees: 27. Contractor; presides over meeting and is responsible for minutes. 28. Major subcontractors. 29. Owner, Architect,and professional consultants may attend as appropriate. 30. Others as appropriate to agenda. C. Minimum Agenda: 31. Start-up of facilities and systems. 32. Testing,adjusting,and balancing. 33. System demonstration and observation. 34. Operation and maintenance instructions for the owner's personnel. 35. Contractor's inspection of work. 36. Contractor's preparation of an initial "punch list." 37. Procedure to request Architect and Owner inspection to determine date of substantial completion. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 11 38. Completion time for correcting deficiencies. 39. Inspections by authorities having jurisdiction. 40. Certificate of occupancy and transfer of insurance responsibilities. 41. Partial release of retainage. 42. Preparation for final inspection. 43. Closeout submittals: a. Project Record Documents. b. Operating and maintenance documents. c. Operating and maintenance materials. d. Warranties and bonds. e. Affidavits. 44. Final application for payment. 45. Final cleaning. 46. Contractor's demobilization of site. 47. Maintenance. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Applicable) -END OFSECTION 013100- PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00- 12 SECTION 01 32 00-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following: 1. Procedures for preparation and submittal of construction progress schedules and periodical updating B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 1100,Summary of Work. 2. Section 0133 00,Submittals. 1.3 SCHEDULES A. Format 1. Contractor shall prepare and submit a Critical Path Construction Schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents and shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Contractor shall prosecute the work as required to start and complete each phase of the work on or before the dates stated. 2. Should actual construction of project vary from the schedule, Contractor shall take whatever actions are necessary to improve progress as quickly as possible in order to meet predetermined milestones. Revise and re-submit schedule when the actual schedule is ahead or behind by more than 14 calendar days. The schedule will be reviewed monthly by the Architect's and Owner's representative. 3. Sequence of Listings:The chronological order of the start of each item of work. 4. Scale and Spacing: To provide space for notations and revisions. 5. Sheet Size: Minimum 11 x 17 inches. B. Content 1. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of each element of construction. 2. Identify each item by major Specification section number. 3. Identify work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. 4. Provide sub-schedules to define critical portions of entire schedule. 5. Show delivery dates for Owner furnished products. CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 0132 00- 1 C. Revisions 1. Indicate progress of each activity to date of submittal, and projected completion data of each activity. 2. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in scope, and other identifiable changes. 3. Provide report to define problem areas, anticipated delays, and impact on Schedule. Report corrective action taken,or proposed,and its effect. D. Distribution 1. Distribute copies of reviewed Schedules to Owner, Architect, subcontractors, suppliers, and other concerned entities. 2. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in Schedules. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Progress Schedules: 1. Submit initial Schedules within 14 calendar days from Notice to Proceed. After review, resubmit required revised data within 7 calendar days. 2. Submit revised Progress Schedules with each Application for Payment. 3. Submit the number of opaque reproductions which Contractor requires, plus 1 copy retained by Architect and 1 copy retained by Owner. B. Construction Photographs: 1. Deliver prints with each Application for Payment. 2. Digital images on CD of all construction photographs shall be delivered with the Project Record Documents as stated in Paragraph 1.4 C above. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Applicable) -END OFSECTION 013200- CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 32 00- 2 SECTION 0133 00-SUBMITTALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of the Work, including; 1. Submittal procedures. 2. Construction reports. 3. Recording Contract Document Changes. 4. Shop Drawings. 5. Product Data. 6. Samples. B. Administrative Submittals: Refer to other Division 01 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for payment. 3. Insurance certificates. 4. List of Subcontractors. C. The construction schedule is included in Section "Construction Progress Documentation". D. The Schedule of Values submittal is included in Section "Payment Procedures." E. Inspection and test reports are included in Section "Testing Laboratory Services." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Shop Drawings: Include drawings, diagrams,schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by Contractor or a subcontractor,sub-subcontractor, manufacturer,supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. B. Product Data: Include illustrations,standard schedules, performance charts, instructions,brochures,diagrams,test data and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate material, product or system for some portion of the Work. C. Samples: Physical examples illustrating materials,equipment or workmanship to establish standards by which the Work will be judged. Samples include field samples. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 1 D. Quality Control Submittals:Pertain to quality control and Owner information which do not require review and approval by Architect and are to be retained for project file only. If reviewed,project information will be reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents only. The review will not constitute a detailed review of adequacy of submitted design calculations. The appropriateness and accuracy of calculations is the responsibility of the submitting Contractor (and Contractor's Professional Engineer when such calculations are required to be professionally sealed). Examples of quality control submittals: 1. Design data and calculations. 2. Test reports. 3. Certifications. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 5. Manufacturer's field reports. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Pertain to contract closeout related information which do not require review and approval by the Architect and are to be retained for project file only. Examples of contract closeout submittals: 1. Project record information. 2. Warranties. 3. Operation and maintenence data. 4. Owner instruction reports. F. Administrative Submittals: Refer to General and Special Conditions for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include, but are not limited to: 1. Permits. 2. Applications for payment. 3. Insurance certificates. 4. List of Subcontractors. 5. Schedule of Values. G. Field Samples are full-size physical examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes, coatings, or finish materials. Field samples are used to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. H. Mockups are full-size assemblies for review of construction,coordination, testing,or operation;they are not Samples. Portable Document Format(PDF):An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed- layout document format. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 2 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication,purchasing,testing,delivery,other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity,including content of prior submittals (with revisions)and any field changes reflected. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. The Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. B. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed as a result of the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Internal Review: Allow up to fourteen (14) calendar days for review. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. 2. Concurrent Review: When concurrent review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow up to fourteen (14) calendar days for initial review of each submittal. 3. Direct Transmittal to Consultant:Where approved in advance by Architect,submittals may be transmitted directly to Architect's consultants,provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Architect. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. Allow a minimum of ten(10)calendar days for consultant review. 4. Allow up to fourteen (14)calendar days for processing each re-submittal. S. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing. 6. Contractor shall maintain in field office a copy of submittal schedule and log of submittals indicating status of each item. C. Preparation: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. 1. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken. a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 3 g. Unique identifier, including revision number. h. Name and address of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. 2. Provide on the label or beside the title block on the submittal a place to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and the action taken. a. The Contractor's review markings must include the following information: "This shop drawing has been reviewed by[Name of Contractor]and approved with respect to the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incidental thereto. [Name of Contractor]also warrants that this shop drawing complies with contract documents and comprises no variations thereto." b. SUBMITTALS WITH NO REMARKS OR NOTATIONS MADE BY THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RETURNED AS NOT SATISFYING CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW REQUIREMENT. D. Deviations: Highlight,encircle,or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. E. Hardcopy Submittal Transmittal: Assemble complete submittal package incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section with a transmittal form. Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action. 1. Transmittal Form: Provide a transmittal form for each submittal including the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source(From:). e. Names of subcontractor,manufacturer,and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Remarks. i. Signature of transmitter. F. Architect's Digital Data Files:One set of electronic digital data files of the architectural portion of the Contract Drawings (A-x sheets) can be provided by CD, DVD, for the Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 4 2. Digital Drawing Software Program:The digital data drawing files are available in the latest version of Revit or AutoCAD (depending on which was used by the Architect to produce the project). Digital data drawing files will not be converted to another software format. 3. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Architect's Drawing Release Form (attached at the end of this Section). 4. For digital data drawing files pertaining to disciplines other than architectual drawings, Contractor will need to contact each discipline individually. Each discipline may have their own requirements in regards to file format, licensing agreement, and cost for such drawings. 1.5 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare daily construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copies to the Architect at monthly intervals with Applications for Payment: 1. List of subcontractors at the site. 2. Approximate count of personnel at the site. 3. High and low temperatures,general weather conditions. 4. Accidents and unusual events. 5. Meetings and significant decisions. 6. Stoppages,delays,shortages,losses. 7. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 8. Change Orders received, implemented. 9. Services connected,disconnected. 10. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 1.6 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION REPORTS A. Prepare Owners monthly construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site; and submit duplicate copy to the Architect at monthly intervals with Applications for Payment: 1. Accidents and unusual events. 2. Meetings and significant decisions. 3. Stoppages,delays,shortages,losses. 4. Orders and requests of governing authorities. 5. Change Orders received, implemented. 6. Services connected,disconnected. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 5 7. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. 8. Construction Photos. 1.7 RECORDING CONTRACT DOCUMENT CHANGES A. Contract Drawings/Shop Drawings: Furnish and maintain, at the jobsite, a clean, undamaged set of xerographic Contract Drawings and one set of xerographic prints of Shop Drawings. Mark each to show the actual installed conditions where the installation varies from the work as originally shown. Mark whichever document is most capable of showing conditions fully and accurately;where Shop Drawings are used,record a cross-reference at the corresponding location on the Contract Drawings.Give particular attention to concealed elements that would be difficult to measure and record at a later date. B. BIM/CAD for Shop Drawings: Digital CAD files are to be maintained throughout the life of the project and updated when any installation varies from the original contract drawings or shop drawings. No"redlines"or"markups"will be necessary within the CAD files as information will be changed within the CAD file itself to reflect any variation.At the completion of the project,final CAD files broken out by floor will be submitted. 1. Final CAD files are defined as digital files in .dwg format in which information has been changed to reflect any and all variation that occurred during construction. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Submit newly prepared information, drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not considered Shop Drawings. B. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, schedules, patterns,templates and similar drawings.Do not use Shop Drawings without an appropriate final stamp indicating action taken in connection with construction.Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. 2. Identification of products and materials included. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Fabrication and installation drawings. 5. Rough-in and setting diagrams. 6. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring,including power,signal,and control wiring. 7. Design calculations. 8. Notation of coordination requirements. 9. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 6 C. Hardcopy Submittals: Unless directed otherwise, submit a minimum of five copies of all shop drawings to Architect or Consultant and concurrently one copy to Owner. D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed PDF file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item within the submittal. 2. Name file with submittal number, including revision identifier when applicable. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Electronic Submittal Limitations: Submittals must meet the requirements below to be accepted electronically.Submittals not meeting these requirements must be submitted in hardcopy format(refer to Paragraph 1.9 C).NOTE:Electronic submittals not meeting these requirements will automatically be rejected. a. Page Size: No larger than 8.5"x 11". Drawing sheet sizes 11"x 17"and larger are not permitted. b. Page Count: No more than 50 pages(single sided). c. Quality: Submittals must be clearly ledgible. Poor quality scans will be rejected. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA A. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use,submit as"Shop Drawings." 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes information on several products,some of which are not required, mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. b. Compliance with recognized trade association and testing agency standards. c. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. d. Notation of Coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has been confirmed. SUBMITTALS 0133 00- 7 3. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittal to installers, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers,fabricators,and others required for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. a. Do not proceed with installation until an applicable copy of Product Data applicable is in the installer's possession. b. Do not permit use of unmarked copies of Product Data in connection with construction. B. Unless directed otherwise, submit a minimum of five copies of all product data to Architect or Consultant and concurrently one copy to Owner. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials, color range sets, and actual swatches showing color,texture and pattern. 1. Mount, display, or package Samples in the manner to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Include the following: a. Generic description of the Sample. b. Sample source. c. Product name or name of manufacturer. d. Compliance with recognized standards. e. Availability and delivery time. 2. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture, for a final check of these characteristics with other elements,and for a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. a. Where variation in color, pattern,texture or other characteristics are inherent in the material or product represented, submit multiple units (not less than 3), that show approximate limits of the variations. b. Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements for Samples that illustrate workmanship,fabrication techniques,details of assembly,connections,operation and similar construction characteristics. c. Regarding Samples to be returned to the Contractor for incorporation in the Work: Such Samples must be undamaged at time of use. On the transmittal, indicate special requests regarding disposition of Sample submittals. 3. Submittals: Except for Samples illustrating assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation and similar characteristics, submit 2 sets; one will be returned marked with the action taken. 4. Maintain sets of Samples, as returned, at the Project site, for quality comparisons throughout the course of construction. SUBMITTALS 0133 00- 8 B. Distribution of Samples: Prepare and distribute additional sets to subcontractors, manufacturers, fabricators, suppliers, installers, and others as required for performance of the Work. 1. Field Samples specified in individual Sections are special types of Samples. Field Samples are full-size examples erected on site to illustrate finishes,coatings,or finish materials and to establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1.11 ARCHITECT AND ENGINEER REVIEW A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and return promptly. 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility. B. Do not make "Mass" submittals (6 or more submittals) to Architect at one time. If Mass submittals are received, Architect's review time stated above will be extended as necessary to perform proper review. Architect will review Mass submittals based upon priority determined by Architect after consultation with Owner and Contractor. C. Informational submittals and other similar data are for Architect's information and do not require Architect's responsive action. D. Architect's review and approval of submittals does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for deviations from Contract Document requirements, unless Architect is informed in writing of deviations and approval is received in writing from Architect for such deviation. E. Architect's review and acceptance of submittals does not indicate acceptance of changes in Contract time or cost. F. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by Contract Documents may be returned without action. G. Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action stamp. The stamp will be appropriately marked,as follows,to indicate the action taken: 1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where submittals are marked "Approved," that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of the Contract Documents;final acceptance will depend upon that compliance. 2. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked "Furnish as Corrected,"that part of the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections on the submittal and requirements of the Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that compliance. 3. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittal is marked "Rejected, Revise and Submit," do not proceed with that part of the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication,delivery, or other activity. Revise or prepare a new submittal in accordance with the notations; resubmit without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain a different action mark. SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 9 a. Do not permit submittals marked "Rejected, Revise and Submit" to be used at the Project site,or elsewhere where Work is in progress. 4. Other Action: Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes,special processing or other activity,the submittal will be returned, marked"Action Not Required". 1.12 INCOMPLETE AND PARTIAL SUBMITTALS A. Incomplete Submittal: Submittal not complying with specified submittal requirements. B. Partial Submittal: Submittal subdivided into components as indicated in submittal schedule and each component submitted separately, including content of prior submittals(with revisions) and any field changes reflected. C. Architect will not review incomplete submittals. Complete submittals for each item are required. Submittal will not be considered official until it is complete in every respect. Delays resulting from incomplete submittals are not responsibility of Architect. 1.13 RE-SUBMITTALS A. Make re-submittal under procedures specified for initial submittals;identify changes made since previous submittal. B. Architect will record time required to review re-submittals after original submittal and first re- submittal. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for charges of Architect and Architect's consultants for reviewing submittal more than 2 times. 1.14 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria:Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents,provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required,submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Submittals: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data,and other required submittals,submit five copies of a statement,signed and sealed by the responsible design professional,for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents.Include list of codes, loads,and other factors used in performing these services. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable). PART 3-EXECUTION(Not Applicable). -END OFSECTION 013300- SUBMITTALS 01 33 00- 10 SECTION 0140 00-TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. A qualified independent testing laboratory and/or geotechnical engineering service, selected and paid by Owner and approved by Architect,will perform professional testing and laboratory services specified herein. B. Inspecting agency shall make and perform all inspections and tests in accordance with the rules and regulations of Building Code, local authorities, Specifications of ASTM, and these Contract Documents. C. Materials and workmanship not meeting required standards or performance obligations are to be removed and replaced. Replacement and subsequent testing shall be at Contractors expense. D. Where terms"Inspector"and"Laboratory"are used,they mean and refer to an officially designated and accredited inspector of testing laboratory or geotechnical service engaged by Owner. E. Testing,inspection,and certifications specified in other sections of these Specifications shall be paid by Contractor,unless otherwise indicated,and shall be by agencies approved by Architect. F. Laboratory inspection shall not relieve Contractor or fabricator of his responsibility to furnish materials and workmanship in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.2 QUALIFICATIONS A. Testing agencies shall meet requirements of ASTM E 329,"Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete,Steel and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction"and ASTM E 543,"Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies." B. Testing agencies shall be insured against errors and omissions by a professional liability insurance policy having a limit of liability not less than$1,000,000.00. C. Inspection and testing services of testing agency shall be under the direction of an Engineer licensed in the State of Texas,charged with engineering managerial responsibility and having at least 10 years engineering experience in inspection and testing of construction materials.Reports shall bear the seal of said engineer. D. Inspecting personnel monitoring concrete work shall be ACI certified inspectors. E. Primary inspectors performing structural steel inspection shall be currently certified AWS Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI), in accordance with provisions of AWS QCI, "Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors." Inspector may be supported by assistant inspectors who may perform specific inspection functions under supervision of the inspector. Assistant inspectors shall be currently certified AWS Certified Associate Welding Inspectors(CAWI). Work of assistant inspectors shall be regularly monitored by the inspector,generally on a daily basis. 1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR A. See respective technical sections for specific requirements. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-1 B. Deliver to the laboratory,without cost to Owner,adequate quantities of representative samples of materials proposed for use which are required to be tested. C. Advise laboratory and Architect sufficiently in advance of construction operations to allow laboratory to complete any required checks or tests and to assign personnel for field inspection and testing as specified. D. Provide adequate facilities for safe storage and proper curing of concrete test samples on project site for the first 24 hours and also for subsequent field curing,as required by ASTM C 31. E. Furnish such nominal labor and equipment as is required to assist laboratory personnel in obtaining and handling samples at the site and in accessing work for inspection. F. Furnish concrete mix designs, in accordance with ACI 301, Section 3.9, made by an independent testing laboratory or qualified concrete supplier. Where mix designs by an independent testing laboratory are required,laboratory shall be selected and paid by Contractor. G. Obtain required inspections or approvals of Building Official. All inspection requests and notifications required by Building Code are responsibility of Contractor. H. Provide welder certifications for each welder to be employed,no more than two years older than the date of submission. Schedule fabrication/erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6. J. Prequalification of all welding procedures to be used in executing the work. 1.4 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF LABORATORY PERSONNEL A. A representative of testing laboratory, who has reviewed and is familiar with the project and specifications, shall participate in all preconstruction conferences. He shall coordinate material testing and inspection requirements with Contractor and his subcontractors consistent with planned construction schedule. Laboratory representative shall attend,throughout the course of the project, such conferences as may be required or requested to address quality control issues. B. Laboratory personnel shall inspect and/or test materials,assemblies,specimens,and work performed including design mixes,methods, and techniques and report to Architect progress thereof. C. If material furnished and/or work performed fails to meet requirements of Contract Documents, laboratory inspector shall promptly notify both Contractor and Architect of such failure. D. Laboratory technicians do not act as foremen,or perform other duties for Contractor. Work will be checked as it progresses,but failure to detect any defective work or materials shall not, in any way, prevent later rejection when such defect is discovered. E. Laboratory inspector is not authorized to revoke,alter,relax,enlarge,or release any requirement of the Contract Documents or to approve or accept any portion of work,except where such approval is specifically called for in Specifications. F. Comply with all Building Code requirements for"Special Inspection"whether or not such inspections are specified herein. 1.5 SUBMITTALS TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-2 A. Submit Copies of Reports of Each and Every Inspection and Test as Follows: Owner-1,Contractor-2, Architect-1 and Engineer-1. B. State in report all details of each inspection and test. Indicate compliance or noncompliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Also state in report any and all unsatisfactory conditions. C. In addition to furnishing a written report,notify Contractor verbally of any uncorrected conditions or failures to comply with requirements of Contract Documents and immediately Fax corresponding report to Architect and Engineer. D. At completion of each trade or branch of work requiring inspecting and testing, submit a final certificate attesting to satisfactory completion of work and full compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Submit copies of test results, sealed by a Licensed Engineer, to municipal authorities having jurisdiction,as required. 1.6 REFERENCED STANDARDS A. Latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this Section shall apply,unless noted otherwise. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and a referenced standard, Contract Documents shall govern. In case of conflict between these Contract Documents and the Building Code,the more stringent shall govern. PART 2-PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PIER DRILLING OPERATION A. A representative of the Owner's geotechnical consultant shall provide services herein specified. B. Laboratory Representative Shall Make Continuous Inspections of Drilled Pier Construction to Check the Following: 1. Verify soundness of bearing stratum and desired penetration. 2. Verify pier dimensions and reinforcing used. 3. Monitor condition of hole and removal of water and loose material from bottom. Verify cleanliness/preparation of sides to develop skin friction. 4. Verify compliance with specified time limit regarding how long holes are permitted to stand open,exposed to air,before placing concrete. 5. Monitor placement of concrete and use of tremie or pumps. 6. Monitor the installation of and extraction of casing, if used. C. Laboratory shall furnish complete pier log showing diameter,top and bottom elevations of each pier, casing required or not required,bell size,actual penetration into bearing stratum,elevation of top of bearing stratum,volume of concrete used,and deviations from specified tolerances. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-3 D. Request probe holes when deemed necessary to confirm safe bearing capacity. 3.1 FILLING AND BACKFILLING A. A qualified geotechnical service shall perform testing and inspection specified herein. B. Contractor shall make available to laboratory, free of charge, adequate samples of each fill and backfill material from proposed sources of supply. C. A 50 pound sample of each type of off-site and site-excavated material proposed for use shall be given to testing agency by Contractor not less than 10 calendar days prior to start of specified work. Analyze samples as required to provide a soil description and to determine compliance with gradation and quality requirements,and test as follows: 1. Tests for liquid limit of soils in accordance with ASTM D 423. 2. Tests for plastic limit of soils and plasticity index of soils in accordance with ASTM D 424. 3. Tests for moisture/density relations of soil in accordance with ASTM D 698 or D 1557, as applicable. D. Furnish a report for each individual test,describing variances from specified requirements and state whether material is acceptable for intended use. E. Inspect underslab drainage material and placement for compliance with specified gradation,quality, and compaction. F. Inspect excavated subgrade and identify to Contractor any remaining unsuitable material which must be removed, and any soft areas which must be recompacted. G. Inspect and test prepared subgrade after initial rolling and compaction of scarified surface,before the placement of any fill. H. Make in-place compaction test for moisture content and density relations,and density of materials-in-place to determine that backfill and fill materials have been compacted to specified density. Tests shall be made at the following frequencies: 1. 1 test for each 5000 square feet of area of each lift placed under building or floor slab. Stagger test locations in each lift from those in previous lift. A minimum of 3 tests will be required of each lift. 2. 1 test for each 100 linear feet, or portion thereof, of each lift placed against foundation walls,with locations staggered as above. 3. 1 test of each lift placed below any isolated footing or similar support and every 100 linear feet under continuous footings,with locations taken on a different side in each case,from the lift below. Reports may be combined on a daily basis, if desired, provided that location of each test and applicable lift are clearly identified and any problems are detailed. 3.1 REINFORCING STEEL MECHANICAL SPLICES A. Visually inspect and report on completed condition of each mechanical splice of reinforcing steel. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-4 B. Each mechanical splice shall be visually inspected to ensure compliance with I.C.B.O. Reports and manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices. C. Special emphasis shall be placed on inspection of end preparation of each bar to be spliced, as required by I.C.B.O. Report. D. Submit copies of manufacturer's published criteria for acceptable completed splices prior to observing mechanical splices. E. Reports on each mechanical splice shall indicate location,size of bars,and acceptability or rejection of splice. Reasons for rejection shall be shown on each report. 3.2 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL AND EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES A. Inspect all concrete reinforcing steel prior to placing of concrete for compliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings. All instances of noncompliance with Contract Documents and approved shop drawings shall be immediately brought to Contractor attention for correction and then,if uncorrected,reported to Architect. B. Observe and Report on the Following: 1. Number and size of bars. 2. Bending and lengths of bars. 3. Splicing. 4. Clearance to forms including chair heights. 5. Clearance to sides and bottom of trench if soil-formed. 6. Clearance between bars or spacing. 7. Rust,form oil,and other contamination. 8. Grade of steel. 9. Securing,tying,and chairing of bars. 10. Excessive congestion of reinforcing steel. 11. Installation of anchor bolts and placement of concrete around such bolts. 12. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies,including visual inspection of all welds. 13. Visually inspect studs and deformed bar anchors on embedded assemblies for compliance with Contract Documents. Check number,spacing and weld quality. If,after welding,visual inspection reveals that a sound weld or a full 360° fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud or bar, such stud or bar shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15° off perpendicular and then bent back into position. Anchors failing this test shall be replaced. 14. Position, profile, anchorage,and condition of tendons. 15. Tendon elongation. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-5 C. Provide a qualified, experienced inspector to inspect reinforcing steel. Inspector shall have a minimum of 10 years experience inspecting reinforcing steel in projects of similar size. 3.1 CONCRETE INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Receive and evaluate all proposed concrete mix designs submitted by Contractor. If mix designs comply with Drawings and Specifications, laboratory shall submit a letter to Architect certifying compliance. Mix designs not complying with Drawings and Specifications shall be returned by laboratory as unacceptable. B. Secure composite samples of concrete at the jobsite in accordance with ASTM C 172. C. Mold and cure 3 specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C 31. Supervise curing and protection provided (by others) for test specimens in field, and transportation from field to laboratory. Test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then be carefully transported to laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C 31. D. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 39. 2 specimens(also make one spare specimen)shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information. E. Make 1 strength test(4 cylinders)for each 100 cubic yards,or fraction thereof,of each mix design of concrete placed in any 1 day. F. Make 1 slump test for each set of cylinders following procedural requirements of ASTM C 143 and C 172. Make additional slump tests whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary. Do not permit placement of concrete having a measured slump outside limits given on Drawings, except when approved by Architect. Slump tests corresponding to samples from which strength tests are made shall be reported with strength test results. Other slump tests need not be reported. G. Determine total air content of air entrained normal-weight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C 231. H. Determine air content and unit weight of lightweight concrete sample for each strength test in accordance with ASTM C 173 and C 567. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. J. Testing agency shall furnish and maintain a competent inspector at mixing plant at start of each day's mixing. Inspector shall examine concrete materials for compliance with Specifications and approved mix design, weighing and measuring devices, proportioning and mixing of materials, water and cement content of each batch,general operation of plant,and transportation of concrete to jobsite. Inspector shall verify amount of free surface moisture contained in fine and coarse aggregate has been properly accounted for in concrete mixing to achieve required consistency and water cement ratio. K. Testing laboratory shall monitor addition of water to concrete at jobsite and length of time concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. Inspector shall compare mixture with criteria on approved mix design and report any significant deviation to Architect, Contractor and concrete supplier. Do not permit addition of water which will exceed maximum water/cement ratio for the mix as given on approved mix design. L. Observe placing of all concrete except sitework. Observe and report on placing method, consolidation,cold joints,length of drop,and displacement of reinforcement. Report deficiencies to Contractor immediately for corrective action. Inspections may be reduced to a periodic basis when all procedures have been deemed satisfactory by laboratory. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01 40 00-6 M. Testing laboratory shall certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered(or placed), amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate was dispensed into truck,and time at which concrete was discharged from truck. N. Evaluation and Acceptance: 1. If measured slump,or air content of air entrained concrete,falls outside specified limits a check test shall be made immediately on another portion of same sample. In the event of a second failure, concrete shall be considered to have failed to meet requirements of the specifications,and shall not be used in structure. 2. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results are equal to, or exceed, specified strength and no individual test result(average of 2 cylinders)is below specified strength by more than 500 psi. 0. Concrete Test Reports: 1. Reports shall be made and distributed immediately after respective tests or inspections are made. 2. Where reports indicate deviations from Contract Documents, they shall also include a determination of probable cause of deviation and,where applicable,a recommendation for corrective action. 3. Whenever testing laboratory recognizes a trend of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons,conditions of curing,or other cause,this shall be brought to Architects attention,along with a recommendation for corrective action to be taken before materials fall below requirements of Specifications. P. Comply with ACI 311, "Guide For Concrete Inspection"and"ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection"(SP-2). Q. Inspect application of curing compound and monitor all curing conditions to assure compiance with specification requirements. Report curing deficiencies to Contractor immediately and submit a written report to Architect. 3.1 TESTING NON-SHRINK GROUT A. Make 1 strength test for every 10 base plates grouted and for every 10 bags of grout used in joints between members. B. Each test shall consist of 4 cubes, 2 to be tested at 7 days and 2 at 28 days, made and tested in accordance with ASTM C 109,with the exception that grout shall be restrained from expansion by a top plate. 3.2 EPDXY MORTAR A. Receive and evaluate all proposed epoxy mortar mix designs submitted by Contractor. If mix designs comply with Drawings,Specifications,and manufacturer's recommendations,laboratory shall submit a letter to Architect certifying compliance. Mix designs not in compliance shall be returned by laboratory as unacceptable. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-7 B. Make 1 strength test for every 10 epoxy mortar applications. No less than 1 test of each day's production shall be made. C. Each test shall consist of 4 cubes,2 to be tested at 7 days,and 2 to be tested at 28 days,made and tested in accordance with ASTM C 109. 3.3 PRESSURE INJECTED EPDXY ADHESIVE A. Obtain and test one core sample in accordance with ASTM C 42,for every 100 linear feet of epoxy injection. Each sample shall be taken so that repaired crack bisects the core. Adequate measures shall be taken to ensure embedded reinforcement is not damaged during coring. 3.4 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Inspect structural steel during fabrication and during and after erection for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. Review and report on fabricator's quality control procedures and capabilities. B. Shop Inspection: 1. Periodic inspection of fabrication process, including welding, to monitor effectiveness of quality control program. Inspection of shop welding to be "verification inspection," in accordance with AWS D1.1,Chapter 6. 2. Ultrasonic testing of all full penetration welds. 3. Examination of installation of shop welded shear studs. 4. Ultrasonic testing of all plates over 1 1/2"thick. C. Field Inspection: 1. Proper erection of all pieces. 2. Proper installation of all bolts, including checking of calibration of impact wrenches used with high-strength bolts. 3. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing. 4. Proper painting and galvanizing. 5. Continuous inspection of welding process for penetration welds and fillet welds largerthan 5/16",and periodic inspection of all other welding while in progress. 6. Visual examination of all completed welds. 7. Ultrasonic testing of all penetration field welds. 8. Installation of field welded shear studs. 9. Inspect all shop fabricated members,upon arrival at jobsite,for member straightness and alignment and for defects incurred during transit and handling. 10. Measure and record camber of all beams upon arrival and before erection for compliance with specified camber. Measure lying flat with web vertical. Members outside specified camber tolerance shall be returned to shop for correction. TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-8 D. Qualifications of Welders: Fabricator and erector shall provide testing laboratory with names 6 welders to be employed on work,along with certification that each welder has passed qualification tests within the last two years, using procedures covered in American Welding Society"Structural Welding Code-Steel,"D1.1, latest edition. Verify all welder qualifications. E. Inspection of Field Welding Shall Include the Following: 1. Visually inspect fillet welds for size,soundness,and proper return around ends. Check for seams,folds, and delaminations. 2. Ultrasonically test all penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E 164. 3. Inspect surfaces to be welded. Surface preparations,fit-up and cleanliness of surface shall be noted. Electrodes shall be checked for size,type and condition. 4. Welding inspector shall be present during alignment and fit-up of members being welded, and shall check for correct surface preparation of root openings, sound weld metal, and proper penetration in root pass. Where weld has not penetrated completely,inspector shall order joint to be chipped down to sound metal,or gouged out,and rewelded. Root passes shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be gouged out and rewelded to 2" beyond each end of crack. 5. Inspector shall check that all welds have been marked with welder's symbol and shall mark welds requiring repairs and shall make a reinspection. Inspector shall maintain a written record of all welds. Work completed and inspected shall receive an identification mark by the inspector. Unacceptable material and work shall be identified by word "reject" or "repair"marked directly on material. 6. Testing agency shall advise Owner and Architect of any shop and/or field conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests and examination by means other than specified. Such further tests and examinations shall be performed as authorized by Owner and Architect. 7. Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1. F. Inspection of Bolted Construction Shall be in Accordance with AISC Specification for Structural Steel Buildings and as Follows: 1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure plies have been brought into snug contact. 2. High strength bolting shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of"Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." 3. For all high strength bolts,unless specifically noted on Drawings to require only"snug-tight" installation, inspector shall observe required jobsite testing and calibration, and shall confirm procedure to be used does provide required tension. He then shall monitor the work to assure tested procedures are routinely followed. 4. For slip-critical connections, inspect contact surfaces for compliance with specifications prior to bolting. G. Inspection of Stud Welding Shall be in Accordance with Section 7.8,of the AWS Structural Welding Code, D1.1, and as Follows: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-9 1. A minimum of 2 shear studs shall be welded at start of each production period in order to determine proper generator, control unit and stud welder setting. These studs shall be capable of being bent 45°from vertical without weld failure. 2. When temperature is below 32° F.,1 stud in each 100 shall be tested after cooling. Studs shall not be welded below 0° F.or when surface is wet with rain or snow. If stud fails in weld,2 new studs shall pass the test before resumption of welding. 3. Visually inspect studs for compliance with Contract Documents. Check number,spacing, and weld quality. If,after welding,visual inspection reveals a sound weld or a full 360°fillet has not been obtained for a particular stud,such stud shall be struck with a hammer and bent 15°off perpendicular in the direction away from missing weld. Studs failing this test shall be replaced. 3.1 POST-CASTING ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Inspect drilling of each hole and installation of each post-casting anchor for compliance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Verify installation torque (if applicable) for each post-casting anchor for compliance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.2 METAL DECK A. Field Inspection Shall Consist of the Following: 1. Checking types,gauges,and finishes for conformance with Contract Documents and shop drawings. 2. Examination for proper erection of all metal deck,including fastenings at supports and side laps,reinforcing of holes,and miscellaneous deck supports. 3. Certification of welders,under AWS D1.3"Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel". 4. Visual inspection of at least 25%of all welds. -END OF SECTION 0140 00- TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 0140 00-10 SECTION 0142 00- REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. Indicated: The term"indicated" refers to graphic representations,notes or schedules on the Drawings,or other Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications,and similar requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" are used, it is to help the reader locate the reference; no limitation on location is intended. C. Directed: Terms such as "directed," "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" mean "directed by the Architect," "requested by the Architect," and similar phrases. D. Approved: The term "approved," where used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the Contractor's submittals,applications,and requests,is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. E. Regulations: The term "Regulations" includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction,as well as rules, conventions,and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. Furnish: The term"furnish"is used to mean"supply and deliver to the Project site,ready for unloading, unpacking,assembly, installation,and similar operations." G. Install: The term "install" is used to describe operations at project site including the actual "unloading, temporary storage, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension,finishing, curing,protecting,cleaning,and similar operations." Fl. Provide: The term "provide" means "to furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use." Installer: An "Installer" is the Contractor or an entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier for performance of a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform. 1. Trades: Use of titles such as "carpentry" is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name. 2. The term experienced,when used with the term installer, means having a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project, being familiar with the special requirements indicated, and having complied with requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. 3. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 0142 00- 1 in those operations. The specialists must be engaged for those activities,and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. J. Project Site is the space available to the Contractor for performance of construction activities, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project. The extent of the Project Site is shown on the Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which the Project is to be built. K. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project Site or elsewhere,and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests. 1.3 SPECIFICATION FORMAT AND CONTENT EXPLANATION A. Specification Format: These Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections based on the Construction Specifications Institute's MasterFormat 2004 Version numbering system. B. Specification Content: This Specification uses certain conventions in the use of language and the intended meaning of certain terms,words,and phrases when used in particular situations or circumstances. These conventions are explained as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in Specifications and other Contract Documents is the abbreviated type. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words that are implied, but not stated shall be interpolated as the sense required. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words interpreted as singular where applicable and the context of the Contract Documents so indicates. 2. Imperative and streamlined language is used generally in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by the Contractor. At certain locations in the text, for clarity,subjective language is used to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by the Contractor, or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall be" shall be included by inference wherever a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Except where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents. C. Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more standards is specified,and the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels. Refer requirements that are different,but apparently equal,and uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 0142 00- 2 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified,or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on the Project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity,the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. E. Abbreviations and Names: Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Specifications or other Contract Documents, they mean the recognized name of the trade association, standards-producing organization,authorities having jurisdiction,or other entity applicable to the context of the text provision. Refer to Gale Research's"Encyclopedia of Associations"or Columbia Books'"National Trade&Professional Associations of the U.S.,"which are available in most libraries. 1.5 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES A. The Architect has contacted authorities having jurisdiction where necessary to obtain information necessary for preparation of Contract Documents. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the Work. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For the Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments,judgments, and similar documents, correspondence, and records established in conjunction with compliance with standards and regulations bearing upon performance of the Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Applicable) -END OFSECTION 014200- REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS 0142 00- 3 SECTION 01 50 00- CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for construction facilities and temporary controls, including temporary utilities,support facilities,and security and protection. B. Temporary utilities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Water service and distribution. 2. Temporary electric power and light. 3. Temporary heat. 4. Ventilation. 5. Telephone service. 6. Sanitary facilities,including drinking water. 7. Storm and sanitary sewer. C. Support facilities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Field offices and storage sheds. 2. Temporary roads and paving. 3. Dewatering facilities and drains. 4. Temporary enclosures. 5. Hoists. 6. Temporary project identification signs and bulletin boards. 7. Waste disposal services. 8. Rodent and pest control. 9. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 D. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Temporary fire protection. 2. Barricades,warning signs,and lights. 3. Temporary construction fencing. 4. Environmental protection. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Building code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Utility company regulations. 4. Police,fire department,and rescue squad rules. 5. Environmental protection regulations. B. Standards: Comply with NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations, and Demolition Operations," ANSI A10 Series standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition," and NECA Electrical Design Library"Temporary Electrical Facilities." 1. Refer to"Guidelines for Bid Conditions for Temporary Job Utilities and Services",prepared jointly by AGC and ASC,for industry recommendations. 2. Electrical Service: Comply with NEMA, NECA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service in compliance with NFPA 70"National Electric Code." C. Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to inspect and test each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA Construction General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is more stringent. C. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage,discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00-1 1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials. D. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-control and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations,and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of the work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Other dust-control measures. 5. Waste management plan. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat in appearance. Operate in a safe and efficient manner. Relocate temporary services and facilities as the Work progresses. Do not overload facilities or permit them to interfere with progress. Take necessary fire-prevention measures. Do not allow hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary conditions,or public nuisances to develop or persist on-site. B. Temporary Construction Fencing: All construction activities shall be confined within temporary construction fences. Such fencing shall be maintained intact and in first class condition at all times,including gates closed and latched. 1.6 SAFETY A. Contractor assumes responsibility for all jobsite safety. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Temporary Construction Fencing: Minimum 6'-0" high chain link, with steel posts and vinyl mesh wind screen (consult Owner on color of wind screen required). Provide latchable and lockable gates constructed of like materials. Exact location and configuration is to be coordinated with Owner and Architect at the preconstruction meeting. C. Poluethylene Sheet: Reinforced, fire-resistive sheet, 10 mils minimum thickness, with flame- spread rating of 15 or less per ASTM E 84. D. Dust Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 3 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide new equipment. If acceptable to the Architect, the Contractor may use undamaged, previously used equipment in serviceable condition. Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Water Hoses: Provide heavy-duty,abrasion-resistant,flexible rubber hoses with pressure rating greater than the maximum pressure of the water distribution system. Provide adjustable shutoff nozzles at hose discharge. C. Electrical Outlets: Provide properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120-Volt plugs into higher voltage outlets. Provide receptacle outlets equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light for connection of power tools and equipment. D. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords. Use hard-service cords where exposed to abrasion and traffic. Provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electric cords if single lengths will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress. Do not exceed safe length-voltage ratio. E. Lamps and Light Fixtures: Provide general service incandescent lamps of wattage required for adequate illumination. Provide guard cages or tempered-glass enclosures where exposed to breakage. Provide exterior fixtures where exposed to moisture. F. Heating Units: Provide temporary heating units that have been tested and labeled by UL, FM, or another recognized trade association related to the type of fuel being consumed. G. Field Offices: Provide prefabricated or mobile units or similar job-built construction with lockable entrances,operable windows,and serviceable finishes. Provide heated and air-conditioned units on foundations adequate for normal loading. Provide unit of sufficient size to accommodate required office personnel at the Project site and all required progress or other standard meetings. H. Temporary Toilet Units: Provide self-contained, single-occupant toilet units of the chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type. Provide units properly vented and fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. I. First Aid Supplies: Comply with governing regulations. J. Fire Extinguishers: Provide hand-carried, portable, UL-rated, Class A fire extinguishers for temporary offices and similar spaces. In other locations, provide hand-carried, portable, UL- rated, Class ABC, dry-chemical extinguishers or a combination of extinguishers of NFPA- recommended classes for the exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. K. Temporary Use of Permanent Heating,Cooling,and Ventilation Systems: 1. The Owner will allow use of permanent systems for construction heating, cooling, and ventilation.After all drywall and masonry work is completed inside the building,and the mechanical and electrical rooms are dry and clean, at the discretion of the Architect's Representative,the Owner may allow the use of permanent systems. Provisions for permanent and temporary power and utilities are the responsibility of the Contractor. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 4 2. Heat,ventilation,and cooling furnished by the permanent systems necessary for the building prior to the Owner's acceptance of responsibility for the permanent systems is defined as temporary HVAC Work. 3. If the use of permanent systems is approved, equipment must be under control with sufficient safeties in place to prevent equipment damage and damage to building,enclosure,or building materials. 4. If the use of permanent systems is approved,provide filters for air handling units as specified in Division 23. Provide additional media sets as required during operation period. S. If the use of permanent systems is approved,clean piping,ductwork,coils,and parts of permanent systems to the satisfaction of the Architect's Representative before placing the permanent systems in operation for use by the Owner. 6. If the use of permanent systems is approved,warranties by the manufacturer and installer of the equipment and system components,when used for either temporary or permanent heating,cooling, or ventilation,shall commence on the Date of Substantial Completion of the Project. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Use qualified personnel for installation of temporary facilities. Locate facilities where they will serve the Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. General: Engage the appropriate local utility company to connect to existing service where required. Where company provides only part of the service, provide the remainder with matching,compatible materials and equipment. Comply with company requirements. 1. Provide adequate capacity at each stage of construction. 2. Use Charges: Cost or use charges for temporary utilities tied into the Owners existing services(electrical power,water,gas,except Contractor's telephone service)shall be paid for by the Owner, but will not be inconvenienced by the Contractor's use. Do not permit wasteful use of utilities. B. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping of sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. 1. Sterilization: Sterilize temporary water piping prior to use. C. Temporary Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof,grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters,transformers, overload-protected disconnects, automatic ground-fault interrupters,and main distribution switch gear as required. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 5 1. Power Distribution System: Install wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage. Where permitted, wiring circuits not exceeding 125 Volts, ac 20 Ampere rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic sheathed cable where overhead and exposed. 3.3 TEMPORARY SERVICES A. Temporary Lighting: When roof deck has been installed, provide temporary lighting with local switching. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that will fulfill security and protection requirements without operating the entire system. Provide temporary lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. B. Temporary Heat: Provide temporary heat required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protection of installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select safe equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce the ambient condition required and minimize consumption of energy. C. Heating Facilities: Except where the Owner authorizes use of the permanent system, provide vented,self-contained, LP-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control. 1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open flame, or salamander heating units is prohibited. D. Temporary Telephones: Provide temporary telephone service throughout the construction period for all personnel engaged in construction activities. The Owner's telephones shall not be used. 1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers. E. Sanitary facilities include temporary toilets,wash facilities,and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for the type, number, location,operation,and maintenance of fixtures and facilities. Install where facilities will best serve the Project's needs. 1. Toilets: Install self-contained toilet units. Shield toilets to ensure privacy. Use of pit- type privies will not be permitted. 2. Drinking-Water Facilities: Provide containerized tap-dispenser, drinking-water units, including paper supply or bottled water. 3. Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Provide covered waste containers for used material. F. Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction,sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of storm water from heavy rains. 3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Locate field offices, storage sheds, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove prior to Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to the Owner. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 6 B. Provide incombustible construction for offices,shops,and sheds located within the construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241. C. Field Offices: Install field offices at locations acceptable to Owner and in accordance with City of Dallas requirements. Keep the office clean and orderly. D. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Install storage and fabrication sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment involved,including temporary utility service. Sheds may be open shelters or fully enclosed spaces within the building or elsewhere on-site. E. Temporary Paving: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paving to support the indicated loading adequately and to withstand exposure to traffic during the construction period. Locate temporary paving for roads, storage areas, and parking where the same permanent facilities will be located. Review proposed modifications to permanent paving with the Architect. F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed,from exposure,foul weather,other construction operations,and similar activities. 1. Where heat is needed and the permanent building enclosure is not complete, provide temporary enclosures where there is no other provision for containment of heat. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. 2. Install tarpaulins securely,with incombustible wood framing and other materials. Close openings of 25 sq.ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. 3. Close openings through floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. 4. Where temporary wood or plywood enclosure exceeds 100 sq.ft.in area, use UL-labeled, fire-retardant-treated material for framing and main sheathing. G. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare project identification and other signs as required by local, state and federal regulations. Install signs to inform the public and persons seeking entrance to the Project. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs. H. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily. Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris. Enforce requirements strictly. Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner or areas outside the construction zone. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet,extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. 3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction,construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 7 4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 5. Protect air-handling equipment. 6. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 1. Traffic Controls:Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement,and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants. K. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Maintain Project site,excavations, and construction free of water. 1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding project or adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities. 2. Remove snow and ice as required to maintain accumulations. 3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction. 3.6 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Except for use of permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from use of temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion, or longer,as requested by the Architect. B. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of the types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers" and NFPA 241"Standard for Safeguarding Construction,Alterations, and Demolition Operations." 1. Locate fire extinguishers where convenient and effective for their intended purpose, but not less than one extinguisher on each floor at or near each usable stairwell. 2. Store combustible materials in containers in fire-safe locations. 3. Maintain unobstructed access to fire extinguishers, fire hydrants, temporary fire- protection facilities, and other access routes for fighting fires. Prohibit smoking in hazardous fire-exposure areas. 4. Provide supervision of welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units,and similar sources of fire ignition. 5. Take every possible precaution to guard against and to eliminate possible fire hazards to prevent damage to the building and adjacent buildings. C. Permanent Fire Protection: At the earliest feasible date in each area of the Project, complete CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 8 installation of the permanent fire-protection facility, including connected services,and place into operation and use. Instruct key personnel on use of facilities. D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erection of structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and the public of the hazard being protected against. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. E. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations,and minimize the possibility that air, waterways, and subsoil might be contaminated or polluted or that other undesirable effects might result. Avoid use of tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noise-making tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near the site. F. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install chain-link enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates. Enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. 1. Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth or driven into suitable soil to a depth required for proper support. 2. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. 3. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys. G. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains. H. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established 3.7 OPERATION,TERMINATION,AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. Limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses to minimize waste and abuse. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage by freezing temperatures and similar elements. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. 2. Protection: Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations. C. Termination and Removal: Unless the Architect requests that it be maintained longer, remove each temporary facility when the need has ended, when replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with the temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,clean exposed surfaces,and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01 50 00- 9 1. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during the construction period including, but not limited to,the following: a. Replace air filters and clean inside of ductwork and housings if required. b. Replace significantly worn parts and parts subject to unusual operating conditions. c. Replace lamps burned out or noticeably dimmed by hours of use. - END OF SECTION 0150 00- CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 0150 00- 10 SECTION 01 60 00 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing the Contractor's selection of products for use in the Project. B. Standards: Refer to Section "Reference Standards and Definitions" for applicability of industry standards to products specified. C. Administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award of the Contract are included under Section"Substitution Procedures." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well recognized meanings in the construction industry. 1. "Products"are items purchased for incorporation in the Work,whether purchased for the Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term"product"includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system,"and terms of similar intent. a. "Named Products"are items identified by manufacturer's product name,including make or model designation, indicated in the manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents. b. "Foreign Products", as distinguished from "domestic products," are items substantially manufactured (50 percent or more of value) outside of the United States and its possessions;or produced or supplied by entities substantially owned (more than 50 percent) by persons who are not citizens of nor living within the United States and its possessions. 2. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed,or installed to form a part of the Work. 3. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated,that requires service connections such as wiring or piping. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind, from a single source. 1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not or cannot produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner,consult with the Architect for a determination of the most important product qualities before proceeding. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00- 1 Qualities may include attributes relating to visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made,select products from sources that produce products that possess these qualities,to the fullest extent possible. B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between two or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected,even if previously selected products were also options. C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products which will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior. 1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where required for observation after installation,on an accessible surface that is not conspicuous. 2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface which is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage,deterioration and loss,including theft. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other losses. 3. Deliver products to the site in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting and installing. 4. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents, and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 6. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00- 2 7. Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover, in a weathertight enclosure,with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.6 INTEGRITY OF FIRE,SOUND,AND WEATHERPROOF ASSEMBLIES A. Spaces formed between fire or sound rated wall,floor, ceiling,or roof assemblies or penetrations through such assemblies by pipe, conduit, ductwork, any other item, or voids provided for possible use of any item shall be caulked, grouted, filled, or otherwise protected in a manner to maintain fire or sound ratings. B. Where openings or penetrations are subject to moisture or weather,seal openings and penetrations with non-shrink grouts and elastomeric sealants intended for specific application. 1. Seal floor penetrations during construction to prevent water from flowing through building. 2. Where safing and batt insulation are used, protect from moisture. Remove damp material and install new material before enclosing. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated,unused at the time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with all accessories, trim, finish, safety guards and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for the intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available,provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. B. Product Selection Procedures: Product selection is governed by the Contract Documents and governing regulations, not by previous Project experience. Procedures governing product selection include the following: 1. Where products or manufacturers are specified by name, accompanied by the term "or equal,"or"or approved equal"comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions"to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 2. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. 3. Performance Specification Requirements: Where Specifications require compliance with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements, and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. General overall performance of a product is implied where the product is specified for a specific application. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature, or by the manufacturer's certification of performance. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00- 3 4. Compliance with Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where the Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards,codes or regulations specified. 5. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and also complies with other specified requirements,comply with provisions of the Contract Documents concerning"substitutions"for selection of a matching product in another product category,or for noncompliance with specified requirements. 6. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "...as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements.The Architect will select the color, pattern and texture from the product line selected. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS: A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work. 1. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. -END OF SECTION 0160 00- MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01 60 00- 4 SECTION 01 72 50- FIELD ENGINEERING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services,including,but not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Land survey work required for layout. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates: Submit a certificate signed by the Land Surveyor or Professional Engineer certifying that the location and elevation of improvements comply with the Contract Documents. B. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of Sections"Submittals" and"Closeout Procedures". 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Texas and acceptable to Owner to perform land surveying services required. B. Employ a Professional Engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State of Texas to perform required engineering services. C. Instrument Operators:Provide certified instrument operators for laying out work and establishing working points. D. Submit evidence of Surveyor's and Professional Engineer's E&O insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate. PART 2 -PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. The Owner will identify existing control points and property line corner stakes. B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points,or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations. FIELD ENGINEERING 01 72 50- 1 2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. D. Existing utilities and equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,storm sewer and water service piping. 3.2 PERFORMANCE A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds,check every major element for line, level and plumb. B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means. C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures,building foundations, column grids and locations,floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical Work. D. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing structures, utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction. -END OF SECTION 01 72 50- FIELD ENGINEERING 0172 50- 2 SECTION 01 73 00- EXECUTION PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Installation of the Work. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Progress cleaning. 6. Starting and adjusting. 7. Protection of installed construction. 8. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Submittals"for submitting surveys. 2. Division 02 Section "Selective Demolition"for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 3. Division 07 Section "Firestopping"for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 5 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. EXECUTION 01 73 00-1 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services and systems will be disrupted. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that will result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements may include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Conveying systems. i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, reduce their capacity to perform as intended, or that will result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water,moisture,or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Equipment supports. e. Piping,ductwork,vessels,and equipment. f. Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding,meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. 1.6 WARRANTY EXECUTION 01 73 00-2 A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities,mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,storm sewer,and water-service piping; underground electrical services,and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION EXECUTION 01 73 00-3 A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility company that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of the Contractor,submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." D. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location,level and plumb,of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,grading,fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures,building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Program Manager.Submit log at project completion for project records. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. EXECUTION 0173 00-4 2. Where space is limited,install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes,ducts,and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels. F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place,accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated,verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time,and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction,and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. 2. Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with the original installer's recommendations. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. EXECUTION 0173 00-5 D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." E. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. F. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing,drilling,breaking,chipping,grinding,and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap,valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. G. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing,closing up,and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections,where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch,and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re-hang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather- tight condition. 6. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar,oils, putty,and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. EXECUTION 01 73 00-6 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Pre-installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre- installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily,including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Provide necessary daily cleaning during construction to maintain premises and adjoining public properties free from construction waste, debris and rubbish,and dust caused by operations. 2. At completion of each day, remove waste materials and rubbish; store tools, equipment, machinery and surplus materials; and clean all sight exposed surfaces. 3. If Contractor fails to clean up each day and at the completion of his Work,the Owner may do so and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor. At his next pay application a deductive change order will be processed and there is no appeal for back charges due to clean up. 4. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 5. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 6. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Cleaning Materials: Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of the surface to be cleaned. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. F. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. EXECUTION 01 73 00-7 G. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. H. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. I. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. 1, Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. K. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,whether completed or in progress,is subject to harmful,dangerous, damaging,or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. L. During Construction: 1. Oversee cleaning and ensure that building(s) and ground(s) are maintained free from accumulations of waste materials and rubbish. 2. Sprinkle dusty debris with water. 3. During progress of Work, clean-up site and access and dispose off waste materials, rubbish and debris at least once every week. 4. Provide dump containers and locate on site for collection of waste materials, rubbish and debris on a daily basis. S. Do not allow waste materials, rubbish and debris to accumulate and become an unsightly or hazardous condition. 6. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from site and legally dispose off at public or private dumping area. 7. Lower waste materials in controlled manner with as few handlings as possible; do not drop or throw materials from heights. 8. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units,and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. EXECUTION 01 73 00-8 3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. E. Remove and replace chipped,scratched,and broken glass or reflective surfaces. -END OFSECTION 017300- EXECUTION 0173 00-9 SECTION 0177 00- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Warranties. 5. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 6. Final cleaning. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion. 2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting Final Completion construction photographs and negatives. 3. Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections. 1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request. 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-1 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits,operating certificates,and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs,property surveys,and similar final record information. 6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools,and similar elements. 11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use,operation,and maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements,including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued. 1. The Architect will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has been substantially completed. 2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final acceptance. 1.4 FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Submit evidence of final,continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-2 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. 1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS(PUNCH LIST) A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize items applying to each space by major element,including categories for ceiling,individual walls,floors,equipment,and building systems. 2. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 1.6 REINSPECTION PROCEDURES A. The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work,including inspection list items from earlier inspections,has been completed,except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect. 1. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance. 2. If necessary,if additional reinspections are required,the architect/engineer will be reimbursed at a rate of$125.00 per hour, including travel time, for all repeated reinspections. The Contractor shall bear all costs related to such, and these costs shall be deducted from those amounts owed the Contractor for the Work. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. B. Record Drawings: Furnish and maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for the duration of Construction. 1. Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints. The maintenance of these documents shall be set forth in Specification Section 0133 00"Submittals". CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-3 a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers,alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. 2. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. C. Record Specifications: Furnish and maintain one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda, contract modifications, and standard contract forms indicated below for the duration of Construction. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. The maintenance of these documents shall be set forth in Specification Section 0133 00"Submittals". 1. General: a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. d. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers,alternate numbers,and similar identification where applicable 2. Standard Contract Forms(reference Section "Schedule of Standard Contract Forms"): a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims,AIA Document G706. b. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens,AIA Document G706A. c. Certificate of Occupancy. d. Health Permit. e. List of subcontractors and major suppliers with addresses and telephone numbers. f. Hazardous Materials Certification Statements. g. Signed letter from Owner for receipt of all extra materials as set forth in the Specifications. D. Record Product Data (Shop Drawings): Furnish and maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal, for the duration of Construction. Mark set to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in the Product Data submittal. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-4 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable. E. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Assemble one complete hard copy and one digital set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: a. Emergency instructions and procedures. b. System,subsystem,and equipment descriptions, including operating standards. c. Operating procedures,including startup,shutdown,seasonal,and weekend operations. d. Description of controls and sequence of operations. e. Piping diagrams. 2. Maintenance Data: a. Manufacturer's information,including list of spare parts. b. Name,address,and telephone number of Installer or supplier. c. Maintenance procedures. d. Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance. e. Maintenance record forms. f. Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-5 g. Copies of maintenance service agreements. B. Digital Set: 1. Organizational Structure a. Table of Contents(TOC) 1) Each section of the TOC will be hyperlinked to the first page of each section in the body of the PDF. b. Floor Plans 1) Each level's overall floor plan will be included in section called "Floor Plans"and will be located directly after TOC. c. Project Warranties d. Substantial Completion Certificates e. Subcontrator Directory f. Completion Lists g. Certificate/Temporary Certificate of Occupancy h. RFIs Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims(AIA G706) j. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens(AIA G706A) k. Consent of Surety Company to Release of Liens(G707) Hazardous Materials Certification Statement(s) m. Signed Receipt from Owner for Backstock Materials n. Submittals 1) All O&M Data are to be broken out by specification section. 2. All Sections mentioned above to be bookmarked in descending order. a. Bookmarked Specification sections to be named "Spec#Spec Title" 1) Example: "22 10 01 Plumbing Specialties" 1.9 RECORD CAD DRAWINGS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-6 A. Record CAD drawings are defined as digital CAD files(in .dwg format)which have been updated to reflect any and all changes that occurred during construction. B. Each file is to be broken out by floor and labeled accordingly. C. Layers within each CAD drawing will be labeled according to the lighting fixture schedule. 1. Example: Light Fixtures"BA"are to be on a layer named "Fixture BA"and each object named "BA". 1. A single.nwd file. 2. Appropriate O&M data linked to the Record BIM model.. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Submittals: Submit written warranties for portions of the Work per the Specifications and General Contractor's one year warranty for materials and workmanship. B. Organize two sets of warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents,and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name,address,and telephone number of Installer. 3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title"WARRANTIES," Project name,and name of Contractor. 1.11 ADDITIONAL ARCHITECTURAL SERVICES A. TAS Inspection Items: If architectural services are required more than 90 calendar days after the date of the TDLR/TAS Inspection Report because of Contractor's delays, the Contractor shall bear all costs related to such delay,and these costs shall be deducted from those amounts owed the Contractor for the Work. B. All Other Items (Punch List Re-Inspections, Closeout Documents Submittals, etc.): If architectural services are required more than 60 calendar days after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work (as indicated on the Certificate of Substantial Completion)because of Contractor's delays,the Contractor shall bear all costs related to such delay, and these costs shall be deducted from those amounts owed the Contractor for the Work. 2 PRODUCTS CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-7 2.1 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. 2. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. 3. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice. 4. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content. B. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module,develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following: 1. System design and operational philosophy. 2. Review of documentation. 3. Operations. 4. Adjustments. 5. Troubleshooting. 6. Maintenance. 7. Repair. 3.2 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-8 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site,yard,and grounds,in areas disturbed by construction activities,including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth,even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery,and surplus material from Project site. e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches,equipment vaults, manholes,attics,and similar spaces. g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable,vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. j. Remove labels that are not permanent. k. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. 1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. I. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition,free of stains,including stains resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers,and grills. CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 0177 00-9 p. Clean ducts,blowers,and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps,globes,and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs,and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile,harmful,or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. -END OF SECTION 0177 00- CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 77 00-10 SECTION 0179 00- DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems,subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems,subsystems,and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. B. Related Sections: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates,times, length of instruction time,and instructors'names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules utilizing manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems,equipment,and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Qualification Data: For instructor. C. Attendance Record: For each training module,submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit one copy within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy,provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date of video recording. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 0179 00-1 2. At completion of training,submit complete training manual(s)for Owner's use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates,times, length of instruction time,and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency,operation,and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system,as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system,equipment, or component: 1. Basis of System Design,Operational Requirements,and Criteria: Include the following: a. System,subsystem,and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following,as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications,and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00-2 f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following,as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system,subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. I. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 0179 00-3 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction,including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.2 INSTRUCTION A. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust,operate,and maintain systems, subsystems,and equipment not part of a system. 1. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 2. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. B. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner through Program Manager with at leastl0 days'advance notice. C. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations, board diagrams,and other visual aids, but not student practice. B. Video Recording Format: Provide high-quality color video recordings with menu navigation in format acceptable to Architect. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to show area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. -END OFSECTION 017900- DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00-4 SECTION 03 31 10-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including Uniform General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes, but is not limited to,the following: 1. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design, placement procedures, and finishes. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Six copies of all product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds,void forms(including PSF supporting weights),and others as requested by Architect. C. One set of reproducibles and three copies of shop drawings for reinforcement, for fabrication, bending,and placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315,"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars,and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. D. Six copies of mix designs for each type of concrete. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes,specifications,and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 318,"Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." 3. ACI 301,"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings." CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Use overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1, MDO grade,Class I. B. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. C. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350 mg/I that will not bond with,stain,or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inch to exposed surface. Provide ties that,when removed,will leave holes not larger than 1-inch diameter in concrete surface. E. Fillets for Chamfers: Rigid plastic of maximum practicable lengths. 2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60,deformed,of domestic manufacture. 1. Bars shall be bent cold in accordance with ACI 318. Heating or bending by makeshift methods are not permitted. 2. Bars having kinks or bends not shown on shop drawings shall not be used. B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain,cold-drawn steel. C. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, Grade 65,welded steel wire fabric, flat sheets. D. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire-bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. For slabs-on-grade or void form, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners(void forms only)where base material will not support chair legs. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,Type I. B. Fly Ash:ASTM C 618,Type C or Type F. C. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exterior exposed surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates containing spalling-causing deleterious substances. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 2 2. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: Gravel or crushed stone. Pit run material is not acceptable. The nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall not be larger than one-fifth (1/5) the narrowest dimensions between sides of forms, one-third (1/3) the depth of slabs, nor three-fourths(3/4) of the minimum clear distance between reinforcing bars or between bars and forms, whichever is least. In columns, the nominal maximum size of the aggregate shall be limited as above but shall not be larger than two-thirds (2/3) of the minimum clear distance between bars. D. Water: Drinkable. E. Admixtures, General: Provide admixtures for concrete that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions. F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures,equal to Master Builders"Micro Air"or"MB-VR." G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, equal to Master Builders "Pozzolith N" or "Polyheed." H. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E, equal to Master Builders "Pozzutec 20." I. Water-Reducing,Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494,Type D,equal to Master Builders"Pozzolith R." J. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C494, Type F or G, equal to Master Builders"Rheobuild"or"Polyheed". 2.4 RELATED MATERIALS A. Slab Joint Forms: 24 gauge screed key joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated include, but are not limited to: a. Burke Concrete Accessories, Inc. b. Superior Concrete Accessories, Inc. B. Void Forms: Corrugated fiberboard laminated with waterproof adhesive and coated with water- resistant compound. 1. Forms shall be of square design;trapezoidal shape not approved. 2. Provide pre-manufactured curve-ended units,"ArcVoid"or"SureRound PierVoid",against tops of drilled piers for tight fit. Cartons shall be capable of sustaining a working load of 150 PSF times the height of pour,in feet,without significant deformation. 3. Topping Sheets:275#PSJ sheets as manufactured by Voidco, Inc. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 3 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap. D. Curing and Hardener Compound: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. "1100-Clear Series",W.R. Meadows, Inc. (building slab). b. "1600-White Series,"W.R. Meadows, Inc. (site paving). E. Underlayment Compound: Free-flowing,self-leveling, pumpable,cement-based compound for applications from one inch thick to feathered edges. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. "K-15,"Ardex, Inc. b. "Thoro Underlayment Self-Leveling,"Thoro System Products. F. Soil Retainers:High-density polyethelene,flexible retainers to prevent migration of backfill under suspended building foundation. Retainer shall extend above and below void form depth as required by manufacturer, have sufficient strength to resist lateral loads applied by soil, and be impact resistant. Retainer shall be capable of being exposed to earth and moisture without deterioration.Approved product,SureRetainer by Motzblock;VoidForm Products,Inc.,(888)803- 8643. G. Floor Sealer: Equal to"Liqui-Hard"floor hardener,as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc. H. Dovetail Slot: Equal to Hohmann &Barnard, Inc.#305, minimum 22 gauge, hot-dip galvanized. I. Vapor Barrier: 31 mil polyvinyl composite vapor retarder,VBC-350 manufactured by Barrier-Bac, Inc. 2.5 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If trial batch method used,use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25%of cement by weight. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 4 B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect. C. Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following properties: 1. Grade Beams/Walls and Slabs on Void Forms:4,000 psi,28-day compressive strength. 2. Piers, Concrete Flatwork and Sidewalks, and Miscellaneous Concrete:3,000 psi, 28-day compressive strength 3. Concrete Site Pavement:3,500 psi,28-day compressive strength. D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials,job conditions,weather,test results,or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in work. 2.6 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) as required for placement and workability. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50°F. C. Use air-entraining admixture in exposed normal weight concrete (concrete site improvements). Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content by volume with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within following limits: 1. 4.5 to 5.5 percent, 1-1/2-inch max.aggregate. 2. 4.5 to 6.0 percent, 1-inch max.aggregate. 3. 5 to 6 percent,3/4-inch max.aggregate. 4. 5.5 to 7.0 percent, 1/2-inch max. aggregate. D. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions. E. Calcium chloride shall not be used. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 5 F. Slump Limits: Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at point of placement,as follows: PLACEMENT SLUMP AIR CONTENT CONCRETE AMBIENT MAXIMUM APPLICATION RANGE RANGE(%) TEMPERATURE TEMPERATU AIR HUMIDITY (IN 1 RANC;F RF RANI;F 101,1 Piers,dry 5-6 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Piers,cased 6-8 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Footings 4-5 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Pier caps 4-5 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Columns 4-6 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Grade beams 4-5 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Walls 4-5 not applicable 50-100 40-100 not applicable Slab-on-void forms 4-5 not applicable 50-100 40-90 40 or above Drainage structures 3-5 3-6 50-100 40-100 not applicable Paving/walks 3-5 3-6 50-100 40-89 40 or above Paving/walks 3-4.5 ** 3-6 50-100 90-95 ** 30 or above Paving/walks 3-4 3-6 50-100 96-100 not applicable **This specification also requires placement to begin by 10:00 AM and completed by Noon. ALL SPECIFIED RANGES ARE MINIMUM-TO- MAXIMUM. 2.7 CONCRETE MIXING A. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in work, indicating project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced. B. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94,working under Alternate No. 2. 1. When air temperature is between 85°F. and 90°F., reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90°F., reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 3.2 FORMS A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 6 B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets, recesses,and the like,for easy removal. D. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips,wood,sawdust,dirt,or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms and bracing before concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. H. Form full height of both sides of grade beams. Ground-forming not acceptable. 3.4 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars,"for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,ice,and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. F. In slabs on grade, place conduit,pipe,etc. under reinforcement. G. Do not place concrete until steel placement has been reviewed by Architect. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 7 H. Employ competent mechanics to maintain reinforcement location while placing concrete. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION OR COLD JOINTS A. Locate and install so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure,and as directed by Architect. B. Joints shall be located at the third point of the span of slabs and beams (unless a beam intersects another beam at this point, in which case the joint shall be offset a distance equal to twice the width of the beam). 3.6 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams,instructions,and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. 3.7 PREPARATION OF FORMED SURFACES A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material; rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.8 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting,and Placing Concrete,"and as herein specified. C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location. D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 8 least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement. F. Cold-Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions,or low temperatures. G. Do not place concrete when air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40°F., during placement or is predicted to be below 32°F.within 24 hours following placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride,salt,and other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. H. Hot-Weather Placing: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete,place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as herein specified. 1. Do not place concrete if temperature is above 100°F. 2. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90°F. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 3. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot,so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 4. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel,and subgrade just before concrete is placed. 5. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity,or other adverse placing conditions,when acceptable to Architect. 3.9 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view in the finish work or concealed by other construction. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form-facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 9 C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: For formed concrete surfaces exposed to view in the finish work. Provide smooth rubbed finish immediately after form removal. 1. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES D. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply nonslip broom finish to floor slab. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. 3.12 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling. B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days. C. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, or by moist curing,as herein specified. D. Provide moisture curing by following methods. 1. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. 2. Use continuous water-fog spray. 3. Cover concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturate cover with water,and keep continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges,with 4-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers. E. Provide curing and sealing compound to exposed concrete as follows: 1. Apply specified curing and sealing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete(within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete. F. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 10 unless otherwise directed. 3.13 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns,and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50°F.for 24 hours after placing concrete,provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members. 3.14 REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork. B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use"patched"forms for exposed concrete surfaces. 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades,unless otherwise shown or directed,after work of other trades is in place. Mix,place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. C. Floor Sealer: Apply approved sealer to all exposed concrete floor surface not scheduled to receive finished floor materials after floor has cured a minimum of 28 days and it has been mechanically cleaned of any curing compounds. Apply materials in coverages and in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. D. Vapor Barrier: Install vapor barrier with "fuzzy" side up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Overlap joints at least 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. Seal all penetrations per manufacturer's instructions. Repair damaged areas by applying patches of vapor retarder, overlapping at least 6 inches,and taping all sides. 3.16 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms,when acceptable to Architect. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts,down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 11 bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. 2. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. B. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1 inch in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve,using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry-pack before bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. C. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for methods using approved epoxy adhesive and mortar. 3.17 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION A. General: The Owner will employ a testing laboratory to perform tests and to submit test reports. B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following,as directed by Architect. C. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94. 1. Slump: ASTM C 143;one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. 2. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method or ASTM C 231, pressure method; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. 3. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C1064,one test hourly when air temperature is 40°F. and below,when 80°F.and above,and each time a set of compression test specimens is made. 4. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cure test specimens are required. 5. Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 75 cu. yds. of each concrete class placed in any one day;one specimen tested at 7 days,two specimens tested at 28 days,and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required. D. Test results will be reported in writing to the Owner,Architect,Structural Engineer,Ready-Mix Producer,and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and materials,compressive breaking strength,and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests. E. Evaluation of Test Results: 1. Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 cylinders from the same sample tested at 28 days. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 12 2. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength and no individual test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi. 3. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready-Mix Producer, and Contractor within 24 hours if tests fail to achieve specified requirements. F. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing service may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified. -END OF SECTION 03 31 10- CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 31 10- 13 SECTION 05 50 00- METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the following metal fabrications: 1. Rough hardware. 2. Bearing and leveling plates. 3. Miscellaneous framing and supports for the following: a. Applications where framing and supports are not specified in other sections. 5. Railings and handrails. 6. Ladders(interior). 7. Steel framed stairs. 8. Miscellaneous steel fabrications. 9. Floor access door. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel"for structural steel framing system components. 2. Division 09 Section "Painting"for finishing of fabricated items. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASTM E 985 for railing related terms apply to this section. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Handrails and Railing Systems: Design, engineer,fabricate,and install handrails and railing systems to comply with requirements of ASTM E 985 for structural performance based on testing performed in accordance with ASTM E 894 and E 935. B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer,fabricate,and install the following metal fabrications to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials involved,including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each respective component of each metal fabrication. 1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied at any point nonconcurrently,vertically downward,or horizontally. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 1 b. Uniform load of 100 lbf per linear ft.applied nonconcurrently,vertically downward or horizontally. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Handrails Not Serving as Top Rails: Capable of withstanding the following loads applied as indicated: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied at any point nonconcurrently,vertically downward or horizontally. b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot applied nonconcurrently,vertically downward or horizontally. c. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to act concurrently. 3. Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf applied to one sq.ft.at any point in the system including panels, intermediate rails balusters,or other elements composing the infill area. a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with uniform horizontal loads on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on guard. C. Structural Performance of Steel Stairs: Engineer,fabricate and install steel stairs to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding the allowable design working stress if the materials involved,including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress in each component of steel stairs. 1. Treads of Steel Stair: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lb per sq.ft.of a concentrated load of 3001b on area of 4 sq. inches located in the center if the tread, whichever produced the greater stress. 2. Platforms of Steel Stairs: Capable of withstanding a uniform load of 100 lb per sq.ft. 3. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from load specified above as well as stresses resulting from railing system loads. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Product data for manufactured items, paint products,and grout. C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 1. Where installed metal fabrications are indicated to comply with certain design loadings, include structural computations, material properties, and other information needed for structural analysis that has been signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer who was responsible for their preparation. D. Samples representative of materials and finished products as may be requested by Architect. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 2 E. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the"Quality Assurance"Article. F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing metal fabrications similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work. B. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code--Steel," AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." 1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and,if pertinent,has undergone recertification. C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful installation of metal fabrications similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. D. Exposed structural steel, steel Tube Railings and Handrails Weld Joint Finish: National Ornamental and Miscellaneous Metal Association(NOMMA), pipe and tube finish#2. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence and coordinate installation of wall handrails as follows: 1. Mount handrails only on completed walls. Do not support handrails temporarily by any means not satisfying structural performance requirements. 2. Mount handrails only on gypsum board assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been clearly marked for benefit of Installer. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 3 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FERROUS METALS A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness, smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,or roughness. B. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: Product type(manufacturing method)and as follows: 1. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. 2. Hot-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight(schedule 40), unless otherwise indicated, or another weight required by structural loads. 1. Black finish,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Galvanized finish where detailed. E. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48,Class 30. F. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47,Grade 32510(ASTM A 47M,Grade 22010). G. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type indicated below, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials capable of sustaining, without failure, the load imposed within a safety factor of 4,as determined by testing per ASTM E 488,conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 (ASTM A 47M) malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as required,hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. H. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for the metal alloy to be welded. I. Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664,selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,compatibility with finish paint systems indicated,and capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel,with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12,except containing no asbestos fibers. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 4 D. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT-P-645. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide plated fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating, for exterior use or where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type,grade,and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts,ASTM A 307, Grade A(ASTM F 568, Property Class 4.6),with hex nuts,ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M),and,where indicated,flat washers. C. Machine Screws: ANSI B18.6.3. D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1(ANSI B18.2.3.8M). E. Wood Screws: Flat head,carbon steel,ANSI B18.6.1. F. Plain Washers: Round,carbon steel,ANSI B18.22.1(ANSI B18.22M). G. Lock Washers: Helical,spring type, carbon steel,ANSI B18.21.1. H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material: Carbon steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633,Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material: Group 1 alloy 304 or 316 stainless-steel bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593(ASTM F 738M)and ASTM F 594(ASTM F 836M). I. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588,tumble-wing type, class and style as required. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications. B. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining,noncorrosive,nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grouts: a. Crystex; L& M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. Masterflow 928 and 713; Master Builders Technologies, Inc. c. Sealtight 588 Grout;W. R. Meadows, Inc. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 5 d. Sonogrout 14;Sonneborn Building Products--ChemRex, Inc. 2.6 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size,thickness, and shapes indicated but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication. B. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. C. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 100 deg F. D. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. E. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. F. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces. G. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. H. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-head (countersunk)screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous. I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. J. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 6 K. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. L. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Furnish bent,or otherwise custom-fabricated, bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels,and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified in Division 6 Sections. B. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required. Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections,and furnish steel washers elsewhere. 2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction,made flat,free from warps or twists,and of the required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural steel framework as required to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is placed. a. Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24 inches o.c. of type required to meet conditions. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL FABRICATIONS A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, bars, expanded metal, of profiles shown with continuously welded joints, and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices wherever possible. B. Provide cutouts,fittings,and anchorages as required to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide anchors, welded to trim, for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. 1. Refer to details on drawings for all miscellaneous steel fabrications. 2.11 STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. General: Fabricate tube railings and handrails to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tubing, post spacings, METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 7 and anchorage, but not less than that required to support structural loads. All railing materials and installation to comply with all provisions of the TAS. B. Interconnect railing and handrail members by butt-welding or welding with internal connectors, at fabricator's option, unless otherwise indicated. 1. At tee and cross intersections, notch ends of intersecting members to fit contour of pipe to which end is joined and weld all around. C. Form changes in direction of railing members as follows: 1. By radius bends of radius indicated. 2. By bending. D. Form simple and compound curves by bending tubing in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross-section of tubing throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of tubeing. E. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails, unless otherwise indicated. F. Close exposed ends of tubing by welding 3/16 inch thick steel plate in place or by use of prefabricated fittings, except where clearance of end of tubing and adjoining wall surface is 1/4 inch or less. G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,and anchors for interconnections of tubing and attachment of railings and handrails to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings and handrails to concrete or masonry work. 1. For railing posts set in concrete,fabricate sleeves from steel tubing not less than 6 inches long and with an inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of post,with steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve. a. Provide friction fit, removable covers designed to keep sleeves clean and hold top edge of sleeve 1/2 inch below finished surface of concrete. H. Fillers: Provide steel sheet or plate fillers of thickness and size indicated or required to support structural loads of handrails where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses. Size fillers to produce adequate bearing to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. I. Interior stainless steel handrails, form from stainless steel tubing with directional No. 4 Satin Finish, provide stainless steel fittings, brackets,fasteners,sleeves,and embedded anchors. 2.12 STEEL FRAMED STAIRS A. General: Construct stairs to conform to sizes and arrangements indicated. Join pieces together by welding, unless otherwise indicated. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing,hangers,columns,railings,newels,balusters,struts,clips,brackets,bearing plates, and other components necessary for the support of stairs and platforms, and as required to anchor and contain the stairs on the supporting structure. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 8 1. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with"Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM "Metal Stair Manual" for class of stair designated, except where more stringent requirements are indicated: a. Architectural class where indicated. B. Stair Framing: Fabricate stringers of structural steel channels, or plates, or a combination thereof, as indicated. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. Construct platforms of structural steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated. Bolt or weld headers to stringers, newels, and framing members to stringers and headers; fabricate and join so that bolts,if used,do not appear on finish surfaces. C. Metal Pan Risers, Subtreads, and Subplatforms: Shape metal pans for risers and subtreads to conform to configuration shown. Provide thicknesses of structural steel sheet for metal pans indicated, but not less than that required, to support total design loading. 1. Form metal pans of uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Directly weld risers and subtreads to stringers; locate welds on side of metal pans to be concealed by concrete fill. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers by means of brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding, riveting or bolting. 4. Provide subplatforms of configuration and construction indicated;if not indicated,of same metal as risers and subtreads,in thicknesses required to support design loading. Attach subplatform to platform framing members with welds. D. Stair Railings and Handrails: Comply with applicable requirements specified elsewhere in this section for steel pipe railings and handrails,and as follows: 1. Railings may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings. 2. Connect railing posts to stair framing by direct welding, unless otherwise indicated. 2.13 STEEL LADDERS A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3. B. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to the rung by a proprietary process. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Mebac, IKG Borden. b. SLIP-NOT,W.S. Molnar Co. 2.15 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designing finishes. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 9 B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing,apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process complying with the following requirements: 5. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. 6. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch (0.76 mm)thick or thicker. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors(SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP 6"Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors(SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3"Power Tool Cleaning." C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA 1 "Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners,crevices, bolts,welds,and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts,sleeves and anchor bolts that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site. B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction. D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 10 Do not weld,cut,or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. E. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent. F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces that will come into contact with grout,concrete, masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. G. Adjust systems prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. 3.3 SETTING LOOSE PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates. B. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed,tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonshrink, metallic grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use nonshrink,nonmetallic grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL PIPE RAILINGS AND HANDRAILS A. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated, or if not indicated, as required by design loadings. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and railing ends to building construction in one of the following methods: 1. Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with the following anchoring material, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. 2. Anchor posts in concrete by core drilling holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch greater than outside diameter of post. Clean holes of all loose material,insert posts and fill annular space between post and concrete with the following anchoring material,mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's directions. a. Anchoring cement. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 11 b. Leave anchorage joint exposed,wipe off surplus anchoring material,and leave 1/8 inch build-up,sloped away from post. For installations exposed on exterior,or to flow of water, seal anchoring material to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. 3. Anchor rail ends into concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored into wall construction with lead expansion shields and bolts. B. Secure handrails to wall with wall brackets and end fittings. Provide bracket with not less than 1-1/2 inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated, or if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building construction as follows: 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or exposed lag bolt, as applicable. 3. For hollow masonry anchorage,use toggle bolts having square heads. 4. For steel framed gypsum board assemblies,fasten brackets directly to wood blocking using screws of size and type required to support structural loads. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR STEEL LADDERS A. Install as detailed on drawings. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR ACCESS DOOR A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a 2.0-mil (0.05-mm)minimum dry film thickness. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. -END OFSECTION 055000- METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 12 SECTION 06 10 53 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rough carpentry work not specified elsewhere and generally intended for support of other work. 2. Wood framing. 3. Miscellaneous blocking,grounds, nailers,and panels. 4. Construction panels for roof deck&wall sheathing. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior trim, millwork, and ornamental elements specially fabricated for this Project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Framing plans with wood specifications listed designed in accordance to the 2015 IBC with 130 MPH wind speeds.Seal &sign plans by a structural engineer. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack material above ground level on uniformly spaced supports to prevent deformation. 1. For material pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle for air circulation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER,GENERAL A. Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20 "American Softwood Lumber Standard"and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC) Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Furnish lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency that indicates grading agency,grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber,furnish pieces marked on ends or back of each piece. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53- 1 C. Sizes: Provide nominal sizes indicated, complying with PS 20 except where actual sizes are specifically noted as being required. D. Surfacing: Dressed lumber,S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED CONDITIONS A. Species: Any wood species listed by PS 20. B. Moisture Content: S-DRY, KD 19 or MC 19(19 percent maximum moisture content). C. Grade: No. 2 or standard grade. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Standards: Comply with requirements of PS 1 Voluntary Product Standard "Construction and Industrial Plywood" for veneer plywood and APA PRP-108 "Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels"for performance-rated panels. 1. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark for grade specified. B. Miscellaneous Concealed Plywood: C-C Plugged Exterior, thickness as indicated but not less than 1/2 inch nominal. C. Electrical/Telephone Backing Panels: B-C Plugged, Exposure 1 plywood panels, fire-retardant treated,thickness as indicated but not less than 3/4 inch nominal. D. Wood Sheathing for walls:Zip Sheathing or approved equal. 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Where miscellaneous carpentry is exposed to weather, in contact with concrete, masonry or ground, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A 153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Wire, Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Bolts: ASTM A 307,Grade A;with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and flat washers. D. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.21. E. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. 2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: All wood, dimension lumber and construction panels, shall be fire-retardant treated. Identify treated wood with appropriate classification marking of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Dimension Lumber: Comply with AWPA C20. a. Treatment Type: Interior Type A. 2. Construction panels: Comply with AWPA C27. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53- 2 a. Treatment Type: Interior Type A. 3. Inspect each piece after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of miscellaneous carpentry and in sizes that would require an excessive number or poor arrangement of joints. B. Cut and fit miscellaneous carpentry accurately. Install members plumb and true to line and level. C. Coat cut edges of preservative-treated wood to comply with AWPA M4. D. Securely fasten miscellaneous carpentry as indicated and according to applicable codes and recognized standards. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. 3.2 WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS,BLOCKING,AND SLEEPERS A. Install where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work,including wall stops for doors, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, millwork, casework, visual display boards, specialties, etc. Install solid blocking between metal framing, cut and shape to required size. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Comply with applicable installation recommendations in APA Form E30 "Design/Construction Guide--Residential&Commercial." B. Space fasteners a minimum of 12" o.c.in field and 8"o.c. along all vertical edges. -END OF SECTION 06 10 53- ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53- 3 SECTION 06 40 20- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood cabinets(casework). 2. Laminate clad cabinets(plastic-covered casework) 3. Cabinet tops(countertops). 4. Standing and running wood trim. 5. Flush wood paneling. 6. Door frames. 7. Solid surface. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements - LEED 2009 for New Construction and Major Renovations"for additional LEED requirements. 2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for furring, blocking, and other carpentry work. 3. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for doors specified by reference to architectural woodwork standards. 4. Division 09 Section"Painting"for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified in this section and incorporated into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication,finishing,and installation. C. Shop drawings showing location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,attachment devices, hardware,and other components. D. Samples for verification purposes of the following in form of manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full range of colors,textures, and patterns available for each type of material indicated. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 1 1. Plastic laminate. 2. Solid surface material. E. Samples for verification purposes of the following: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish,50 square inches,for each species and cut,finished on one side and one edge. 2. Wood veneer faced panel products;, with or for transparent finish, 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, for each species and cut with one half of exposed surface finished,with separate samples of unfaced panel product used for core. F. Product certificates signed by woodwork manufacturer certifying that products comply with specified requirements. G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. H. Exposed cabinet hardware,one unit of each type and finish. I. Sample Cabinet: Deliver to the jobsite a sample base cabinet unit, illustrating all the details of construction and materials to be used, including,but not limited to,door with hardware,drawer, adjustable shelf, top and splash, for approval. Approved sample shall be maintained on the jobsite until Substantial Completion and shall be used as a standard model representative of all similar cabinets. Sample cabinet may be actual cabinet to be installed in the project; protect such cabinet prior to installation. J. LEED Submittals: 1. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for installation adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Credit EQ 4.4: a. Composite wood manufacturer's product data for each composite wood product used indicating that the bonding agent contains no urea formaldehyde. b. Adhesive manufacturer's product data for each adhesive used indicating that the adhesive contains no urea formaldehyde. 3. Credit(s) MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content for products having recycled content. a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing architectural woodwork similar to that indicated for this Project,with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work. B. AWI Quality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"published by the Architectural Woodwork Institute(AWI)except as otherwise indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 2 A. Protect woodwork during transit,delivery,storage,and handling to prevent damage,soilage,and deterioration. B. Do not deliver woodwork until painting, wet work, grinding, and similar operations that could damage,soil,or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas whose environmental conditions meet requirements specified in "Project Conditions." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Obtain and comply with Woodwork Manufacturer's and Installer's coordinated advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained and stabilized so that woodwork is within plus or minus 1.0 percent of optimum moisture content from date of installation through remainder of construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to be fitted to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before manufacturing woodwork; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate manufacturing schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 HIGH PRESSURE DECORATIVE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: High pressure decorative laminates,as selected by the Architect,which may be incorporated in the work include the following: 1. Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of the AWI woodworking standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade indicated (except no particle board will be used) and, where the following products are part of woodwork, with requirements of the referenced product standards,that apply to product characteristics indicated: 1. Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4 2. High Pressure Laminate: NEMA LD 3. 3. Medium Density Fiberboard Core: ANSI A208.2. 2.3 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas. B. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles,and details indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,trimming,and fitting. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 3 D. Factory-cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Smooth edges of cutouts and, where located in countertops and similar exposures, seal edges of cutouts with a water-resistant coating. E. Drawer fronts shall match doors in construction and grain direction (end match). Sides, backs, and partitions shall be 1/2"thick solid oak,slightly rounded on top edge. Sides and backs shall be dovetailed into drawer fronts;partitions shall be let into sides. Drawer bottoms shall be 1/4" thick tempered hardboard, firmly set into grooved drawer fronts,sides and backs. All drawers shall be shop installed,aligned, and properly fitted to operate smoothly and freely in the drawer opening. 2.4 LAMINATE CLAD CABINETS(PLASTIC-COVERED CASEWORK) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400B"Laminate Clad Cabinets." B. Grade:Custom. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements: 1. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. 2. Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces: Provide laminate cladding complying with the following requirements for type of surface and grade. a. Vertical Surfaces: GP-50(0.050-inch nominal thickness). b. Edges: GP-50(0.050-inch nominal thickness). E. Wood Species for Semi-exposed Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Medium density fiberboard core with thermoset decorative overlay(melamine),color(s)as selected by architect. 2.5 WOOD CABINETS(CASEWORK) FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400A"Wood Cabinets." B. Grade: Premium. C. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. D. Wood Species for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Select white maple. (Note: Figured Anigne Veneer on casework in Rooms 331 and 333 where notes on drawings). a. All vertical surfaces to have vertical grain direction. E. Wood Species for Semiexposed Surfaces: 1. Select white maple. a. All vertical surfaces to have vertical grain direction. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 4 2.6 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Cabinet Hardware Schedule: Refer to schedule at end of this section for cabinet hardware required for architectural cabinets. B. Hardware Standard: Comply with ANSI/BHMA A156.9"American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware"for items indicated by reference to BHMA numbers or referenced to this standard. C. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for BHMA code number indicated. 1. US26D/US32D. 2.7 ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS(COUNTERTOPS) A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division 400C. B. Type of Top: High pressure decorative laminate complying with the following: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure decorative laminate as follows: a. Colors, Patterns,and Finishes: Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. b. Grade: GP-50(0.050-inch nominal thickness). c. Grain Direction: Parallel to longest dimension. 3. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. 2.8 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300. B. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide flat members,except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of installation require field assembly. D. Grade: Premium. E. Lumber Species: 1. Select white maple. 2.9 FLUSH WOOD PANELING A. Quality Standard:Comply with AWI Section 500 requirements for flush wood paneling. B. Quality Standard:Comply with WIC Section 11. C. Grade: Premium. D. Wood Species and Cut: INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 5 1. Varigated bamboo to match wood floor(WD-1). 2.10 INTERIOR DOOR FRAMES FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Quality Standard:Comply with AWI Section 900B"Interior Door Frames". B. Grade:AWI Premium. C. Lumber Species and Cut:Select white maple. 2.11 SOLID SURFACING(QS-1,RTZ-1,RTZ-2,RTZ-3,and SS-1) A. Material: Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. B. Fabricate counter tops, window sills, stair railing cap, etc. to extent possible in single units to details shown on the drawings,in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions. 2.12 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS A. Screws: Select material,type,size,and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. B. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements. C. Anchors: Select material,type,size,and finish required by each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing. B. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built. C. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required,including back priming and removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700 for same grade specified in Part 2 of this section for type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level (including tops) and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. C. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 6 D. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. E. Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence matching(if any)of cabinets. F. Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as indicated. G. Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork. H. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length pieces(from maximum length of lumber availabe)to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joint in adacent and realted members. Cope at returns and miter at corners. I. Paneling: Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed anchoring. Do not use face fastening, unless covered by trim. J. Wood Frames: Install wood frames level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Anchor wood frames to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening,countersunk and filled flush with woodwork. 3.3 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean, lubricate,and adjust hardware. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.5 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. Cabinet Hinges:3/4" Doors: 1 Pair Blum CLIP Hinge, 120 degree opening. B. Pulls(except where noted below): Hafele 117.31.436 C. Pulls(Rooms 102, 126, 127, 128, 331, and 333):Sugatsune America, Inc. No. 2647 (drawers) and No.2653(doors);304 stainless steel,satin finish. D. Locks:Olympus 720 series,small format with IC core with TR201 trim collar,cam(s)as required x US26D. E. Drawer Slides: 1. File Drawers: Knape&Vogt,8500,full extension, 150-pound class. 2. All Other Drawers: Knape&Vogt, 1300, 3/4 extension,75-pound class. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 7 F. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: 1. Knape&Vogt 255 ZC standards. 2. Knape&Vogt 256 ZC shelf supports. G. Grommets: Hafele 429.99.324. H. Countertop Support Bracket: Hafele 287.45.468. I. Trash Insert: Tomlinson No. 1920107, 9" diameter stainless steel trash chute. (www.absupply.net). J. File Hanging Bars: 1/8"x 1/2" chrome flat bar,two(2) per file drawer. K. Other:As shown on drawings or as required. -END OF SECTION 06 40 20- INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 20- 8 SECTION 07 21 10-ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical insulation in batt form installed in all interior partitions. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09255 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: walls and partitions in which insulation specified in this section is installed. 2. Section 09511-Acoustical Panel Ceilings: ceilings above which insulation specified in this section is installed. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections. B. Product data for each type of insulation product specified. C. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including R-values, fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined, by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,storage, and protection during installation. BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering insulation products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: CertainTeed Corp. Johns Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp. 2. Manufacturers of Rigid Insulation: CertainTeed Corp. Johns Manville: Building Insulations Div., Manville Sales Corp. 2.2 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. Acoustical Insulation: Unfaced mineral fiber blanket/batt insulation produced especially to reduce sound transmission by combining mineral fibers with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets without membrane facing). 1. Minimum 3.0"thickness. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 25 and 50, respectively. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions,consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 2 3.4 INSTALLATION LOCATIONS A. Acoustical Insulation,Walls: Install in partitions as noted on the drawings. B. Acoustical Insulation,Ceilings: 1. Install above entire ceiling in EXAM ROOMS. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical retainage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Extend thermal insulation minimum full height to roof deck. C. Extend acoustical wall insulation minimum 6" above highest adjacent ceiling. D. Stuff batt type insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavities. Compact to approximately 40% of normal volume. 3.6 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,physical abuse,and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. -END OF SECTION 07210- BUILDING INSULATION 07210- 3 SECTION 07 21 19-SPRAYED INSULATION AND THERMAL BARRIER PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Contractual Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1. Renewable-based, low density, open celled,flexible, all water-blown polyurethane foam insulation. 2. Spray-applied thermal barrier. 3. Coordinate mechanical ventilation and fresh air supply with Mechanical sections and ASHRAE Guidelines for optimum indoor air quality. 1.3 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) 1. ASTM C 518: Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus 2. ASTM C 1338: Standard Test Method for Determining Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings 3. ASTM D 6866: Standard Test Methods for Determining the Biobased Content of Solid, Liquid, and Gaseous Samples Using Radiocarbon Analysis 4. ASTM E 84: Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 5. ASTM E 96: Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 6. ASTM E 283: Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls,and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 7. ASTM E 2178:Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 8. ASTM E736: Bond Strength (Thermal Barrier). 9. ASTM E761:Compressive Strength(Thermal Barrier). 10. ASTM E605: Density(Thermal Barrier). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of insulation and thermal barrier product specified. B. Product test reports performed by a qualified independent testing agency evidencing compliance of insulation products with specified requirements including those for thermal resistance, fire- test-response characteristics, water-vapor transmission, water absorption, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing of current products. C. Evaluation Report: Evidence of compliance of foam-plastic insulations with International Building Code(IBC), International Residential Code(IRC), International Energy Conservation Code(IECC). D. Manufacturer's certificate certifying insulation provided meets or exceeds specified requirements. E. Installer's certificate showing the Icynene installation certification. F. Sample warranty 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered factory. SPRAYED INSULATION AND THERMAL BARRIER 07 21 19.10-1 B. Single Source Responsibility: Single source product from one manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Icynene Licensed Dealer(installer)who has been trained and certified by Icynene Inc. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84 2. For use as thermal barrier over urethane foam plastics. E. Toxicity/Hazardous Materials 1. Provide products that contain no urea-formaldehyde 2. Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs, HCFCs, or HFCs during the manufacturing or installation process will not be permitted 3. Provide products that contain no PBDE's 4. Provide products that are"Low-emitting" F. Local Code Compliance: Comply with code requirements for thermal barrier materials use over urethane foam plastics. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for handling and protection prior to and during installation. B. Store both components in a temperature controlled area between 60 deg F (15 deg C) and 90 deg F(32 deg C). Do not allow product to freeze. C. Use only those components that are supplied by the Manufacturer. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not expose to sunlight,except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard limited lifetime warranty; refer to www.lcynene.com for full warranty terms. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Polyurethane Spray Insulation: ICYNENE LD-R-50TH by Icynene. B. Spray-Applied Thermal Barrier: Monokote Z-3306/G by Grace. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. B. ICYNENE LD-R-50TH Spray Insulation: renewable-based, low-density, open-cell material conforming to the following: 1. Renewable Content: Exceeds 7.0 percent according to ASTM D 6866 SPRAYED INSULATION AND THERMAL BARRIER 07 21 19.10-2 a. Renewable-based, 0.5 Ib./cu. ft., all water-blown spray foam insulation and air barrier material. b. Product formulation using high-yield, natural castor oil in place of a portion of the petroleum-based polyol. 2. Thermal Resistance(R-Value/inch @75 deg F): ASTM C 518;3.7 hr/sq ft/degree F/BTU a. Heat Flow Reduction: 1) Through 1 inch: 75 percent 2) Through 3.5 inches 93 percent 3) Through 5.5 inches 95 percent 4) Through 10.5 inches 98 percent 3. Air Permeance(for 5.5 inches of material): ASTM E 2178;0.0085 L/s-m2 @75 Pa 4. Water Vapor Transmission (for 2 inches of material): ASTM E 96; 17 perms [1005 ng. / (Pa.s.m2)] 5. Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Rating: ASTM E 84 a. Flame Spread: Less than 25 b. Smoke Development: Less than 450 6. Bacterial and Fungal Growth and Food Value: ASTM C 1338; not a source of food for mold(no growth) C. Product Description: 1. ICC-ES SAVE: (Verification of Attributes Report)VAR-1002 2. Exceeds ICC-SAVE and USDA BioPreferred'standards for a renewable-based product 3. Collaborative for High-Performance Schools (CHPS) "Low-emitting material" per CA 01350 Criteria 4. Effective vapor-permeable ("breathing") air barrier material that can move with the building to maintain the air barrier characteristic for the life of the building. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Product produced in an ISO 9001 registered factory. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, under which work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Review placement area to determine final location will not be within 3 inches of heat emitting devices where the temperature is in excess of 200 deg F as per ASTM C 411 or in accordance with applicable codes. 2. Review placement area to determine final location will not be on the exterior. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates and cavities of loose materials capable of interfering with insulation installation. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Site apply liquid components manufactured by Icynene Inc. and installed by an Icynene Licensed Dealer. B. Apply insulation to substrates in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Apply insulation to produce thickness required for indicated R Value. SPRAYED INSULATION AND THERMAL BARRIER 07 21 19.10-3 1. R-25 D. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. E. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. 3.4 REPAIRS A. Any repairs must be effected by an Icynene Licensed Dealer. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse. END OF SECTION 07 21 19.10 SPRAYED INSULATION AND THERMAL BARRIER 07 21 19.10-4 SECTION 07 62 00- FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Metal counter/wall flashing. 2. Exposed metal trim,gravel stops,and fascia. 3. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. 4. Expansion joint covers. 5. Built-in metal scuppers. 6. Sheet metal copings. 7. Sheet metal gutters and downspouts. 8. Sheet metal reglets. 9. Stainless steel drip edge. B. Roofing accessories installed integral with roofing membrane are specified in roofing system sections as roofing work. C. Accessories installed integral with manufactured metal panels are also described in Section 07410 -Standing Seam Metal Roof,Wall and Parapet Panels. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement,and exposure to weather without failing. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings, roof edge flashings, that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals. D. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings, roof edge flashings, tested according to SPRI ES-1 and capable of resisting the following design pressure: 1. Design Pressure:As indicated on Drawings. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. 10-foot-long samples of gravel guard, coping,flashing systems,expansion joints,etc.,installed in place. (Sample if approved may be incorporated into the finish work). C. Shop drawings showing layout, gauges, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorages details, including major counterflashings, trim/facia units, scuppers, and expansion joint system. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Guarantee all metal flashing installed in conjunction with roofing against leaks and defects for a period of four years following Substantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Copper: ASTM B 370; temper H00 (cold-rolled) except where temper 060 is required for forming; 16 oz.and 20 oz.except as otherwise indicated. B. Solder: 50-50 tin/lead solder(ASTM B 32),with rosin flux. C. Fasteners: Appropriate gauge and length for conditions encountered,screws,nails,etc.,all non- ferrous. D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC- Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. E. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;nonhardening, nonskinning,nondrying,nonmigrating sealant. F. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, matching or compatible with material being installed, noncorrosive,size and gage required for performance. H. Lead: ASTM B 749,Type L51121,copper-bearing sheet lead, minimum 4 lb./sq.ft.(0.0625-inch thick) except not less than 6 Ib./sq. ft. (0.0937-inch thick)for burning(welding) unless otherwise indicated. I. Stainless-Steel Sheet:ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666,Type 304,dead soft,fully annealed. 1. Finish:2D(dull,cold rolled). 2. Surface:Smooth,flat. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 2 3. Thickness: Minimum 22 gauge. J. Underlayment:One layer of Ultra,Grace Construction Products. (NO SUBSTITUTIONS). K. Fasteners:Wood screws,annular threaded nails,self-tapping screws,self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws,gasketed,with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet:Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet:Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329. 5. Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper,hardware bronze or passivated Series 300 stainless steel. L. Insulating Concrete Deck Vents:Spun aluminum type, as recommended by roofing and concrete deck manufacturer. 2.2 FABRICATION A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with slip joint, cover plate expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks,true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,form seams,and solder. Rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standards. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 3 E. Gutters, Downspouts, Flashings, and Trim: Form to details shown on drawings or as approved by the Architect and roofing manufacturer. Provide corner joints, not more than 6' long, preformed, mitered, riveted,and soldered. F. Joints: Install joints in running trim on 10' centers using 8" cover plates centered above joints. Gap joints 1/4"and set both sides in continuous bed of sealant. G. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. H. Drip Edge and Window Flashing: Form details to show on drawings or as approved by Architect. I. Equipment Support Flashings:For rooftop mechanical equipment supports,fabricate flashings per detail in SMACNA(Architectural Manual 5th Edition), Figure 4-16 and 4-17. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the roofing manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units. Conceal fasteners where possible,and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Self-Adhearing Sheet Underlayment: Install underlayment, wrinkle free under copings and trim where required and noted on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. C Underlayment: Where flashing is to be installed directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper underlayment. D. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated. Where shown in concrete,furnish reglets to trades of concrete work for installation as work of Division 3 sections. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets to trades of masonry work, for installation as work of Division 4 sections. E. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of mastic or bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. F. Install insulating concrete deck vents,one(1)per 1,000 square feet of affected roof area,with minimum 4"diameter hole cored to deck. Fill vents with loose insulation. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 4 -END OFSECTION 076200- FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07 62 00- 5 SECTION 07 92 00-JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of each form and type of joint sealant is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Interior joints in vertical surfaces as indicated below: a. Perimeter joints between interior finish materials and steel door frames. b. Perimeter joints between interior finish materials and aluminum entrances and storefronts. f. Other joints as indicated. C. Sealants for joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing is specified in Division 07 Section: "Flashing and Sheet Metal." D. Sealants for glazing purposes are specified in Division 08 Section"Glazing." E. Sealant for tile joints is specified in Division 09 Section "Tile." F. Painters caulking or sealants is provided by in Division 09 Section"Painting". 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCES A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. B. Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available,for each product exposed to view. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has successfully completed within the last 5 years at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this Project. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 1 C. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test their adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated,as approved by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of sealant and joint substrate. 3. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing,in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants which fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time,and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers'recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers. 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealers to coordinate with other trades to assure watertight placement. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers,joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 2 2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS(CONCEALED AND NON-PAINTED LOCATIONS) A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements,including those referenced for Type,Grade,Class,and Uses. B. Multi-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Type M,Grade NS,Class 25,and uses NT, M,G,A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. C. One-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT: Type 5; Grade NS; Class 50; and Uses NT, M,G,A, and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Multi-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT: a. "985 NS"; Pecora Corporation. b. "FC Parking Structure Sealant"; Dow Corning Corporation. c. "Proglaze II";Tremco Inc. 2. One-Part Non-Sag Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant for Use NT: a. "864 NS"; Pecora Corporation. b. "790"; Dow Corning Corporation. c. "Omniseal";Sonneborn Building Products Div.,ChemRex, Inc. d. "Spectrem 3";Tremco Inc. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS(PAINTED LOCATIONS) A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements,including those referenced for Type,Grade,Class,and Uses. B. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and uses NT, M, A,and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,0. C. One-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type 5;Grade NS; Class 25; and Uses NT, M,A, and,as applicable to joint substrates indicated,0. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, elastomeric sealants which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Multi-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: a. "Dynatrol II"; Pecora Corp. b. "Sikaflex-2c NS";Sika Corp. c. "Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 2"; BASF Building Products. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 3 d. "DYmeric";Tremco Inc. 2. One-Part Nonsag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: a. "Dynatrol 1XL"; Pecora Corp. b. "Sikaflex-1a";Sika Corp. c. "Sonneborn Sonolastic NP 1"; BASF Building Products. 2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed,compressible,resilient,nonwaxing,nonextruding strips of flexible,nongassing plastic foam of material indicated below;nonabsorbent to water and gas;and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. 1. Closed-cell polyethylene foam. C. Backerseal: Expanding foam sealant to be used as a secondary sealant system behind backer rod and liquid sealant equal to Emseal Joint Systems Ltd., Backerseal_(Greyflex_). D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials,which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on sealant adhesion or in-service performance. B. Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 4 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturers and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers;oil;grease;waterproofing;water repellents;water;surface dirt; and frost. 2. Clean concrete, masonry, and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean,sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal and other nonporous surfaces by chemical cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealers. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond,do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials,applications and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch,twist,puncture,or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 5 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers,compression seals,or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure. 3. Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply with requirements indicated above for joint fillers. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability. E. Tooling of Non-Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets,and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,despite such protection,damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work. -END OFSECTION 079200- JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 6 SECTION 08 11 13- HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1-GENERAL 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow-metal steel doors. 2. Standard hollow-metal steel frames. B. Related Sections: 1. section 08 87 10-Finish Hardware:door hardware for standard steel doors. 2. Section 09 9100-Painting:field painting standard steel doors and frames. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 0133 23-Shop Drawings, Product Data,and Samples. B. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, label compliance, fire-resistance and temperature-rise ratings, sound ratings, and finishes for each type of steel door and frame specified. C. Shop Drawings: In addition to requirements below,provide a schedule of standard steel doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on drawings: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles. 4. Details and locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, accessories,joints,and connections. 7. Details of glazing frames and stops showing glazing. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for electrified door hardware and controls. 9. Door schedule using the same reference designations indicated on the drawings. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive fire tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for each type of standard steel door and frame. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations: Obtain standard steel doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire-Rated Door, Sidelight, and Transom Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated. 1. Test Pressure:Conform to UL 10C for fire rated class indicated or scheduled. 2. Temperature-Rise Rating: Where scheduled, provide doors that have a temperature-rise rating of 450°F. maximum in 30 minutes of fire exposure. D. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite. E. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with UL 1784. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 1 F. Standard steel doors and frames must be furnished in compliance with the Steel Door Institute / ANSI A250.8-1998 and as specified in this section. G. Manufacturer must be a member in good standing with the Steel Door Institute. H. All label construction doors shall be manufactured in accordance with specifications and procedures tested and rated by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc.And have attached UL Classification marker. 4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames palletized,wrapped,or crated to provide protection during transit and project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store doors and frames under cover at project site. Place units in a vertical position with heads up,spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. 1. If wrappers on doors become wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for standard steel frames. Furnish setting drawings,templates,and directions for installing anchorages,including sleeves,concrete inserts,anchor bolts,and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to project site in time for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: Amweld Building Products, LLC. Ceco Door Products; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. Curries Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group Company. Deansteel Manufacturing, Inc. Steelcraft;an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 2 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 zinc-iron-alloy(galvannealed) coating designation. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES D. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), Class B coating; mill phosphatized. E. Supports and Anchors: After fabricating,galvanize units to be built into exterior walls according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,Class B. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide items to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. G. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching standard steel door frames of type indicated. H. Grout: Comply with ASTM C 476, with a slump of 4 inches for standard steel door frames built into concrete or masonry,as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50 respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. J. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 8000-Glazing. K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic,SSPC-Paint 12,compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type non-corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 3 STANDARD STEEL DOORS A. Doors at interior locations shall be manufactured of cold rolled, or annealed steel. Doors must be of continuously welded,seamless construction with all angles,molds,returns and miters neatly welded and all weld beads ground smooth for finishing. B. Doors at exterior locations shall be manufactured of G60 galvannealed or hot dipped galvanized steel. Doors must be of continuously welded, seamless construction with all angles, molds, returns, and miters neatly welded and all weld beads ground smooth for finishing. C. Face sheets of 16 gauge steel reinforced and sound-deadened by 22 gauge formed steel vertical stiffeners spaced not less than 6" o.c. and attached to face sheets by spot welds not more than 5" o.c. Vertical stiffeners at exterior door locations shall be galvannealed or hot dip galvanized. Voids between vertical stiffeners shall be filled with fiberglass batting. D. Top and bottom edges closed with continuous recessed steel channels, of not less than 16 gauge, spot welded to both faces. Top edge of exterior doors sealed flush with welded in place closing channel to exclude water. E. Overlapping steel astragals for pairs of labeled doors as required by manufacturer to meet codes. F. Doors are to be prepared to receive mortise type hardware and at hinge, lock, latch and all other hardware locations, reinforcing plates shall be spot welded to the inner surfaces of the door. Hinge reinforcements shall not be less than 7 gauge steel. All other hardware reinforcements shall be not less than 12 gauge steel. Where door closers or brackets are to be installed,reinforcing plates shall not be less than 12 gauge steel. Necessary holes for field installation of mortise type hardware shall be drilled and tapped from templates which are to be furnished to the door manufacturer by the hardware contractor. Provide suitable reinforcements for surface-applied hardware, but no drilling or tapping is to be done at the factory for application of surface-applied hardware. G. Hardware reinforcements to be in accordance with ANSI A250.6. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 3 H. All glazing trim shall either be an integral part of the door face on the secure side with a removable bead flush with the opposite door face or metal glass light trim with a projection not to exceed 3/32"from either door face. I. Each fire-rated door must carry a metal UL tag. J. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, doors which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: Curries Model 747T, Deansteel Model SLV. Steelcraft Model BW. Ceco Model MS. Amweld Model 700. 4 STANDARD STEEL FRAMES A. Frames at interior locations shall be manufactured of 16 gauge cold rolled,or annealed steel. Three-sided frames for single doors up to and including 4'-0" in width shall be manufactured of 16 gauge steel. Frames for pairs of doors 6'-0"and over, all sidelight frames, and all borrowed light frames shall be manufactured of 14 gauge steel. Frames shall be unit type welded construction with all angles,molds,returns and miters neatly welded and all weld beads ground smooth for finishing. B. Frames at exterior locations shall be manufactured of 14 gauge G60 galvannealed or hot dipped galvanized steel. Frames shall be unit type welded construction with all angles, molds, returns and miters neatly welded and all weld beads ground smooth for finishing. C. Break-form to profile free of warp, buckles and fractures with corners square and sharp. Form stop integral with frame except where detailed otherwise. Provide 3/4" stop height on all fire rated frames containing glazing when required by manufacturer's fire listings. Dress sheared edges straight and smooth. D. All two-piece mullions shall be factory welded to form a single-piece, inseparable section before assembly into a frame unit. E. Frames are to be prepared to receive mortise-type hardware and at hinge,lock,latch,and all other hardware locations, reinforcing plates shall be spot welded to the inner surface of the jambs. Hinge reinforcements shall not be less than 7 gauge steel. All top hinge reinforcements to incorporate manufacturer's optional high frequency hinge reinforcement or full jamb depth hinge reinforcement. All other hardware reinforcements shall be not less than 12 gauge steel. Where door closers or brackets are to be installed, reinforcing plates shall be not less than 12 gauge steel. Twenty-four gauge galvanized steel plaster guards are to be spot welded over the hardware reinforcing plates. Provide 12 gauge reinforcement, for full height of door leaf, welded inside throat of frame to door rabbet wherever continuous geared hinges are scheduled. Provide 1/2" polystyrene, Celotex®, or similar material, adhesive attached to the continuous hinge reinforcement inside the throat of the frame wherever continuous geared hinges are scheduled. Necessary holes for field installation of mortise type hardware shall be drilled and tapped from templates, which are to be furnished to the frame manufacturer by the hardware contractor. Provide suitable reinforcements for surface applied hardware, but no drilling or tapping is to be done at the factory for application of surface applied hardware. Prepare frames for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single doors and mullions of double doors on strike side,and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. Omit silencers on exterior doors. F. All frames shall be provided with floor clips spot welded to each jamb and punched for anchoring to the floor. All vertical mullions shall be supplied with U-shaped floor anchors that are to be anchored to the floor prior to setting frames. G. Furnish frames with steel spreader temporarily fastened to the feet of both jambs for rigidity during shipping and handling. Remove spreader bar before commencing installation of frame. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES H. For each jamb in masonry construction,provide 3 or more 16 gauge adjustable jamb anchors of the T-anchor type,existing opening type,or of the wire masonry anchor type spaced not more than 30" apart. I. For each jamb in steel stud construction,provide 3 or more 18 gauge drywall type jamb anchors spaced not more than 30"apart. J. Fire labels on frames to be embossed marking stamped into the steel during manufacturing or an attached metal tag. 5 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick,fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with standard steel frames, minimum 5/8 inch high, unless otherwise indicated. C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed. 6 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate standard steel doors and frames to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles,with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at project site,clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Standard Steel Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. C. Standard Steel Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint,fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Where installed in masonry,leave vertical mullions in frames open at top for grouting. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. D. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of door or frame. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings such that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of doors and frames. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 7 STEEL FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Finish standard steel door and frames after assembly. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections,and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel,complying with SSPC-Paint 20. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 5 C. Steel Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning"; remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,from uncoated steel;comply with SSPC-SP 3,"Power Tool Cleaning,"or SSPC-SP 6/NACE No.3,"Commercial Blast Cleaning." D. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 0.7 mils. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied finish paint system indicated; and providing a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. PART 3-EXECUTION 1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of standard steel doors and frames. 1. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of standard steel frame connections before frame installation. 2. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. B. Prior to installation and with installation spreaders in place, adjust and securely brace standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment,twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3 INSTALLATION A. General: Provide doors and frames of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated. Install standard steel doors and frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Standard Steel Frames: Install standard steel frames for doors,sidelights,transoms, borrowed lights and other openings,of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI 105. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush,and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with mortar, grout, and plaster containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with mortar as specified in Section 04 2000-Unit Masonry Assemblies. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Install grout in lifts and take precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces. 6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors,and fill and make smooth,flush,and invisible on exposed faces. 7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust standard steel door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines,and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Standard Steel Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor(No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 8000-Glazing and with standard steel door and frame manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c.,and not more than 2 inches o.c.from each corner. 4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13 - 7 A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including standard steel doors or frames that are warped,bowed,or otherwise unacceptable. B. Clean grout and other bonding material off standard steel doors and frames immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. D. Galvannealed Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 0811 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 14 16- FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on drawings and in schedules. B. Types of doors required include the following: 1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Label and fire rated, as scheduled. C. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware for wood doors is included in this section. D. Metal door frames for flush wood doors are specified in another Division 8 section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Door manufacturer's technical data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction, location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings and other pertinent data. C. Samples: Submit samples, 1-0"square or as indicated,for the following: 1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: 1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA). B. NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series. C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated by UL, Warnock Hersey or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. DOORS SHALL MEET ALL 2009 IBC CODE REQUIREMENTS WITH CITY OF DALLAS AMENDMENTS. D. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16- 1 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install,and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with manufacturer's instructions. B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or concealed markings. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's geographical location: 1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3"Moisture Content". 1.7 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to,and not a limitation of,other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. 1. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. 2. Solid Core Interior Doors: a. Life of installation. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering doors which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces: a. Cal-Wood Door Div.,Timberland Industries, Inc. b. Eggers Industries,Architectural Door Division. c. Weyerhauser Company. 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS WITH WOOD VEENER FACES A. Solid Core Doors with plastic laminate cladding:Comply with the following requirements: FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16- 2 1. Face and Edge Veneer: plastic laminate. 2. AWI Grade: Premium. 3. Construction: PC-5 (Particleboard core,5-ply). B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements. 1. Faces and AWI Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-rated doors. 2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated. 3. Pairs: Provide fire-rated pairs with fire-retardant stiles which are labeled and listed for kinds of applications indicated WITHOUT FORMED STEEL EDGES AND ASTRAGALS. 2.3 VISION PANEL FRAMES A. Solid wood framing to match color of door faces. Profile shall be as selected from manufacturer's standards. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following requirements: 1. Factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting. Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop drawings and with hardware templates. b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with factory premachining. B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards of kind(s)of doors required. 1. Vision Panel Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type,size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16- 3 A. Hardware: For installation,see Division 8"Finish Hardware"section of these specifications. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in accordance with requirements of NFPA No.80. C. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. -END OF SECTION 08 14 16- FLUSH WOOD DOORS 0814 16- 4 SECTION 08 31 13-ACCESS DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes access doors for installation in the following types of construction: 1. Gypsum drywall. 2. Tilt-Wall Concrete. B. Provide stainless steel access doors where indicated. C. Provide fire-rated access doors and frames in rated partitions. D. Building-in of anchors and grouting of frames set in masonry construction is specified in Division 04. E. Refer to Division 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 sections for access doors furnished by Mechanical and Electrical Contractors. F. Where access doors are required and are not provided by any other source,they will be furnished by the requirements of this section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data in form of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door assembly, including setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage,devices. a. Include complete schedule,including types,general locations,sizes,wall and ceiling construction details, finishes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain access doors for entire project from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into other work for installation of access doors.Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. C. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per approved testing methods and that are labeled and listed by UL, ITS,or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ACCESS DOORS 08 31 13- 1 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from trades requiring access to concealed equipment,and indicate on submittal schedule. B. Special-Size Access Doors: Use where required or requested; indicate on schedule. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering access doors that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. J.L. Industries 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor, Inc. 4. Bilco Company 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: Furnish each access door assembly manufactured as an integral unit, complete with all parts, and ready for installation. B. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction unless otherwise indicated, 12" x 12" minimum size. Grind welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of support shown. C. Frames: Fabricate from 16-gage steel. D. Frames in Restrooms, Toilets, or Other Areas Where Water is Present: Fabricate from 16-gage,#4 satin-finished stainless steel. E. Fabricate frame with exposed flange nominal 1-inch wide around perimeter of frame. F. For installation in masonry construction,furnish frames with adjustable metal anchors. G. Flush Panel Doors and Frames (Non-Public Areas): Fabricate from not less than 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. Finish with manufacturer's factory-applied prime paint. H. Flush Panel Doors and Frames in Toilets, Restrooms or Other Areas Where Water is Present: Fabricate from not less than 14-gage stainless steel sheet,with concealed piano hinge set to open 175 degrees. Buff exposed surfaces to#4 satin finish. ACCESS DOORS 08 31 13- 2 I. Flush Fire-Rated Doors and Frames: Fabricated from materials at locations indicated above(prime steel or stainless steel)with automatic spring-type closer and automatic self- latching operation. Fire rating as required by partition which installed. J. Recessed Panel Doors and Frames(Public Areas): Fabricate from not less than 16-gage sheet steel frame and 14-gage door panel, with double-acting concealed spring hinges set to open 175 degrees. Door designed for concealed installation in drywall. Finish with manufacturer's factory-applied prime paint. K. Provide one cylinder lock per access door. Furnish 2 keys per lock. Key all locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors. B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed,or otherwise damaged. -END OF SECTION 083113- ACCESS DOORS 08 31 13- 3 SECTION 08 7100- FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition: "Finish Hardware" includes items known commercially as finish hardware which are required for swing, sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and non-matching hardware specified in the same section as the door and door frame. B. Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and in schedules. C. Types of finish hardware required include the following: 1. Hinges 2. Continuous hinges 3. Lock cylinders and keys 4. Lock and latch sets 5. Bolts 6. Push/pull sets 7. Closers 8. Overhead stops 9. Miscellaneous door control devices 10. Door trim units 11. Protection plates 12. Weatherstripping for exterior doors D. Silencers included integral with hollow metal frames specified with door frames elsewhere in Division 8. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, and closers) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00- 1 B. Supplier:A recognized architectural finish hardware supplier,with warehousing facilities,who has been furnishing hardware in the project's vicinity for a period of not less than 2 years,and who is, or who employs an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) in good standing as certified by the Door and Hardware Institute, who is available, at reasonable times during the course of the work,for consultation about project's hardware requirements,to Owner,Architect and Contractor. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA Standard No. 80 and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for each item of hardware in accordance with Section 01300 -Submittals. Include whatever information may be necessary to show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finishes. B. Hardware Schedule: Submit five final hardware schedules in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware with doors,frames and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand, function and finish of hardware. 1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: a. Type, style,function,size and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, and acronyms contained in schedule. f. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work (e.g., hollow metal frames) which is critical in the project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by finish hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of hardware schedule. 3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. FINISH HARDWARE 08 7100- 2 C. Samples: At Architects request and prior to final ordering of finish hardware,submit one sample of each type of exposed hardware unit requested, finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. 1. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. D. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factory-prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for proper location and installation of hardware. 1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately,with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packaged in same container. C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is correct. D. Deliver individually packaged hardware items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site)for installation. E. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses,both before and after installation. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.Submit a copy of the warranty with the hardware schedule. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of substantial completion,except as follows: a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of substantial completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of substantial completion. A copy of the warranty shall be furnished with the hardware schedule. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade,function, finish,size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware is indicated in the Finish Hardware Data Sheet and Hardware Schedule at the FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00- 3 end of this section. Items listed are taken from the following manufacturer's catalogs and represent specification standards. 1. Hinges: Hager Hinge Co.,St. Louis, Missouri. (H) 2. Cylinders: Schlage(S). 3. Locks and Latches:Corbin Russwin (R). 4. Exit Devices, Removable Mullions: Von Duprin (VD). (No substitutions.) 5. Extruded Thresholds: Pemco, Ventura, California, (P) National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis,Tennessee. (NG) 6. Closers: Norton(N)or LCN (L). 7. Cast Thresholds: Wooster Products, Inc.,Wooster Ohio. (W) 8. Weatherstripping: Pemko, Ventura, California (P); National Guard Products, Inc., Memphis,Tennessee(NG). 9. Miscellaneous Hardware: H.B. Ives, New Haven, Connecticut(I),Trimco Manufacturing, Los Angeles,California (T),Stanley Works(S), Forms&Surfaces(F&S),or Rockwood(R). 10. Security Hardware: Locknetics. B. ANSI/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this section or in schedules to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are derived from the following standards. Provide products complying with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this section. 1. Butts and Hinges: ANSI A156.1(BHMA 101) 2. Locks and Lock Trim: ANSI A156.2(BHMA 601) 3. Exit Devices: ANSI A156.3(BHMA 701) 4. Door Controls: Closers: ANSI A156.4(BHMA 301) 5. Auxiliary Locks: ANSI A156.5(BHMA 501) 6. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI A156.6(BHMA 1001) 7. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI A156.7 8. Door Controls-Overhead Holders: ANSI A156.8(BHMA 311) 9. Mortise Locks& Latches: ANSI A156.13(BHMA 621) 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. General: FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00- 4 1. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown. 2. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish"optional"materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. 3. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. 4. Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 5. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except to extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners. 6. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,and removal and replacement of finish hardware. 2.3 HINGES A. Templates Hinges: Provide only template hinges which conform to ANSI whenever applicable. B. Use ball bearing hinges on heavy doors,doors where high frequency service is expected and doors equipped with door closers. C. All hinges to be used on exterior doors shall be of non-ferrous material, brass, bronze or stainless steel. D. Hinge Pins,Except as Otherwise Indicated, Shall be as Follows: 1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins(N RP)or security stud. 4. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 5. Tips: Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves. FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00- 5 E. Size of Hinges Shall be as Follows: Door thickness and width Hinge Height Hinge Width 1-3/4 to 36" 4-1/2 4-1/2 1-3/4 over 36" 5 4-1/2 Extra Heavy F. Number of Hinges per Door-Provide Quantities as Follows- For doors less than 5 feet high-1 pair. For doors 5 feet to 7 feet 6 inches high - 1-1/2 pair and one additional hinge for each additional 2-1/2 feet or fraction thereof. G. Where projection of door trim is such as to prevent desired degree of opening,the proper hinge width shall be provided to allow the door to clear the trim. H. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bommer Industries, Inc. 2. Hager Companies 3. McKinney Products Co. 4. Stanley Commercial Hardware 5. Roton or Select(continuous hinges). 2.4 KEYING A. Furnish the Following Keys- 1. Three(3)conventional masterkeys. 2. Two(2)keys per lockset. B. All keying shall be as directed by the Owner before the finish hardware schedules are submitted for approval. A keying meeting shall be attended by the hardware supplier prior to submittal of hardware schedule. C. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS SHALL BE PROVIDED WITH INTERCHANGEABLE(IC)CORES. E. Acceptable manufacturers shall include Schlage. 2.5 LOCKS A. Mortise Locks: 1. Locks shall have all functions available in one size case, manufactured from heavy gauge steel, minimum thickness 3/32", completely chrome plated for corrosion resistance and lubricity of parts. Cases are to be closed on all sides to protect internal parts. Locks are to have adjustable,beveled and armored fronts,standard 2-3/4"backset,convertible from FINISH HARDWARE 08 71 00- 6 one function to another, a full 3/4" throw anti-friction latch bolt, a 1" throw dead bolt with hardened steel insert and available for a minimum door thickness of 1-3/8". Internal parts shall be heavy gauge steel,zinc dichromate plated and nickel steel hubs. 2. All locksets with latch bolts,regardless of trim,shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for A and lesser labeled doors,single or pairs. 3. Locksets to be used on specified exterior doors shall be of non-ferrous parts and case, brass,bronze or stainless steel. 4. Lock trim, knob, sectional or escutcheon type, shall be thru bolted through the lock case to assure correct alignment and proper operation. 5. Lock trim shall be solid brass levers, lever attachment to be screwless, rose minimum diameter to be 2-7/8". 6. Locksets shall conform to Federal Specifications type 86 and 87 and be certified as meeting ANSI A156.2 Grade 1 requirements. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Schlage"L"Series. B. Heavy Duty Cylindrical Locks: 1. Heavy duty cylindrical locks shall have a steel chassis,zinc and dichromate plated for rust resistance, which fits a 2-1/8" hole in the door. The latch bolt shall have a minimum throw of 1/2". The regular backset to be 2-3/4"minimum with greater backsets available where scheduled. Levers shall be solid brass with no riveted plastic inserts. The outside lever to be removable for rekeying without the removal of the lockset from the door or by using a key. Rose liners shall be furnished which lock the chassis into the door cutout, helping to prevent lock movement and loosening. Cylinders shall be conventional, high security and removable core types. 2. Locksets shall conform to Federal Specification FF-H- 00106B, type 161, be certified as meeting ANSI A156.2 Grade 2 requirements and be listed by Underwriters Laboratories for all classes of labeled doors. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Schlage"AL"Series. 2.6 CLOSERS A. Closers shall be rack and pinion construction with both rack and pinion of heat treated steel and with a cast hydraulic iron or aluminum case. They shall be non-sized with adjustable spring power to accommodate sizes 1 thru 6. Closing the door shall be controlled by two valves, one to control closing speed and one to control latching speed. Closers shall be regularly furnished with fully adjustable backcheck and a backcheck selector valve allowing approximate 70° backcheck on both regular and parallel arm closers. Delayed action shall be available. Valves shall be concealed against unauthorized adjustment and be non-critical needle valve type. Closer arm joints shall be permanently affixed or affixed with tamper proof screws; snap-apart arms are not acceptable. EXTERIOR CLOSERS SHALL HAVE EXTRA-DUTY ARMS. Closers shall be surface applied using sex nuts and bolts, with rectangular covers void of manufacturer's trademarks,projection not over 2-3/4"and capable of being applied on 1-3/4"top rail or top jamb for inverted mounting. When required,covers shall be available in bronze and chrome finishes. 11013-00 08710 - 7 B. Closer shall be certified as meeting the ANSI A156.4 Grade 1 requirements be listed by Underwriters Laboratories(UL)for all classes of labeled doors. C. Acceptable Manufacturers (Provide closers from one manufacturer). In schedule, prefix "P" denotes parallel arm: 1. Exterior: a. LCN 4040 EDA b. Norton PR 7500 2. Interior: a. LCN 1461 b. Norton 8501 2.7 OVERHEAD HOLDERS AND STOPS A. Rixson-Firemark. 2.8 EXIT DEVICES A. Von Duprin (NO SUBSTITUTIONS). 2.9 SILENCERS A. Door silencers shall be manufactured from a good grade of rubber with a head 1/2" in diameter, to be applied to the jamb stop strip, have 1/8" uncompressed projection, accommodate metal thickness of 3/32" in a hole 9/32" in diameter. Projection inside of frame to be a minimum of 11/32". Provide three(3)silencers per strike jamb for single doors and two(2)for pairs of doors at the head. Furnish installation tool for Owner's use. 2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Pemko. B. National Guard Products, Inc. 2.11 THRESHOLDS A. Pemko, National Guard Products, Inc.and Wooster Products, Inc. 2.12 PUSH PLATES, PULLS, FLOOR STOPS,AND WALL STOPS A. Trimco, Quality, Forms & Surfaces, Rockwood, Stanley, or H.B. Ives. Unless otherwise scheduled, all doors not equipped with holding or staying devices shall be supplied with a stop, which shall control the limit of opening to prevent damage to walls and other finish materials/equipment, or to the door and its hardware. 2.13 HARDWARE FINISHES 11013-00 08710 - 8 A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set(or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color and texture. B. Provide finishes which match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating(if any),composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards. C. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass, bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix "-NL" is used with standard finish designations to indicate"no lacquer". D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI A156.18"Materials& Finishes Standard", including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products. E. Finish of items shall be as follows: 1. Hinges: US26D, US32D. 2. Locksets: US26D. 3. Exit Devices: US26D. 4. Door Closers:Silver aluminum lacquer finish (cover and arm). 5. Door Holders/Stops: US26D and silver aluminum lacquer. 6. Push, Pull, Kick, Mop and Armor Plates: US26D, US32D. 7. Flush Bolts,Stops: US26D. 8. Miscellaneous Items: US26D. F. The finish of items not specifically mentioned above or set forth in the schedule shall be US26D unless shown otherwise. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to the following mounting heights,otherwise,mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames by the Door and Hardware Institute" (DHI), or to comply with requirements of governing regulations, requirements for accessibility,or as otherwise directed by the Architect. 1. Center Line of Door Knobs: 38". 2. Center Line of Door Pulls: 38"to center line. 11013-00 08710 - 9 3. Center Line of Push Plates: 38"to center line. 4. Center Line of Exit Devices: ±39-1/2"to suit manufacturers standard. 5. Center Line of Dead Locks: ±48", coordinate with push and pull platers, or as otherwise directed. 6. Upper Edge of Top Hinge: ±5"to suit manufacturers standard below head or frame. 7. Bottom Edges of Bottom Hinge: ±10"to suit manufacturers standard above floor. 8. Center hinge(s)spaced equal between top and bottom hinge. B. DEGREE OF OPENING FOR DOORS WITH OVERHEAD HOLDERS AND CLOSERS AND SIDE OF DOOR WHICH DEVICE IS TO BE MOUNTED SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE HARDWARE SCHEDULE FOR THE ARCHITECT'S APPROVAL. C. ALL HARDWARE SHALL BE INSTALLED BY TRADESMEN SKILLED IN THE APPLICATION OF COMMERCIAL GRADE HARDWARE FOR AT LEAST 10 YEARS. (THIS MEANS A TRADESMEN WHOSE PRIMARY OCCUPATION IS THE INSTALLATION OF HARDWARE). D. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Securely fasten all parts to be attached. Fit faces of mortised parts snug and flush. Make sure all operating parts move freely and smoothly without binding,sticking or excessive clearance. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way,the hardware shall be removed and stored prior to the painting or finishing. Items shall then be reinstalled only when the finishes have been completed on the surface to which the hardware is to be applied. E. At exterior doors and elsewhere as indicated,set thresholds in a bed for sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drain holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant. F. Install door closers so that arms are not visible on the public side of the door. Closers shall be installed to allow for 180°swing. G. After installation, representative templates, instruction sheets and installation details shall be placed in a file folder to be turned over to the Owner when the building is accepted. Included shall be at least five each of any special adjusting and/or installation tools furnished with the hardware by the manufacturers. 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door,to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application made. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. 11013-00 08710 - 10 D. Instruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finishes,during the final adjustment of hardware. E. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area,the Installer,accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design,materials or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems(of substantial nature)in the performance of the hardware. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Whenever hardware is located in areas where it may be subject to damage during construction by handling,cleaning,or other construction activities,(i.e.,painting,cleaning of bricks)it shall be protected and/or removed from its location until the hazardous condition is terminated. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. REFER TO DRAWINGS - END OF SECTION 08 71 00- Fun on the Run Paintball Park 08 71 00 - 11 SECTION 08 80 00 -GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of glazing work is indicated on drawings and schedules. B. Types of work in this section include glazing for: 1. Entrances and other doors. 2. Vision lites. 3. Custom mirrors. C. Factory-framed mirror units are included in Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories". 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing standard. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact loading (where applicable),without failure including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. B. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and nighttime sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated. GLAZING 08 80 00- 1 C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch-long samples of each color required (except black)for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. Install sealant or gasket sample between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers certifying that their products comply with specified requirements. 1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials bearing manufacturer's permanent labels designating type and thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. F. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "GANA Glazing Manual." B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for Project with a record of successful in-service performance. Any glazier having filed a Chapter 7 and/or Chapter 11 bankruptcy in the previous five years shall be excluded from participation in this project. Any renaming, restructuring, or purchase from another entity shall not exempt companies from this criteria. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source for each product indicated below: 1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036)type and class indicated. GLAZING 08 80 00- 2 2. Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048)condition indicated. E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories from one source for each product and installation method indicated. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect glass and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturer's directions and as required to prevent edge damage to glass,and damage to glass and glazing materials from effects of moisture including condensation, of temperature changes, of direct exposure to sun, and from other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by glazing material manufacturer or when joint substrates are wet due to rain,frost,condensation or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to, the following: 1. Viracon. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc. 4. Guardian Industries Corp. 5. Technical Glass Products,Snoqualmie,WA (fire glass). 6. 3form, Inc. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS,GENERAL A. Primary Glass Standard: Provide primary glass which complies with ASTM C 1036 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality, and, if applicable,form,finish, mesh and pattern. GLAZING 08 80 00- 3 B. Heat-Treated Glass Standard: Provide heat-treated glass which complies with ASTM C 1048 requirements, including those indicated by reference to kind, condition, type, quality, class, and, if applicable,form,finish, and pattern. C. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for glazing openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with recommendations of glass manufacturer. Provide thicknesses indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by glass manufacturer for application indicated. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS,SCHEDULE A. Type CTIG: 1"thick insulated Low-E glass,with 1/4"thick tempered solar clear exterior lite, 1/2" air space, and 1/4"thick tempered clear interior lite with minimum shading coefficient of 0.46 and solar heat gain coefficient of 0.39. B. Type CTG: 1/4" thick tempered clear tempered glass. C. Type 1/2 CTG: 1/2" thick tempered clear tempered glass. 2.4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES A. General: Provide products of type indicated and complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials with which they will come into contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service,as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and glass manufacturers for selection of glazing sealants and tapes which have performance characteristics suitable for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation. 3. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. 4. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products may include, but not be limited to: 1. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant: Provide manufacturer's standard,chemically curing type, complying with ASTM C920. 2. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape With Spacer Rod: GLAZING 08 80 00- 4 a. "PTI 303"Shim Tape; Protective Treatments, Inc. b. "Pre-shimmed Tremco 440 Tape"; Tremco Inc. 2.5 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with ASTM C 864, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. EPDM. 2. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide materials with proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. D. Spacers: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks, or continuous extrusions, as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size, shape and hardness recommended by glass and sealant manufacturers for application indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant, of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Require Glazier to inspect work of glass framing erector for compliance with manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, offsets at corners; for presence and functioning of weep system; for existence of minimum required face or edge clearances; and for effective sealing of joinery. Obtain Glazier's written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of glazing work. Do not allow glazing work to proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings which are not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for use. GLAZING 08 80 00- 5 B. All tinted glass shall have "tinted clean-cut edges". C. Extreme care shall be taken to produce and maintain edge strength at all stages of the operation. No striking,stoning, nipping,seaming,or grinding will be allowed. D. Properly separate glass sheets and protect edges with Celotex pads during handling, storing and transporting. 3.3 GLAZING,GENERAL A. Comply with combined printed recommendations of glass manufacturers, of manufacturers of sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those of referenced glazing standards. B. Glazing channel dimensions as indicated in details are intended to provide for necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances,and adequate sealant thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by job conditions at time of installation. C. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation; use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass with flares or bevels along one horizontal edge which would occur in vicinity of setting blocks so that these are located at top of opening. Remove from project and dispose of glass units with edge damage or other imperfections of kind that, when installed, weakens glass and impairs performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. 3.4 GLAZING A. Install setting blocks of proper size in sill rabbet, located one quarter of glass width from each corner, but with edge nearest corner not closer than 6" from corner, unless otherwise required. Set blocks in thin course of sealant which is acceptable for heel bead use. B. Provide spacers inside and out, of correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height), except where gaskets or glazing tapes with continuous spacer rods are used for glazing. Provide 1/8" minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width, except with sealant tape use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. C. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing standard, except where otherwise required by glass unit manufacturer. D. Set units of glass in each series with uniformity of pattern,draw, bow, roller wave and similar characteristics. E. Provide compressible filler rods or equivalent back-up material, as recommended by sealant and glass manufacturers,to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel weep systems and from adhering to joints back surface as well as to control depth of sealant for optimum performance, unless otherwise indicated. GLAZING 08 80 00- 6 F. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete "wetting" or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. G. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial "wash" away from glass. Install pressurized tapes and gaskets to protrude slightly out of channel,so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. H. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when installation is subjected to movement. I. Miter cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent pull away at corners;seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. J. Do no glazing in damp or rainy weather. K. Keep labels indicating manufacturer,quality and thickness on glass until installation has been approved by Architect. Labels shall be on interior face of glazing. Absence of label constitutes cause for rejection. L. Do not mark installed glass with an "X" or other symbol with any material whatsoever. Apply warning symbols using tapes or banners fastened to frame members only. M. Door Vision Panels: Install glass panes on setting blocks with glazing tape on each side of glass. Secure in place with stops supplied with doors or frames. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF GLAZING A. Install exterior insulated glass units from the exterior side of the building, a full floor at a time. B. Install interior laminated glass units from the interior side of the building. C. Do not begin installation of interior laminated glass units until: 1. All exterior insulated glass units on the floor have been installed and acoustically inspected and adjusted to the satisfaction of the acoustic consultant. 2. Dust free conditions have been maintained by the general contractor for at least 24 hours as required in Paragraph 3.8.A. 3. Cleaning of the glass and curtain wall has been completed as required in Paragraphs 3.8.B., 3.8.C.,3.8.D. 3.7 GENERAL PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove immediately by method recommended by glass manufacturer. A. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less often than once a month,for build-up of dirt,scum, alkali deposits or staining. When examination GLAZING 08 80 00- 7 reveals presence of these forms of residue, remove by method recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Remove and replace glass which is broken,chipped,cracked,abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. C. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. Wash glass by method recommended by glass manufacturer. 3.8 PROTECTION AND CLEANING OF CURTAIN WALL SYSTEM A. On a floor by floor basis, the general contractor must maintain a clean, dust-free environment in the interior working area adjacent to the exterior curtain wall, in a zone that covers the area where interior laminated glass units will be installed on the curtain wall system, beginning at least 24 hours prior to beginning installation of the interior laminated glass units on a floor, and continuing throughout the period required to complete installation of the interior laminated glass units on that floor. B. Within one hour of installing the enclosing each interior laminated glass unit clean and polish the interior-facing side of each exterior insulated glass unit to a streak-free shine. C. Within one hour of installing the enclosing each interior laminated glass unit thoroughly clean all surfaces of the curtain wall system that will be sandwiched between the exterior insulated glass unit and the interior laminated glass unit. D. Within one hour of installing the enclosing each interior laminated glass unit clean and polish the interior laminated glass unit to a streak-free shine. The critical side for this cleaning is the side that will be sealed into the curtain wall system and will be inaccessible after it is installed. - END OFSECTION 088000- GLAZING 08 80 00- 8 SECTION 08 91 19- LOUVERS AND VENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fixed blade wall louvers,exterior. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each product indicated. B. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, spacing of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and construction;free areas for each size indicated;and profiles of frames at jambs, heads and sills. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain louvers from a single source where alike in one or more respects with regard to type,design,and factory-applied color finish. B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with D1.2 "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum". 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the Work. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication of louvers and vents without field measurements. Coordinate wall construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Airolite Co. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52, 12 gauge (0.081") for blades and frames. LOUVERS AND VENTS 08 91 19- 1 B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals which are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined. 1. Use types,gages,and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. 2. Use Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated. C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of loading and installation indicated. 2.3 FABRICATION,GENERAL A. General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, materials,joinery,and performance. B. Preassemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill,to produce uniform appearance. D. Include supports,anchorages,and accessories required for complete assembly. 2.4 FIXED EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Fixed extruded aluminum wall louvers. 1. Model: Airolite No.SCH601,47 percent fee area. 2. Size: As shown on drawings x 6"deep with stationary blades. 3. Accessories: 1/2" mesh 16 gauge aluminum bird screen in removable extruded aluminum frame,attached to louver frames with clips or stainless steel screws. 4. Finish: Factory finished after assembly with a Kynar 500 finish, color as selected by Architect. B. Fixed extruded aluminum wall louver. 1. Model: Airolite No.T63815,36 percent fee area. 2. Size: As shown on drawings x 1.5"deep with stationary blades. 3. Accessories: 1/2" mesh 16 gauge aluminum bird screen in removable extruded aluminum frame,attached to louver frames with clips or stainless steel screws. 4. Finish: Factory finished after assembly with a Kynar 500 finish, color as selected by Architect. LOUVERS AND VENTS 08 91 19- 2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level,and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect louvers from damage of any kind during construction period including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of substantial completion. B. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction period,so that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 3.3 CLEANING A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers,which are not protected by temporary covering,to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period; do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and with a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse thoroughly and dry surface. -END OF SECTION 08 91 19 - LOUVERS AND VENTS 08 91 19- 3 SECTION 09 29 00 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of each type of gypsum drywall construction required is indicated on Drawings. Refer to Reflected Ceiling Plans for locations of full height interior partitions. B. This Section includes the following: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing and furring members. 3. Installation of access panels. 4. Toilet wet wall and shower tile backer units. 5. Sheathing(THERMAX_ci Exterior Insulation). 6. Gypsum sheathing. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel"for framing supporting gypsum board assemblies. 2. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for framing supporting gypsum board assemblies. 3. Division 07 Section "Building Insulation" for locations and types of insulation to be incorporated into gypsum board assemblies. 4. Division 08 Section "Access Doors"for doors incorporated into gypsum board assemblies. 5. Division 08 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for frames incorporated into gypsum board assemblies. 6. Division 08 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for gypsum shaft wall assemblies. 7. Division 09 Section "Painting"for finishing of exposed gypsum board assemblies. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA 505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this section or other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00- 1 A. Product data from manufacturers for each type of product specified,including test data to certify compliance of metal framing components and exterior metal framing system with specified requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain steel framing members and each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. C. Provide products that have been GREENGUARD Indoor Air Quality Certified by the GREENGUARD Environmental Institute under the GREENGUARD Standard for Low Emitting Products and GREENGUARD for Children&Schools product certification program. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,direct sunlight,surface contamination,corrosion,construction traffic and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging,elevated minimum 1-1/2"above floor. C. Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C), nor more than 95 degree F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilate building spaces to remove excessive moisture. Avoid hot, dry drafts to prevent materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Dale Industries, Inc. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. Unimast, Inc. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00- 2 d. USG Industries. e. Dietrich. 2. Grid Suspension Systems: a. Chicago Metallic Corp. b. National Rolling Mills Co. c. USG Interiors, Inc. 3. All Other Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. 4. Toilet Wet Wall and Shower Tile Backer Units: a. Durock Brand Cement Board, United States Gypsum Co. 5. Sheathing(THERMAX_ci Exterior Insulation): a. The Dow Chemical Company. 6. Gypsum Sheathing: a. G-P Gypsum Corporation. b. United States Gypsum Company(USG). c. CertainTeed. 7. Drywall Moldings: a. Fry Reglet. 2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. General: Provide components which comply with ASTM C 754 for materials and sizes, unless otherwise indicated. B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641,Class 1 zinc coating,soft temper. D. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 25 gauge minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and 7/16 inch wide flanges,electro galvanized, and as follows: 1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep,475 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. XXXXX-XX 09 29 00- 3 2. Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep,300 lbs per 1000 ft., unless otherwise indicated. E. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, depth of 7/8 inch, and minimum 25 gauge thickness of base(uncoated)metal. F. Grid Suspension System: ASTM C 645, manufacturer's standard grid suspension system composed of 25 gauge main beams and cross furring members which interlock to form a modular supporting network. All members to have painted finish. 2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING FOR INTERIOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Steel Studs and Runners, Except where noted as cold-formed metal framing: ASTM C 645,with flange edges of studs bent back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16" minimum lip (return), with ASTM A525 G40 galvanized coating, and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base(uncoated) metal and for depth: 1. Refer to drawings for depth;25 gauge unless otherwise indicated or recommended by stud manufacturer for unbraced stud height. a) Bottom runner,20 gauge. b) All unbraced partitions,where gypsum board is installed on one side of studs ONLY, 20 gauge (chase walls with gypsum board diaphrams are considered braced; partitions at expansion joints are not considered braced). c) All unbraced partitions,exceeding 12-feet in unbraced height shall be minimum 20 gauge in accordance with manufacturer's stud span recommendations. d) Studs at openings exceeding 4-feet in width shall have stud gauge increased to 20 gauge. e) Studs with wet wall and shower tile backer units(cement board)shall be minimum 20 gauge. f) 2-1/2"studs,20 gauge. g) Studs with upper cabinets shall be minimum 20 gauge. B. Steel Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, hat-shaped, 7/8" depth and 25 gauge minimum thickness of base(uncoated)metal. C. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved;complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 1. Type S-12, buglehead screws, 1"and 1-1/4"self-drilling type,cadmium or zinc plated. D. Curved Wall Track: Equal to Flex-C Trac, Flex-Ability Concepts of Edmond, Oklahoma (www.flexc.com). 2.4 GYPSUM BOARD A. General:Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end- to-end joints,5/8"thick unless detailed otherwise. B. Gypsum Wallboard:ASTM C1396,and as follows: xxxxx-xx 09 29 00- 4 1. Standard and Water Resistant Types: a. Type:Type X. b. Edges:Tapered. c. Available Products:Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1) "Fire-Shield X"; Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. 2) "SHEETROCK" Brand "Type X FIRECODE" Gypsum Panels; United States Gypsum Co. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Cornerbead and Edge Trim for Interior Installation: Provide corner beads,edge trim and control joints which comply with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: 1. Material: Formed metal complying with the following requirement: a. Sheet steel coated with zinc by hot-dip or electrolytic processes,or with aluminum. A. One-Piece Control Joint: Formed with vee-shaped slot per Fig. 1 in ASTM C 1047, with slot opening covered with removable strip,equal to USG No.093. 2.6 TOILET WET WALL AND SHOWER TILE BACKER UNITS AT TOILETS A. Provide tile backer accessories and units of thickness and width indicated below, and in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: 5/8"inch. 2. Size: 4 feet by 8 feet. 3. Accessories: Provide screws,adhesives,joint tape,etc. as required. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Durock Brand Cement Board Systems, United States Gypsum Co. 2.7 SHEATHING A. Sheathing:Glass-fiber-reinforced enhanced polyisocyanurate foam core sheathing faced with nominal 4 mil embossed white or blue acrylic-coated aluminum on one side and 1.25 mil embossed aluminum on the other side,complying with ASTM C1289 and meeting the following physical properties: 1. ASTM C1289 Type 1,Class 2 2. Compressive Strength(ASTM 01621):25 psi, minimum. XXXXX-XX 09 29 00- 5 3. Aged Thermal Resistance(ASTM C518, measured at Mean Temp of 75F): R-6.5 at 1 inch of thickness with 15 year thermal warranty 4. Flexural Strength(ASTM C203): Minimum 40 psi. 5. Water Absorption (ASTM C209): Maximum.1.0 percent by volume. 6. Water Vapor Permeance(ASTM E96):<0.3 perms. 7. Maximum Use Temperature: 250 degrees F. B. Acceptable Products:The Dow Chemical Company"THERMAXIM ci Exterior Insulation." 1. Panel Size:4'-0"wide x 8'-0" long,square edge,shiplap(shiplap on thickness of 1.55"and greater) panels. 2. Thickness and Stabilized R-Value: 1.55 inch thickness, R-10.1 C. Accessories: 1. Fasteners: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturer's recommended polymer or other corrosion-protective coated steel screw fasteners for anchoring sheathing to metal wall framing. Fastener length and size based on wall sheathing thickness. a. Acceptable Products:Wind-lock Corporation"ci-Lock fastener/washer Steel Series Selection"with 1-3/4 inch diameter high-grade plastic washers 2. Insulation Flashing Tape: Provide insulation manufacturer's recommended board joint tape for sealing joints,seams and veneer tie penetrations through the insulation layer. a. Acceptable Products:The Dow Chemical Company"WEATHERMATE M Straight Flashing 4 inch width with butyl rubber adhesive 3. Penetration Filler: Provide insulated sheathing manufacturer's recommended polyurethane foam for sealing penetrations of insulated sheathing. a. Acceptable Products:The Dow Chemical Company"Great Stuff'"Pro Gaps& Cracks"single-component polyurethane insulating foam sealant. b. Acceptable Products:The Dow Chemical Company"Great Stuffy"Pro Window& Door"single-component polyurethane low-pressure foam sealant 4. Gap Air Infiltration Filler: Two Component,Quick Cure Polyurethane Foam: a. Acceptable Products: The Dow Chemical Company FROTH-PAKTM Foam Insulation two component, quick-cure polyurethane foam 1) NFPA 286 Approval for Exposed use to the interior of the building without the need for a 15-min thermal barrier 2) ASTM E-84 Class A 2.8 GYPSUM SHEATHING XXXXX-XX 09 29 00- 6 A. Sheathing: Paperless sheathing panel made of water resistant and silicone-treated core, surfaced with glass mat facing and alkali-resistant coating, complying with ASTM C 79 and requirements indicated below. 1. Thickness:5/8 inch. 2. Size: 4 feet by 8 feet,9 feet,or 10 feet. 3. Edges:Square B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products which may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Dens-Glass Gold Sheathing, G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2. Fiberock" Brand Aqua ToughT"Sheathing, United States Gypsum Company (USG). 3. GlasRoc_Sheathing,CertainTeed Corporation. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum drywall construction which comply with referenced standards and the recommendations of the manufacturer of the gypsum board. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING,GENERAL A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in the work and for support of fixtures,equipment services, heavy trim, handrails,grab bars,toilet accessories,visual display boards, furnishings, etc., and similar construction to comply with details indicated and with recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer, or if none available, with "Gypsum Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co. C. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS A. Secure hangers to structural support by connecting directly to structure where possible. 1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to metal roof deck. B. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. C. Keep hangers and braces 2 inches clear of ducts,pipes and conduits. XXXXX-XX 09 29 00- 7 D. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. E. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard. 1. Wire Hangers: 8 gauge,galvanized,4 ft.on center. 2. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 1-1/2 inch, 4 ft. on center, and within 6" of parallel partitions. 3. Rigid Furring Channels(Furring Members): 16 inches on center. F. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 ft. as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. G. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. H. Install resilient isolation system hangers in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural elements where gypsum drywall stud system abuts other construction, and anchor with approved power driven fasteners spaced 24" o.c. Where bottom track rests on top of a masonry partition, fasten into masonry bond beam spaced 12"so.c. Locate top track as follows: 1. Interior Partitions Scheduled to Extend to Structure: Locate top track to bottom of framing, bolted or anchored to structure with approved power driven fasteners spaced not more than 24" o.c. 2. All Other Interior Partitions: Align top track 4" above highest scheduled ceiling height where partition occurs. Brace all track to building framing members at 48" o.c., staggered where possible, utilizing metal stud sections screwed to track and screwed or anchored to building structure with power driven fasteners. Intersecting partitions may be braced to each other with a diagonal brace across head tracks located maximum 48" from intersection. B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surface does not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing. C. Position all studs vertically in the runners. Anchor studs to bottom and top track as follows: 1. Partitions scheduled to extend to structure: Anchor each stud at top track and bottom track. 2. Slip joint - Where studs are confined vertically by structural elements or other fixed building components at both top and bottom, use long leg runner for top track, hold top of studs minimum 1"below top of runner,and secure each stud to top runner with a single screw. 3. All Other Interior Partitions: Screw attachment of stud to track is not required,except at corners, door or window openings, partition intersections,etc. D. Locate studs no more than 2" from all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners, and other construction. Install double studs at all door or window jambs and at leading edge of )000(X-XX 09 29 00- 8 all wingwalls. Frame head and sill of openings through partitions with cut to length section of track,screw attached through overlapping flanges into adjacent studs. E. Install steel studs and furring at not more than 16 inches on center. F. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum boards can be installed in the direction opposite to that of the flange. 3.5 APPLICATION OF GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standard: Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board. C. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches. D. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At high walls (over 12'-0"), install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. E. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. F. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position boards so that like edges abut,tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. G. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts. 3.6 METHODS OF GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board to abut wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible. 2. On partitions/walls 12'-0" or less in height, apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints. 3. In restrooms, kitchens, custodian closets(at mop sinks) or other locations where water is present, install water-resistant gypsum board. 4. In all other areas, install standard gypsum board. 5. All gypsum board to have tapered edges to produce a flat surface. 6. Space fasteners 12"o.c.in field and 8"o.c.staggered along all vertical edges. B. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows: xXXXX-XX 09 29 00- 9 1. On partitions/walls, apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 16 inches with base layer joints. 2. Space fasteners 24"o.c. along all framing for base layer and 16" o.c.for face layer. C. Drive screws with an electric screw driver and provide a slight depression with screw heads below the surface of the wall board. Do not drive fasteners closer than 3/8"from edges of the board. D. Construct all chase walls following implicitly the recommended approved procedures of the United States Gypsum Company,supplemented by the details on the drawings. Gypsum board diaphragms shall be no closer to floor than 60". 3.7 INSTALLATION OF DRYWALL TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Install trim as directed and as required. Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor all trim by screw attachment to steel framing to prevent displacement. B. Install corner beads at external corners. C. Install metal edge trim where interior partitions abutt exterior walls. Connect edging to interior partition only. D. Install metal edge trim whenever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, except at floor. Provide type with face flange to receive joint compound except where"U"bead (semi-finishing type)is indicated. 1. Install "LC" bead where drywall construction is tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. 2. Install"LK"bead where substrate is kerfed to receive long flange of trim. 3. Install"L" bead where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum board is installed. 4. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed,gasketed, or sealant-filled (including expansion joints). E. Install control joints at locations indicated,or if not indicated, at spacings and locations required by referenced gypsum board application and finish standard, and approved by the Architect for visual effect. In addition,install control joints in walls which are in excess of 30'in length without penetrations. 3.8 TOILET WET WALL AND SHOWER TILE BACKER UNITS A. Install units,at all toilet wet walls,behind EWC's,and at all shower walls,vertically or horizontally with fasteners spaced 6"o.c.in field and along edges;stagger fasteners along vertical edges;tape all unit edges. B. Install backer units and joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and Tile Council of America, Inc., methods W244 and B415 for thin-set installation. 3.9 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum sheathing over exterior surface of drywall framing where noted on drawings. Fit boards tightly against each other and around openings. GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00- 10 A. Install gypsum sheathing horizontally with long edges at right angles to studs. Abut ends of boards over centers of studs and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing, two where possible. Fasten to each support to comply with manufacturer's recommended spacing, but install not less than spacing indicated for single layer gypsum board above. NOTE:GYPSUM SHEATHING TO BE INSTALLED PRIOR TO SHEATHING. 3.10 SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheathing over gypsum sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Fasten to exterior face of exterior metal stud wall framing using sheathing manufacturer's recommended type and length screw fasteners with washers. Abut panels tightly together and around openings and penetrations. 1. Install sheathing panels horizontally with blue aluminum facing to exterior. Use maximum lengths to minimize number of joints. Locate edge joints parallel to and on framing. Center end joints over supports and stagger in each course. Provide additional framing wherever panel joints do not bear against framing, plates or sill members. 2. Fasten panels to each support with fasteners spaced 12 inches on center at perimeter and 16 inches on center in panel field. Set back perimeter fasteners 3/8" from edges and ends of panel units. Drive fasteners to bear tight and flush with surface of insulation. Do not countersink. Perimeter fasteners can be detailed to bridge the gap of abutting board joints due to the 1.75" diameter of the washer used to fasten the board to the studs. Maximum of two board joints may be bridged per fastener. 3. Install flashing joint tape at end and edge joints with sufficient hand pressure to ensure seal and in accordance with sheathing manufacturer's joint sealing recommendations. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer,which ensures gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. -END OF SECTION 092900- GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 29 00- 11 SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT WALL BASE,AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Rubber wall base. 2. Rubber accessories. 1.1 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1. Certification by manufacturer that products supplied for installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds(VOC's). C. Samples for selection purposes in form of manufacturer's actual tiles and base showing full range of colors and patterns available for each type of material indicated. D. Maintenance data to be included in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 01. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Materials: Obtain each type, color, and pattern of material from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and installation accessories to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F(10 deg C)and 90 deg F(32 deg C). RESILIENT WALL BASE,AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13- 1 C. Store materials on flat surfaces. Move materials and installation accessories into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F(21 deg C)in spaces to receive materials for at least 48 hours prior to installation,during installation,and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C). B. Do not install materials until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Close spaces to traffic during installation. 1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install materials and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than one box of each type and color of resilient base installed. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Rubber Wall Base a. Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. 2. Rubber Accessories: a. Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. 2.2 RUBBER WALL BASE A. Products complying with FS SS-W-40,Type I,and with the following requirements. 1. Style: Cove style"B". 2. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 1/8 inch. 2. Height: 4 inches,as scheduled. 3. Lengths: Coils in lengths standard with manufacturer. RESILIENT WALL BASE,AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13- 2 5. Color(s): Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. 2.3 RUBBER ACCESSORIES A. Reducer Strip: Products of style suitable for use indicated with the following requirements: 1. Style:As selected by Architect. 2. Color: As selected by Architect. 2.1 EXAMINATION A. General: Examine areas where installation of materials will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for material installation and comply with manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section. B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive materials. B. Clean substrates to be covered by materials immediately before material installation. Following cleaning,examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. 2.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of material installation included in Project. B. Base: 1. Apply rubber wall base to walls,columns, pilasters,casework,and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece,with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 2. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 3. When using preformed corners, install before installing straight pieces. C. Accessories: 1. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. 2. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed at locations specified. 3. Apply resilient accessories to stairs as indicated and according to manufacturer's installation instructions. RESILIENT WALL BASE,AND ACCESSORIES09 65 13- 3 4. Install stair treads and risers per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing material installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient floor tile manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop tile to remove black marks and soil. B. Protect flooring and base against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer. 1. Coordinate final cleaning of flooring and base with Owner. After final cleaning,application of protective finishes to be by Owner. 2. After application of protective finishes by Owner, protection of flooring and base shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3. Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over floor. Place plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. C. Protect stair treads, landing tile,and base against mars, marks,indentations,and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Clean products specified in the Section not more than 4 calendar days prior to dates scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each area of Project. Clean products using methods approved by Owner. -END OF SECTION 09 65 13- RESILIENT WALL BASE,AND ACCESSORIES09 65 13- 4 SECTION 09 68 16-CARPET TILE 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes carpet tile,accessories,and installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile flooring, Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics,durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. B. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2,as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 6.1, "Site Conditions;Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY CARPET TILE 09 68 16-1 A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty,signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling,snags,runs,and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below,before installation begins,that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Not less than two percent(2%)of the total carpet tile installed. 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE A. Refer to Material/Finish Key on Drawings. 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES B. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant,mildew-resistant,nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated,that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 3. EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds,sealers, hardeners,and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges,depressions,scale,and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CARPET TILE 09 68 16-2 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds,according to manufacturer's written instructions,to fill cracks, holes,and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone,without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning,examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104,Section 13, "Carpet Modules(Tiles)." B. Installation Method:As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. C. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces,door reveals,closets,open-bottomed obstructions,removable flanges, alcoves,and similar openings. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104,Section 15,"Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09 68 16 CARPET TILE 09 68 16-3 SECTION 09 91 13 - PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting,and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. C. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not designated in "schedules," except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain unfinished. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If finish is not designated,the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting exposed pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron work, gas piping above roof, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Painting includes field painting of all vent pipes, fan units, and other items located on or above standing seam metal roof. D. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items not to be painted or finished include the following: a. Toilet enclosures. b. Acoustic/tackable materials. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. e. Anodized aluminum. f. Stainless steel. g. Bronze. h. Finish hardware,except where primed for painted finish. i. All glass, plastics,etc. j. Plastic laminate. k. Prefinished metal panels. PAINTING 09 91 13- 1 2. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriter's Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. E. Painting work includes gypsum board treatment. F. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel"for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications"for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 08 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for shop priming steel doors and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information,label analysis,and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating and finish system and application as scheduled. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. B. Samples of gypsum board texture for approval. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. B. Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the materials specified. C. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume,for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. PAINTING 09 91 13- 2 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing,and application. 1.6 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F(7 deg C)and 95 deg F(35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist, when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point,or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work are as follows: 1. Glidden Professional and Devoe Coatings manufactured by Akzo Nobel Paints(AN). 2. The Sherwin Williams Company(SW). 3. Benjamin Moore&Co. (BM). 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. (PPG). 5. MDC Wallcoverings(MDC). 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD WALL TREATMENT MATERIAL A. Laminating Adhesive: United States Gypsum, or equal, Perf-A-Tape joint compound. B. Tape: Perf-A-Tape joint system. C. Texture: Perf-A-Tape gypsum texture. 2.3 SEALANTS A. One-Part, Non-Sag,Acrylic Latex Caulking Compound: Pecora Corporation AC-20+Silicone. 09 91 13 - 3 2.4 SCHEDULE OF FINISHES FOR NEW SURFACES A. General: All materials will be products and manufacturers as scheduled, no equal. Where more than one product is listed, it is the Contractor's option as to which product to use. INTERIOR SURFACES: 1. GYPSUM BOARD WALLS Scheduled to be Painted Will be Spray Applied Gypsum"Orange Peel"or Rolled Textured,as selected by Architect, and Given: 1st Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 (4.0 mils wet, 1.0 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Waterbased Acrylic-Alkyd Eg-Shel, B33-8200 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Waterbased Acrylic-Alkyd Eg-Shel, 833-8200 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.4 mils dry per coat) 2. GYPSUM BOARD FRIEZES,CEILINGS,AND FURRINGS Scheduled to be Painted Will be Spray Applied Gypsum"Orange Peel"or Rolled Textured,as selected by Architect,and given: 1st Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Primer, B28W2600 (4.0 mils wet, 1.5 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Flat, B30-2600 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.6 mils dry per coat) 3. EXPOSED INTERIOR FERROUS METAL Scheduled to be Painted Including Miscellaneous Metals, Railings, Pickets, Post, Brackets, Hollow Metal Doors&Frames,etc.,Will Be Given: 1st Coat: S-W Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-310 Series (5.0 mils wet, 2.0 mils dry) 2nd Coat: S-W ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, B31 Series 3rd Coat: S-W ProClassic Waterborne Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, B31 Series (4.0 mils wet, 1.3 mils dry per coat) EXTERIOR SURFACES: A. EXPOSED EXTERIOR FERROUS METAL Scheduled to be Painted Including Miscellaneous Metals, Brackets,etc.,Will Be Given: Pigmented Polyurethane System: 1st Coat: Prime Coat:Alkyd anti-corrosive,quick dry:S-W Kern Kromik Universal Primer, B62WZ111 Series,at 3 to 4 mils dry, per coat. 2nd Coat: Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane,two-component, pigmented, matching topcoat. 3rd Coat: Topcoat: Polyurethane,two-component, pigmented,semi-gloss:S-W Acrolon 218 HS Acrylic Polyurethane, B65-650 Series,at 3.0 to 6.0 mils dry, per coat. PAINTING 09 91 13- 4 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with requirements for application of paint. Do not begin paint application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Secure color schedules for items before applying paint or finish. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,and similar items in place that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items if necessary for complete painting of the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 1. Clean surfaces before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete,concrete masonry units,and cement plaster, to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits,and sandpaper,as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small,dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before application of primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime,stain,or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling. c. When transparent finish is required,backprime with spar varnish. d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately upon delivery. 3. Ferrous Metals: Clean nongalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council. PAINTING 09 91 13- 5 a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non- petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 5. Gypsum Board: All gypsum board will receive joint treatment. Joints,screw heads and depressions will be treated with tape and joint compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. All coats of compound will be sanded prior to subsequent application. The final coat will leave the surface without pronounced rises, ready to receive texture or wall finish. a. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4:At all exposed areas except as noted below. 3. Level 5:At all curved or radiused walls and ceilings. C. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary,strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. D. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION OF TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer only to surfaces that are clean, dry,and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated to receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray equipment acceptable to texture finish manufacturer,produce a uniform texture matching approved field samples and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. PAINTING 09 91 13- 6 C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents,polyethylene film,or other means. If despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage. D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, that ensures completed gypsum board surfaces remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.4 APPLICATION OF FINISHES A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt,rust,scale,grease,moisture,scuffed surfaces,or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 2. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce an even smooth surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas as required to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms,and side edges same as exterior faces. 6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. 7. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch up painted. 8. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 9. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 10. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under PAINTING 09 91 13- 7 moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back,or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide a total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats,apply a prime coat of material as recommended by the manufacturer to material that is required to be painted or finished and has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps,irregularity in texture,skid marks,or other surface imperfections. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,sags, ropiness,or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent(Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.5 SEALANT INSTALLATION A. Install sealants per manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: PAINTING 09 91 13- 8 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified,sealed,and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative materials analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements,the Contractor may be directed to stop painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are incompatible. 3.7 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. Upon completion of painting,clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether to be painted or not,against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting,as acceptable to Architect. B. Provide "wet paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work after completion of painting operations. PAINTING 09 91 13- 9 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. -END OF SECTION 09 91 13- PAINTING 09 91 13- 10 SECTION 10 14 19 -SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior panel. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Section 0120 00-Allowances for payment of Signage under this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification sections. B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles,and finishes for each type of sign required. C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details of fabricated units. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories,and installation details. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing signs similar to those indicated for this Project,with a record of successful in-service performance,and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work. B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required,obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer. C. Design Concept: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific type and models indicated. Sign units by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Manufacturers of Interior Panel Signs: SIGNAGE 10 14 19- 1 a. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Interior Panel Signs 1. Face Panels: Shall be manufactured utilizing liquid photopolymer on .007 mil polyester backing and shall incorporate raised copy, braille and design accents into a single sign element. Tactile and braille graphics shall be raised a minimum of 1/32". Polyester back to be treated to assure paint adhesion. Face panel will be laminated to backing panel. 2. Backing Panels: Shall be 1/8"thick acrylic material. 2.3 INTERIOR PANEL SIGNS A. Type: Intouch. B. General: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs,shapes,sizes,and details of construction. 1. Produce smooth,even,level sign panel surfaces,constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally. Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished,free of saw marks. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Square cut. C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that complies with the requirements indicated for size,spacing,content,position,finishes,and colors of letters,numbers,and other graphic devices. All lettering shall be computer generated, accurately produced. 1. Style:To be determined by Architect. D. Raised Copy: Photographically produced, one piece polymer panel with integral raised letters, symbols,and braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks,conforming with TAS standards. 1. Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. 2. Braille: Grade 2. 2.4 FINISHES A. Interior Panel Sign Finishes: 1. Colors to be selected by Architect. 2. Characters and background of all signs shall have eggshell, non-glare finish. Braille characters shall be same color as background. 3. All signs to have painted edges. SIGNAGE 10 14 19- 2 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance. D. Wall Mounted Interior Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the methods indicated below: 1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured. 3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At completion of the installation,clean soiled sign surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from damage until acceptance by the Owner. -END OF SECTION 10 14 19- SIGNAGE 10 14 19- 3 SECTION 10 21 13.40-TOILET COMPARTMENTS(PHENOLIC ) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Uniform General and Supplementary General Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY: A. Toilet compartments located on Level 1. B. Types of toilet compartments include: 1. Phenolic-core. C. Styles of toilet compartments include: 1. Floor-anchored,overhead braced. 2. Wall-hung screens. D. Refer to Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking for toilet compartments. E. Refer to Division 10 Section"Toilet Accessories"for toilet accessories such as toilet tissue holders, grab bars,etc. 1.3 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical data for materials, fabrication, and installation, including catalog cuts of anchors, hardware,fastenings, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet partition assemblies not fully described by product drawings,templates,and instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other work. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For particleboard,documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde. D. Samples: At Architects request,submit full range of color samples for each type of unit required. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication where possible, to ensure proper fitting of work. However, allow for adjustments within specified tolerances where ever taking field measurements before fabrication might delay work. B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into other work for installation of toilet partitions and related work; coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. TOILET COMPARTMENTS(PHENOLIC) 102113.40- 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Global Steel Products Corp. 2. Ampco Products, Inc. 3. Metpar Corp. 4. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2.2 MATERIALS: A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material,or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable. B. Core Material for Partitions and Screens: Doors, panels, pilasters and urinal screens shall be fabricated from phenolic material comprised of multiple layers of melamine resin impregnated kraft paper,and a decorative surface sheet on both faces.All layers shall be fused together under high temperature and pressure. C. Finish:All components shall be water-resistant. Rough edges shall be machine sanded with a 45 degree radius edge and black finish with color as selected from full range of standard designer colors. D. Finish Thickness Requirements: 1. Doors and Pilasters:3/4". 2. Panels and Urinal Screens: 1/2". E. Mounting Hardware:Stainless steel stirrup brackets with brushed finish shall be secured to walls and pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant fasteners. Panels shall be through bolted with tamper resistant barrel nuts and shoulder screws. F. Overhead-Bracing: Continuous extruded aluminum,anti-grip profile,with clear anodized finish. G. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, or chromium-plated brass, with theft-resistant type heads and nuts. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized,cadmium-plated,or other rust-resistant protective-coated steel. 2.3 FABRICATION: A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels,screens,and pilasters fabricated for partition system, unless otherwise indicated. Furnish units with cutouts,drilled holes,and internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware,accessories, and grab bars,as indicated. TOILET COMPARTMENTS(PHENOLIC) 102113.40- 2 B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24"wide inswinging doors for standard toilet stalls and 32" wide (clear opening) outswinging doors at stalls equipped for use by handicapped. C. Phenolic-Core Compartments: 1. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel supports and leveling bolts at pilasters,as recommended by manufacturer to suit floor conditions. Make provisions for setting and securing continuous extruded aluminum anti-grip overhead-bracing at top of each pilaster. Furnish shoe at each pilaster to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. 2. Floor-Supported Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage devices, complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters, to permit structural connection at floor. Furnish shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage;shoes shall be secured in place. 3. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment in partition system, as follows: a. Hinges: Adjustable to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type,spring-action cam type, or concealed torsion rod type, heavy duty,to suit manufacturer's standards. b. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit, designed for emergency and handicapped access, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. c. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper,sized to prevent door hitting mounted accessories. d. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out-swing doors. Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors. D. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units of same construction and finish as compartments unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION: A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Install partitions rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2" between pilasters and panels, and not more than 1" between panels and walls. Secure panels to walls, pilasters to walls, and panels to pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets evenly spaced on the panel. Secure panels in position with anchoring devices specified. B. Overhead-Braced Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten installation with devices furnished. Secure overhead-brace to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors and adjust so that tops of doors are parallel with overhead-brace when doors are in closed position. C. Screens:Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure.Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact. D. Toilet compartments that serve handicapped plumbing fixtures shall be installed to meet all applicable provisions of the Texas Accessibility Standards,Article 9102,Texas Civil Statutes. TOILET COMPARTMENTS(PHENOLIC) 102113.40- 3 3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN: A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper operation. Set hinges on inswinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on outswinging doors(and entrance swing doors)to return to fully closed position. B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to prevent damage during remainder of construction period. -END OF SECTION 102113.40- TOILET COMPARTMENTS(PHENOLIC) 102113.40- 4 SECTION 10 28 00 -TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following toilet accessory items: 1. Paper towel dispensers. 2. Toilet tissue dispensers. 3. Sanitary napkin disposals. 4. Grab bars. 5. Mop and broom holders. 6. Paper towel dispensers/waste receptacles. 7. Framed mirrors. 8. Coat hooks. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 53-Miscellaneous Carpentry:treated wood blocking. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for each toilet accessory item specified,including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions,gages, profiles, method of mounting, specified options,and finishes. C. Samples: At Architect's option,full-size samples of each toilet accessory item for verification of design, operation, and finish requirements. Acceptable samples will be returned and may be used in the work. D. Schedule: Indicating types,quantities,sizes,and installation locations(by room)for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project. E. Setting Drawings: Where cutouts are required in other work, provide templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and for installation of anchorage devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00- 1 A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry;coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay. B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference and to assure proper installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet accessory items. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written 5-year warranty against silver spoilage of mirrors, agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible defects within warranty period. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.(B). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers' instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and level,firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved. C. Where applicable, install toilet tissue holders on toilet partitions with sex bolts, with adjacent units back to back. D. Mounting heights for toilet accessories that serve handicapped plumbing fixtures shall be installed at locations and at heights to meet all applicable provisions of the Texas Accessibility Standards,Art 9102,Texas Civil Statutes. All other accessories shall be installed as scheduled or as directed by the Architect. E. Install toilet accessories to comply with above requirements at locations as directed by Architect in field. TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00- 2 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Toilets will have the following as indicated on drawing(obtain quantities from drawings): Grab Bar (B) B-68137 Toilet Tissue Dispenser (B) B-2888 Sanitary Napkin Disposal (B) B-254 Combination Paper Towel Disposal/ (B)B-3961 w/liner Waste Receptacle Coat Hook (B)B-6707 Framed Mirror (B)B-290 24"x 48" B. Break rooms and other countertops with sinks shall have: Paper Towel (B)B26212 - END OF SECTION 10 28 00- TOILET ACCESSORIES 10 28 00- 3 SECTION 10 44 16- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 3. Mounting brackets. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Specification sections. B. Product data for each type of product specified. For fire extinguisher cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style,and materials. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Co. 2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors which comply with requirements of governing authorities. 1. Fill and service extinguishers to comply with requirements of governing authorities and manufacturer. 2. Fire Extinguishers: FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,CABINETS,AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 16- 1 a. Larsen Model MP10, 10 lb. capacity multi-purpose ABC type dry chemical extinguisher. 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS A. Provide brackets for fire extinguishers not located in cabinets which are designed to prevent accidental dislodgement of extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish. 1. Larsen Model B-2. 2.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated. B. Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for mounting conditions indicated,of the following types: 1. Recessed: Larsen Model 2409-R2(6%"depth) cabinet box(tub)fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth for flat edge trim. 2. Semi-recessed: Larsen Model 2409-6R(4"depth)cabinet box(tub)partially recessed in walls of shallow depth. D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered,welded,and ground smooth. 1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge(backbend). a. Manufacturer's standard flat,square,or rolled edge trim based on cabinet recessed depth. E. Door and Trim Metal: Stainless steel,ASTM A 167, ISS Type 302/304 alloy. F. Door Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction,coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1. Vertical Duo: Tempered glass. G. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide door pull, with a self- adjusting roller catch,and concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg. 2.5 FINISHES FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,CABINETS,AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 16- 2 2.6 STAINLESS STEEL FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET FINISHES A. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish. 1. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform directional, textured polished finish indicated,free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. B. Bright, Directional Polish: AISI No.4 finish. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this section in locations shown on drawings and mounted with bottom of extinguisher approximately 30" above finish floor or at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities. 1. Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure,square and plumb,to comply with manufacturer's instructions. -END OF SECTION 104416- FIRE EXTINGUISHERS,CABINETS,AND ACCESSORIES 10 44 16- 3 SECTION 10 51 13 - METAL LOCKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wardrobe lockers,including the following: a. Double Tier. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 3 Section "Structural Concrete"for concrete base. 2. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry"for wood furring and grounds. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data including materials, accessories, construction, finishes, assembly, and installation instructions for lockers. C. Shop Drawings: Layout and dimensions of metal lockers. Indicate relationship to adjoining surfaces and quantity/locations of TAS/ADA lockers. Show locker elevations and details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage requirements. D. Samples for Color Verification: Samples showing actual colors prepared on same material to be used for the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity: Provide metal lockers that are standard products of one manufacturer, with interchangeable like parts. Include necessary accessories,fittings,and fasteners. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean,dry, and ready for locker installation. B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling,storage,and installation. C. Deliver master and control keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13- 1 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins,that match products installed and are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Provide no fewer than ten(10)units of: a. Hooks of each type. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Lyon Metal Products, Inc. 2. Penco Products. 3. Republic Storage Systems Co., Inc. 4. List Industries. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (A 366M), commercial-quality, stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled carbon steel sheet,stretcher leveled,free of buckling,scale, and surface imperfections. B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel; slotless-type exposed bolt heads; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts. C. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard cadmium-plated or zinc-plated steel hooks and hanging rods. 2.3 WARDROBE LOCKERS A. Locker styles and locations: 1. Double Tier Lockers: 12"W x 18" D x 36" H,each tier. B. Body: Form backs,tops, bottoms,sides,and intermediate partitions of flanged 0.0239-inch minimum steel sheet. 1. Form exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers of 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet. C. Frames: Form channel frames of 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet. Form continuous integral strike on vertical frame members or weld 0.0897-inch minimum latch hooks to latch strike frame. D. Door: One-piece steel sheet,flanged at all edges, constructed to prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180 degrees. xxxxx-xx METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13- 2 1. Thickness: 0.0598 inch minimum. E. Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face,as follows: 1. Double-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 3 louver openings top and bottom. F. Hinges: Steel, full-loop, 5-knuckle tight pin, 2 inches high minimum. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2 factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed. 1. Provide at least 2 hinges for each door. G. Handle and Recessed Latch: Positive automatic, prelocking, pry-resistant latch and pull with rubber silencers; chromium-plated, heavy-duty, vandalproof lift-up handle, containing strike and eye for padlock unless other locking device is scheduled,and with latching action as follows: 1. Double-Tier Lockers: Not less than 2-point latching. 2. TAS Lockers: Provide with recessed handle which meets the requirements. H. Locking: Padlocks by others. 2.4 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items,unless otherwise shown: 1. Double-Tier Units: 1 double-prong back hook,and not fewer than 2 single-prong wall hooks. 2. Lockers 18 Inches Deep or Greater: Provide coat rod in lieu of back hook. B. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped, nonferrous-metal number plates with numerals not less than 3/8 inch high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates to each locker door,near top, centered,with at least 2 fasteners of same finish as number plate. C. Individually Sloping Tops: Manufacturer's standard 0.0239-inch minimum steel sheet sloped top. D. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard 0.0478-inch minimum steel sheet trim with concealed fastening clips. E. Filler Panels: 0.0478-inch minimum steel sheet,factory fabricated. F. Boxed End Panels: Manufacturer's standard 0.0598-inch minimum steel sheet end-finishing panels to conceal exposed ends of non-recessed lockers. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form a rigid, 1-piece structure. 1. Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from 1-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13- 3 A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. B. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories,except prefinished stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment. D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within 1/2 of the range of approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.7 STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPC-SP 1 to remove dirt,oil,grease,and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8 (Pickling), and phosphatize surfaces. B Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish consisting of a thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.1 mils on doors, frames,and legs,and 0.7 mil elsewhere. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install plumb, level, rigid,and flush. B. Assemble knock-down lockers with standard fasteners according to manufacturer's recommendations with no exposed fasteners on door faces and face frames. C. Anchor lockers to bases and walls at intervals recommended by manufacturer but no greater than 36 inches. Install anchors through back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion, using concealed fasteners. D. Install recess trim to recessed lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates. E. Install sloping top units to lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates. F. Install boxed end panels to conceal exposed ends of non-recessed lockers. G. Provide TAS lockers,quantity as required, in each room. 3.2 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND PROTECTION A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices are operating properly. METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13- 4 B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish stainless-steel and nonferrous metal surfaces. C. Protect lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit locker use during construction. D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace locker units that cannot be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. -END OF SECTION 10 51 13- METAL LOCKERS 10 51 13- 5 SECTION 11 00 00- MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fire Department Key Box. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of equipment specified, including details of construction-relative materials, dimensions, profiles,component parts, accessories,and finishes. C. Shop drawings from manufacturer for each type of equipment assembly, indicating layout, details, individual unit dimensions, required clearances, component parts, method of field assembly, and anchorage to surrounding construction. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of equipment from a single manufacturer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE DEPARTMENT KEY BOXES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to the following: 1. The Knox Company. B. Wall-Mounted Recessed Key Box: "Series 3200 Knox-Box with RMK",for recessed mounting. 1. Capacity: 30 cu.in. 2. 1/8"stainless steel lock cover. 3. Door gasket seal. 4. Door thickness 1/2". 5. Underwriters Laboratories(U.L.)listed and tested alarm tamper switch. 6. Finish:TGIC Polyester Powder Coat,color"Aluminum". 7. Contact the local Fire Department for specific ordering information. MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 11 00 00- 1 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Install all miscellaneous equipment at locations indicated, complying with all manufacturer's instructions. Set units plumb and level;use noncorrosive metal shims as required. B. Fire Department Key Box: Install in wall as work progresses,anchored securely in place according to manufacturer's written instructions and approved shop drawings, using attachment devices furnished with unit. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust after installation to ensure that units are level and that moving parts operate freely and in manner intended. Clean exposed surfaces and touch-up or replace damaged marred finishes. -END OF SECTION 110000- MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 1100 00- 2 SECTION 11 12 05-TRUCK SCALE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Above ground platform truck scale including field poured concrete deck, foundation and electrical infrastructure necessary to provide a complete operational scale system. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the foundation and approaches, place and finish the concrete deck, and provide all electrical infrastructure including conduits and other components required to complete the scale installation. The contractor shall purchase and install the scale in accordance with plans and specification. This specification section describes the scale and accessories. The CONTRACTOR will be required to install and calibrate the scale. B. Related Sections: 1. Section Concrete C. Division of Work: This specification section describes the work associated with the truck scales including responsibilities of the scale manufacturer and the CONTRACTOR. The responsibilities of the each party are outlined in the plans and specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the scale manufacturer to insure that the scale installation is complete and operational as described herein. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide the foundation, concrete deck and approaches for the 11 foot by 70 foot platform concrete deck motor truck scale with associated electronic controls. B. The platform scale shall have a clear and unobstructed weighing surface of not less than 70 feet long and 11 feet wide. C. The scale platforms shall have man-way access for maintenance and repair of load cells. D. The scale shall not incorporate any mechanical weighing elements, check rods, or check stays. The scale shall be completely self checking. E. The scale shall be of a flat top design that does not require beams above the deck. F. The scales shall have a gross weighing capacity of 100 tons. G. The scales shall be designed to accept vehicles that generate up to 60,000 pounds concentrated load capacity(CLC). TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-1 H. The scales shall be designed to accept an average daily traffic volume of up to 250 vehicles per day, 365 days per year. I. The scales shall be calibrated to 200,000 pounds by 20-pound increments. J. The junction boxes, load cells, load cell mounting hardware, cover bolts, and fasteners shall be constructed of stainless steel.The cables shall be stainless steel sheathed. K. The scales shall meet the requirements set forth by the current edition of the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook 44 (NIST H-44). The scale manufacturer shall provide a Certificate of Conformance(NTEP Certification)to these standards. L. The design and manufacture of the scale weighbridge, load cells, digital instrument, printer, and associated accessories shall be of one manufacturer as to maximize compatibility and availability of components.The manufacturer shall have a quality system that has been registered to the standards of ISO 9001. M. The manufacturer shall provide, with the bid proposal, a listing of major spare parts and their prices including (but not limited to) replacement load cells, digital instrument, printer, junction box circuit boards, and associated parts. N. Side rub rails will be provided by scale manufacturer. 1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the Scale manufacturer to ensure that the scale and load cell foundations are installed at the proper locations and to the proper dimensions. B. The scale foundation design will be provided by the scale manufacturer and shall be performed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the State of Texas. C. The foundation shall meet all local requirements and the minimum specifications as stated in this section. D. The foundation shall be designed to provide a maximum bearing capacity of 1,000 psf. E. The foundation shall provide a minimum of 3 inches of clearance to the weighbridge. F. The foundation shall be reinforced in all load-bearing areas. G. The foundation shall be constructed to provide positive drainage as indicated on the drawings. H. The foundation shall be designed to include approaches on both ends of the scales in accordance to local regulations and the guidelines of NIST H-44 as indicated on the drawings. TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-2 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit six(6)copies of MANUFACTURER'S literature describing scale and accessories. 2. Submit six (6) copies of scale detail drawings indicating clear dimensions to edges of structure, clear dimensions from top of deck to top of concrete foundations, number and sizes of conduit, wiring for operation,electrical characteristics of various items,etc. 3. Submit six (6) copies of scale foundation design including frost line consideration. 4. Submit six (6) copies of MANUFACTURER'S literature describing scale automation system components and accessories. B. Product Data: Submit six(6) copies MANUFACTURER'S literature describing scale and accessories for specified products. C. Manufacturer's Certificates:Certify Products meet or exceed the specified requirements. D. Warranty:Submit MANUFACTURER WARRANTY. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit installation instructions, servicing requirements, assembly views, lubrication instructions,and replacement parts list. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section shall have minimum five years documented experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three years documented experience and approved by MANUFACTURER. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Scale warranty shall be provided by scale manufacturer. 1.9 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600—Materials and Equipment. B. Prepare truck scale equipment and accessories for shipment to prevent entry of foreign matter into product body. C. Store products in areas protected from weather, moisture, or possible damage; do not store products TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-3 directly on ground;handle products to prevent damage to interior or exterior surfaces. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0150 00—Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls. B. Conduct operations not to interfere with,interrupt,damage, destroy, or endanger integrity of surface or subsurface structures or utilities,and landscape in immediate or adjacent areas. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination. B. Coordinate work with other construction, utilities within construction area and the operation of the facility. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE WEIGH BRIDGE A. The scale weighbridge shall have a concentrated load capacity of 60,000 pounds and a total capacity of 200,000 pounds. B. All welding shall be performed in accordance with the American Welding Society (AWS) Dl.1 Structural Welding Code. C. All welding shall be performed by welding operators that have been certified to the AWS Dl.1 Structural Welding Code. D. The weighbridge shall be designed to allow access to the junction boxes, load cell cables, base plates, and all foundation anchor bolts from the top of the scale platform. E. All required junction boxes, load cell cables, and interconnecting cables shall be installed and pre- wired prior to shipment by the manufacturer. F. The weighbridge and load cell mounting assemblies shall be designed to allow installation or replacement of a load cell with only one additional inch of clearance required between the top of the foundation and the bottom of the weighbridge on pitless installations. G. The weighbridge shall be shot blasted to a minimum SSPC-A-SP8 specification prior to painting. H. The concrete deck shall be a minimum of 8"thick reinforced with steel rebar. I. All enclosed chambers created by joining two steel members must be hermetically sealed to eliminate internal corrosion. J. All exterior metal surfaces of the scale shall have a two-part epoxy finish of Carboline 15L0, or approved equal, providing a total Dry Film Thickness of 6-8 mils. K. The finish shall be force cured in order to reduce risk of contamination and ensure durability of the surface. 2.2 LOAD CELLS A. Each load cell shall have a minimum capacity of 25 metric tons(50,000 pounds). TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-4 B. Load cells shall be certified by NTEP and meet the specifications as set forth by NIST H-44 for Class IIIL devices. The manufacturer upon request shall provide a Certificate of Conformance to these standards. C. Electronic load cells shall conform to the follow specifications: 1. The load cell assembly shall be constructed so as to perform as a rocker pin or rocker column. 2. The load cell shall be of stainless steel construction and hermetically sealed with a minimum NEMA 6P(submersible) rating. 3. The load cell shall contain integral Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVS) for all input and communication lines. Each TVS should contain self-resetting thermal breakers to protect the load cell components from voltage and current surges. 4. The load cell shall have a coating on all bearing surfaces to reduce load cell wear. 5. The load cell shall come equipped with a neoprene rubber boot to keep debris from contaminating the lower bearing surface. 6. The load cell may have a positive lock quick connector integral to its housing for connecting and disconnecting the load cell interface cable at the load cell. The connector shall be of glass to metal pin type construction to maintain a hermetic seal. The load cell may also be provided with a shielded cable with a polyurethane jacket. 7. The load cell shall have the following specifications: a. Hysteresis:±0.025%of full scale b. Non-Linearity: ±0.015%of full scale c. Creep(30 minutes): +0.017%of applied load d. Temperature range: -14° F+104°F e. Operating temperature range: -40°F+176° F 8. The load cell interface cable shall be stainless steel sheathed for environmental and rodent protection. 9. Load cells shall be either Fairbank Scales, Mettler-Toledo, Inc., Cardinal Scale Manufacturing Company,or Engineer approved equal. 2.3 SCALE INSTRUMENT A. The scale instrument shall be NTEP approved and meet or exceed the specifications set forth by NIST H-44 for Class II, Ill, and IIIL Devices.The manufacturer shall provide a Certificate of Conformance to these standards. B. The scale instrument shall be housed in an enclosure that is suitable for desktop mounting. The instrument housing shall be metal and have a NEMA 4 environmental rating. C. The scale instrument shall be capable of performing calibration, span, zero, and shift adjustment through software calculations that require no in scale adjustment. D. The scale instrument shall use English language prompts to lead the start-up personnel through all phases of set-up, calibration, and testing. Entry of information shall be accomplished through the TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-5 instrument's keyboard. E. The scale instrument shall be capable of communicating with the necessary load cell assemblies, to properly operate the new scale. F. The operator shall be able to enter up to 20 alphanumeric I.D. fields through the instrument keyboard. G. The scale instrument shall have gross/net weight switching and the ability to recall the gross or tare weights in the net mode. H. The scale instrument shall be capable of being programmed and calibrated in pounds or kilograms. I. The scale instrument shall have a standard communication port configured in bit serial ASCII, bi- directional, RS232C, or 20mA current loop.The port shall be selectable for on demand or continuous communications at up to 9600 baud.The port shall be capable of receiving a remote print command via serial communication or hard wire input. J. The scale instrument shall have a standard second data output port in the future that is capable of being configured in a bit serial ASCII, bi-directional, RS232C, 4 wire RS422, or 2 wire RS485 format with up to 9600 baud communication rates. K. The scale instrument shall have a standard 2.5 M/baud local area network for sharing printers and keyboard/displays between up to 2 scales or for communicating to a personal computer. L. The scale instrument shall have a transaction counter to automatically assign sequence numbers to transactions. M. The scale instrument shall output the following information: 1. Gross,Tare,and Net Weight 2. 12 x 40 character alphanumeric IDs 3. Transaction Counter 4. Time and Date N. The scale instrument shall be capable of being programmed for sign corrected net weighing so that all net weights are positive. 0. The scale instrument shall have automatic zero capture on power-up selectable to capture zero at a range of the full-scale capacity. P. The scale instrument shall have a programmable power-up time to delay operation until after a warm-up period. Q. The scale instrument shall have adjustable digital filtering. R. The scale instrument shall have adjustable automatic zero maintenance selectable for a range of displayed increments. S. The scale instrument shall have push-button zero selectable for a range of full-scale capacity. T. Tare, Zero, and Print functions shall be selectable while the weight display is changing. Motion detection shall be selectable for a range of increments. TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-6 U. The scale instrument shall support upload and download of reports, configurations, and custom programs via the Internet. V. The scale instrument shall provide a 10BaseT (RJ-45) port at a minimum and support the following protocols:TCP/IP,SMTP, HTTP, FTP, PPP. W. The scale instrument configuration, reporting and diagnostics shall be accessible from standard Microsoft Internet Explorer,V5.0 or higher. X. The scale instrument shall support automated maintenance planning, condition monitoring, calibration checking, fault recognition and recovery, and ISO compliance functions, including automatic e-mail notification of above problems. Y. The scale instrument shall provide a true embedded web-based server for configuration and diagnostics. Z. The scale instrument shall be UL/cUL listed. AA. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for installation of all necessary components, cable and conduit as necessary to provide communication and data transmission between the scale, traffic light, and scalehouse. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with the scale manufacturer to insure that the system is installed and operational per the specifications. BB. The scale instrument will be provided shall be provided by the scale manufacture. 2.4 JUNCTION BOXES AND CABLES A. All junction boxes shall be NEMA 4X rated and constructed of stainless steel. B. Junction boxes shall be accessible for inspection and maintenance from the top of the scale platform. C. Load cell and scale platform to scale instrument cables shall be stainless steel sheathed for environmental and rodent protection. 2.5 LIGHTNING PROTECTION A. A comprehensive lightning protection system shall be provided by the scale manufacturer. B. The system shall not require complicated wiring or devices to provide this protection. C. Major scale components including load cells, scale instrument, summing network and printer shall be included in the lightning protection system. D. Grounding of all scale components including load cells, scale instrument, summing network, printer, and accessories shall be to one common point. Multiple ground point systems are not acceptable. E. An AC line surge protector shall conveniently plug into a common electrical outlet and have receptacles for the scale instrument,ticket printer,and other scale accessories. F. Each AC line surge protector required shall have a single isolated grounding, hospital grade duplex receptacles,and an internal 15 amp circuit breaker. G. Verification of lightning protection system performance shall be available in writing from the manufacturer upon request. TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-7 H. The lightning protection system shall be a Fairbank Scales system or Engineer approved equal. 2.6 TRAFFIC SIGNAL Not Used 2.7 DOCUMENT PRINTER A. Scale Manufacturer will provide one (1) document printer. Printer must connect with scale instrument using a singular cable and shall not require any modifications to the instrument or printer. The printer must have a minimum print speed of 300 characters per second and the memory shall be able of storing up to 28,000 characters. The printer shall have an easily replaceable ink ribbon cartridge that shall be rated for a minimum life of 3 million characters. An adjustable paper guide shall be provided. TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-8 B. SCALE SOFTWARE C. Existing software at scalehouse is to be provided by the OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide automation software for all new devices that may either be compatible with existing software or new software to work in conjunction with all new and existing devices. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that concrete foundation is ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that all conduits are in place and correctly run. C. Verify that rough-in electrical characteristics are as required for proper operation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Manufacturer will install scale. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Upon completion of installation, manufacturer will examine, adjust and test scale for proper operation. 3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Provide manufacturer's field representative to prepare and start systems. B. Manufacturer shall adjust for proper operation within manufacturer's published tolerances. C. Provide services of manufacturer's representative to inspect installations and for performance testing. TRUCK SCALE 11 12 05-9 SECTION 12 24 13- ROLLER SHADES PART 1-GENERAL 1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated sunscreen roller shades located at all windows except at the scale room. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1053-Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and grounds for mounting roller shades and accessories. 2. Section 09 2116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Coordination with gypsum board assemblies for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. 3. Section 09 5100 - Acoustical Ceilings: Coordination with acoustical ceiling systems for installation of shade pockets, closures and related accessories. 4. Division 26- Electrical: Electric service for motor controls. 2 SUBMITTALS A. General:Submit in accordance with Section 01 3323 -Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles,features,finishes and operating instructions. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Mounting details and installation methods. 5. Typical wiring diagrams including integration of motor controllers with building management system, audiovisual and lighting control systems as applicable. C. Shop Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, product details, installation details, operational clearances, wiring diagrams and relationship to adjacent work. D. Window Treatment Schedule: For all roller shades. Use same room designations as indicated on the Drawings and include opening sizes and key to typical mounting details. E. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, one set of shade cloth options and aluminum finish color samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. F. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces. G. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications:Obtain roller shades through one source from a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in manufacturing products comparable to those specified in this section. ROLLER SHADES 12 2413 - 1 B. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum of ten years experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical burn. Materials tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. D. Electrical Components: NFPA Article 100 listed and labeled by either UL or ETL or other testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, marked for intended use, and tested as a system. Individual testing of components will not be acceptable in lieu of system testing. E. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642,ATCC 9644, ATCC9645. F. Environmental Certification: Submit written certification from the manufacturer, including third party evaluation, recycling characteristics, and perpetual use certification as specified below. Initial submittals, which do not include the Environmental Certification, below will be rejected. Materials that are simply 'PVC free' without identifying their inputs shall not qualify as meeting the intent of this specification and shall be rejected. G. Third Party Evaluation: Provide documentation stating the shade cloth has undergone third party evaluation for all chemical inputs, down to a scale of 100 parts per million, that have been evaluated for human and environmental safety. Identify any and all inputs,which are known to be carcinogenic, mutagenic, teratogenic, reproductively toxic, or endocrine disrupting. Also identify items that are toxic to aquatic systems, contain heavy metals, or organohalogens. The material shall contain no inputs that are known problems to human or environmental health per the above major criteria, except for an input that is required to meet local fire codes. H. Recycling Characteristics: Provide documentation that the shade cloth can and is part of a closed loop of perpetual use and not be required to be down cycled, incinerated or otherwise thrown away. Scrap material can be sent back to the mill for reprocessing and recycling into the same quality yarn and woven into new material, without down cycling. Certify that this process is currently underway and will be utilized for this project. I. Perpetual Use Certification: Certify that at the end of the useful life of the shade cloth,that the material can be sent back to the manufacturer for recapture as part of a closed loop of perpetual use and that the material can and will be reconstituted into new yarn,for weaving into new shade cloth. Provide information on each shade band indicating that the shade band can be sent back to the manufacturer for this purpose. J. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up (manual shades only) of one roller shade assembly for evaluation of mounting, appearance and accessories. 1. Locate mock-up in window designated by Architect. 2. Do not proceed with remaining work until, mock-up is accepted by Architect. 4 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, fire-test-response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings and in the Window Treatment Schedule. 5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use. ROLLER SHADES 12 24 13- 2 6 WARRANTY A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating twenty-five year limited warranty. B. Roller Shade Motors and Motor Control Systems: Manufacturer's standard non-depreciating five-year warranty. C. Roller Shade Installation:One year from date of substantial completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or other means to reach inaccessible areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: MechoShade Systems, Inc. (phone 718.729.2020 web site: www.mechoshade.com). 2 SHADE CLOTH A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: MechoShade Systems, Inc., ThermoVeil group, single thickness non-raveling 0.030-inch thick vinyl fabric, woven from 0.018-inch diameter extruded vinyl yarn comprising of 21 percent polyester and 79 percent reinforced vinyl, in colors selected from manufacturer's available range. 1. Dense Basket Weave: "1300 series", 5 percent open, 2 by 2 dense basket-weave pattern. 2. Color: Selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 3 SHADE BAND A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the hem weight, hem-pocket, shade roller tube,and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1. Hem Pockets and Hem Weights: Fabric hem pocket with RF-welded seams(including welded ends) and concealed hem weights. Hem weights shall be of appropriate size and weight for shade band. Hem weight shall be continuous inside a sealed hem pocket. Hem pocket construction and hem weights shall be similar,for all shades within one room. 2. Shade band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. Roller tubes less than 1.55 inch in diameter for manual shades, and less than 2.55 inches for motorize shades are not acceptable. b. Provide for positive mechanical engagement with drive/ brake mechanism. c. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off" spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. d. Mounting spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes,staples, and/or rivets. e. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of: adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets are not acceptable. 4 SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate units to completely fill existing openings from head to sill and jamb-to-jamb, unless specifically indicated otherwise. ROLLER SHADES 12 2413 - 3 B. Fabricate shadecloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch in either direction per 8 feet of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. Fabricate hem as follows: 1. Bottom hem weights. 2. Concealed hemtube. 3. Exposed hemtube. 4. Exposed blackout hembar with light seal. 5. Exposed blackout hembar with polybond seal. C. Provide battens in standard shades as required to assure proper tracking and uniform rolling of the shadebands.Contractor shall be responsible for assuring the width-to-height(W:H)ratios shall not exceed manufacturer's standards or, in absence of such standards, shall be responsible for establishing appropriate standards to assure proper tracking and rolling of the shadecloth within specified standards. Battens shall be roll-formed stainless steel or tempered steel, as required. D. For railroaded shadebands, provide seams in railroaded multi-width shadebands as required to meet size requirements and in accordance with seam alignment as acceptable to Architect. Seams shall be properly located. Furnish battens in place of plain seams when the width, height, or weight of the shade exceeds manufacturer's standards. In absence of such standards, assure proper use of seams or battens as required to, and assure the proper tracking of the railroaded multi-width shadebands. E. Provide battens for railroaded shades when width-to-height (W:H) ratios meet or exceed manufacturer's standards. In absence of manufacturer's standards, be responsible for proper use and placement of battens to assure proper tracking and roll of shadebands. 5 COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements: 1. Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. 2. Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. 3. Use only Delrin engineered plastics by DuPont for all plastic components of shade hardware. Styrene based plastics, and/or polyester, or reinforced polyester will not be acceptable. B. Motorized Shade Hardware and Shade Brackets: 1. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel, or heavier, thicker,as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 2. Provide shade hardware system that allows for field adjustment of motor or replacement of any operable hardware component without requiring removal of brackets, regardless of mounting position (inside, or outside mount). 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands offset by a maximum of 8-45 degrees from the motor axis between shade bands(4-22.5 degrees)on each side of the radial line, by a single shade motor(multi-banded shade,subject to manufacturer's design criteria). C. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 1. Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. ROLLER SHADES 12 24 13- 4 2. Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll,which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 3. Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind. 4. Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi-banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 5. Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve,for a 12 degrees total offset. 6. Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable. 7. Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 8. Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades. b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch steel pin. c. The brake shall be an over -unning clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. in the stopped position. d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly,which assures a smooth,non-jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. D. Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. minimum breaking strength. Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. 6 SHADE MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM A. Shade Motors: 1. Tubular,asynchronous(non-synchronous) motors,with built-in reversible capacitor operating at 110v AC (60hz), single phase, temperature Class A, thermally protected, totally enclosed, maintenance free with line voltage power supply equipped with locking disconnect plug assembly furnished with each motor. 2. Conceal motors inside shade roller tube. 3. Maximum current draw for each shade motor of 2.3 amps. 4. Use motors rated at the same nominal speed for all shades in the same room. B. Total hanging weight of shade band shall not exceed 80 percent of the rated lifting capacity of the shade motor and tube assembly. 7 MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEMS A. IQ/MLC: Specifications and design of shade motors and motor control system are based on the IQ/MLC motor logic control system manufactured by MechoShade Systems, Inc. Other systems ROLLER SHADES 12 2413 - 5 may be acceptable provide that all of the following performance capabilities are provided. Motor logic control systems not in complete compliance with these performance criteria shall not be accepted as equal systems. 1. Motor Control System: a. Provide power to each shade motor via individual 3 conductor line voltage circuits connecting each motor to the relay based motor logic controllers (IQ/MLC). b. Control system components shall provide appropriate(spike and brown out) over-current protection (+/- 10 percent of line voltage)for each of the four individual motor circuits and shall be rated by UL or ETL as a recognized component of this system and tested as an integrated system. c. Motor control system shall allow each group of four shade motors in any combination to be controlled by each of four local switch ports, with up to fourteen possible "sub-group" combinations via local 3 button wall switches and all at once via a master 3 button switch. System shall allow for overlapping switch combinations from two or more local switches. d. Multiple"sub-groups"from different IQ/MLC control components shall be capable of being combined to form "groups" operated by a single 3 button wall switch, from either the master port or in series from a local switch port. e. Each shade motor shall be accessible (for control purposes)from up to four local switches and one master switch. f. Control system shall allow for automatic alignment of shade hem bars in stopped position at 25 percent, 50 percent,and 75 percent of opening heights,and up to three user-defined intermediate stopping positions in addition to all up/all down, regardless of shade height, for a total of five positions. Control system shall allow shades to be stopped at any point in the opening height noting that shades may not be in alignment at these non-defined positions). g. Control system shall have two standard operating modes: Normal mode allowing the shades to be stopped anywhere in the window's opening height and uniform mode, allowing the shades to only be stopped at the predefined intermediate stop positions. Both modes shall allow for all up/all down positioning. h. Control system components shall allow for interface with both audiovisual system components and building fire and life safety system via a dry contact terminal block. i. Control system components shall allow for interface with external analog input control devices such as solar activated controllers, 24 hour timers, and similar items; via a dry contact terminal block. j. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall not require rewiring of the hardwired line voltage motor power supply wiring, or the low voltage control wiring. Reconfiguration of switch groups shall be accomplished within the motor control device (IQ/MLC). 2. Wall Switches: a. Three-button architectural flush mounted switches with metal cover plate and no exposed fasteners. b. Connect master wall switches to control system components via low voltage (12V DC) 6-conductor modular cable equipped with RJ-12 type connectors supplied, installed and certified under Division 16- Electrical. 8 ACCESSORIES A. Fascia: 1. Continuous removable extruded aluminum fascia that attaches to shade mounting brackets without the use of adhesives, magnetic strips, or exposed fasteners. 2. Fascia shall be able to be installed across two or more shade bands in one piece. 3. Fascia shall fully conceal brackets,shade roller and fabric on the tube. 4. Provide bracket / fascia end caps where mounting conditions expose outside of roller shade brackets. 5. Notching of Fascia for manual chain shall not be acceptable. ROLLER SHADES 12 24 13- 6 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3 INSTALLATION A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions,and located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances for window operation hardware. B. Turn-Key Single-Source Responsibility for Motorized Interior Roller Shades: To control the responsibility for performance of motorized roller shade systems, assign the design, engineering, and installation of motorized roller shade systems, motors, controls, and low voltage electrical control wiring specified in this section to a single manufacturer and their authorized installer/dealer. The Architect will not produce a set of electrical drawings for the installation of control wiring for the motors, or motor controllers of the motorized roller shades. Power wiring (line voltage), shall be provided by the roller shade installer/dealer, in accordance with the requirements provided by the manufacturer. Coordinate the following with the roller shade installer/dealer: 1. Main Contractor shall provide power panels and circuits of sufficient size to accommodate roller shade manufacturer's requirements, as indicated on the mechanical and electrical drawings. 2. Main Contractor shall coordinate with requirements of roller shade installer/dealer, before inaccessible areas are constructed. 3. Roller shade installer/dealer shall run line voltage as dedicated home runs (of sufficient quantity, in sufficient capacity as required) terminating in junction boxes in locations designated by roller shade dealer. 4. Roller shade installer/dealer shall provide and run all line voltage(from the terminating points) to the motor controllers, wire all roller shade motors to the motor controllers, and provide and run low voltage control wiring from motor controllers to switch/ control locations designated by the Architect. All above-ceiling and concealed wiring shall be plenum-rated, or installed in conduit, as required by the electrical code having jurisdiction. 5. Main Contractor shall provide conduit with pull wire in all areas,which might not be accessible to roller shade contractor due to building design, equipment location or schedule. C. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range. D. Clean roller shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Engage Installer to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate and maintain roller shade systems. ROLLER SHADES 12 2413 - 7 4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion. END OF SECTION ROLLER SHADES 12 24 13- 8 SECTION 31 10 00 -SITE CLEARING PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Removal of trees and other vegetation. 2. Topsoil stripping. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets,walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. B. Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place. 1. Identify existing plant life that is to remain and verify clearing limits are clearly tagged, identified,and marked in such a manner as to ensure their safety throughout construction operations. 2. Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's property. 3. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 SITE CLEARING A. General: The Contractor shall carefully schedule the site clearing and topsoil stripping so as to not leave unprotected surfaces any longer than necessary. The Contractor shall plan these activities and incorporate erosion protection measures into the overall erosion protection plan. B. Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not more than 12 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter,and without weeds,roots,and other objectionable material. 1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. a. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping. SITE CLEARING 31 10 00- 1 2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind erosion. 3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as specified for disposal of waste material. C Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing. 1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground surface. 2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.2 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS A. Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and unsuitable or excess topsoil from Owner's property. -END OF SECTION 31 10 00- SITE CLEARING 31 10 00- 2 SECTION 31 20 00- EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Excavating. 2. Preparing of subgrade for suspended slabs. 3. Fill materials and placement. 4. Erosion control during and after the construction period. B. Generally,types of areas to be treated are as follows: 1. Below Building on Void Forms: a. Clear site as required. b. Cut or fill existing grade to elevations shown on drawings. c. Compact grade. d. Place and compact Class 1 fill as required. ** NOTE:BACKFILL AT WALLS SHALL BE PER DETAILS ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS AND THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING SERVICES REPORT. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 02 32 00,"Geotechnical Investigation",for additional information/requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Excavation consists of removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. B. Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect,shall be at Contractor's expense. 1. Under footings, foundation bases, or piers, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation to excavation bottom,without altering required top elevation. EARTHWORK 31 20 00- 1 2. In locations other than those above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect. C. Additional excavation consists of excavation required in excess of that which is required by the contract documents. When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect, who will make an inspection of conditions. If Architect determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect. The contract sum will be adjusted by an appropriate contract modification. 1. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work. D. Subgrade: The undisturbed earth or the compacted soil layer immediately below topsoil materials. E. Structure: Buildings, foundations, slabs, curbs, or other man-made stationary features occurring above or below ground surface. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Perform earthwork in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Testing and Inspection Service: Owner will employ and pay for a qualified independent geotechnical testing and inspection laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. Notify the testing and inspection service at the appropriate stages of construction. For Contractor's information,test reports shall be submitted to the Architect, the Owner,the Engineer, and the Contractor,and shall include the following: 1. Field Reports; In-Place Soil Density Tests: One test per 5000 square feet of surface area, per compacted 8" of fill. 2. Plasticity Index and Moisture Content of Fill: One test per 5000 square feet of area to receive structure or site improvements, minimum two tests. 3. Toxicity: Test for toxicity of borrow materials, including topsoil, per EPA regulations. No toxic materials shall be allowed on project site. C. Construction Staking:All construction staking shall be performed under the direct supervision of a registered land surveyor,registered in the State of Texas. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Specification sections. 1. Test Reports: Per provisions of Paragraph 1.4, "Quality Assurance". 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS EARTHWORK 31 20 00- 2 A. Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. Copies of boring logs are in Divisin 02 of this project manual. B. Survey: Topographic surveys were made on the site, excerpts of which are indicated on the drawings. Use bench mark identified on the survey. Set and maintain a Temporary Bench Mark(TBM)on the project site. Survey is available for review in office of Architect. C. Existing Utilities: Call for a utility locate service to flag utilities. Locate existing underground utilities in areas of excavation work. If utilities are indicated to remain in place, provide adequate means of support and protection during earthwork operations. Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation, consult utility, Owner and Architect immediately for directions. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. D. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. E. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect structures,utilities,sidewalks,pavements,and other facilities from damage caused by settlement,lateral movement,undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 2. Restore any damage caused by construction operations to original condition without additional cost. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. General Description: Work consists of the removal and proper utilization of materials obtained by the Contractor. B. Classification: All borrow shall be free of clay lumps,rock,gravel,debris,waste,vegetation,toxic or other deleterious matter and classified, as follows. Any material used which does not meet these requirements shall be removed at the Contractor's expense: 1. Class 1: All fill material required within boundaries of the building shall have a plasticity index(PI) not greater than 20, a liquid limit(LL)not to exceed 30, and no rock greater than 2". D. Select Fill:All wall select backfill should consist of free draining granular backfill as required in the geotechnical engineering services report.The select fill,with a Liquid Limit(LL)less than 35 and a Plasticity Index(PI)between 6 and 15,should be placed in maximum nine inch lifts and compacted to a minimum of 95%Standard Proctor Density(ASTM D 698) within a moisture range of-2% to +2%of the optimum moisture. Compaction within five feet of the walls should be accomplished using hand compaction equipment and should be compacted between 90% and 95% of the Standard Proctor Density. E. Construction Methods: All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used, in so far as practical,in the formation of fill sections or embankments, or shall otherwise be utilized as indicated on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION EARTHWORK 3120 00- 3 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated,regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered,including earth,clay,shale, or rock. 3.2 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. General: Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Refer to Section 3122 00,"Trench Safety". 3.3 DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, slumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. 3.4 EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall control erosion of soil material from the site. Contractor shall protect all graded areas from erosion by placing protective measures on and downstream of the graded areas. B. The Contractor shall comply with all local and Federal erosion regulations and file an erosion control plan (if required)for approval prior to commencing work. 3.5 STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill where directed. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Treat topsoil to prevent growth of weeds prior to distribution on the site, or use approved methods to strip off minimum 6" depth of surface to remove all vegetation. 3. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill. B. Verify adequate on-site locations for stockpiled materials which are to be reused. If satisfactory areas are not available, secure off-site locations and relocate materials as required. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of EARTHWORK 31 20 00- 4 concrete formwork, installation of services,and other construction and for inspection. 1. Excavations for footings and foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 2. Excavations for Ground-Supported Site Improvements: Refer to Drawings. 3.7 BACKFILL B. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, waterproofing,and drainage matting. 2. Inspection,testing,approval, and recording locations of underground utilities have been performed and recorded. 3. Removal of concrete formwork. 4. Removal of shoring and bracing,and backfilling of voids with satisfactory materials. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 3.8 PLACEMENT AND COMPACTION A. General: All work described herein applies to all fill conditions. C. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions,soft or loose soils revealed by proof rolling and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills. Plow strip,or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 6 horizontal so that fill material will bond with existing surface or as directed by Architect. D. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers. E. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice. F. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, or conduit to required elevations. Prevent wedging action of backfill against structures or displacement of piping or conduit by carrying material uniformly around structures, piping, or conduit to approximately same elevation in each lift. G. Control soil and fill compaction,providing minimum percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below. Correct improperly compacted areas or lifts as directed by Architect if soil density tests indicate inadequate compaction. 1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry density, in accordance with ASTM D 698, Standard Proctor Test. EARTHWORK 31 20 00- 5 a. Under suspended floors and beams,and turf or planting areas,compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to minimum 95 percent maximum density. c. Excavations along the exterior face of grade beams at perimeter of building, compact subgrade and each layer of onsite backfill material to a minimum of 92 percent of maximum density. 2. Moisture Control: Maintain moisture content for general fill at a minimum of+2% above optimum and a minumum of +4% above optimum moisture for backfill at exterior face of grade beams. Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade or layer of soil material.Apply water in minimum quantity as necessary to prevent free water from appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction operations. a. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density. b. Stockpile or spread soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit compaction. Assist drying by discing, harrowing, or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value. 3.9 GRADING A. General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades. B. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes. Hold down finish grades adjacent to paved surfaces approximately 1 1/2" for installation of turf by others. C. Grading Surface of Fill under Building Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free of voids, compacted as specified,and to required elevation. For ground-supported slabs,provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2 inch when tested with a 10-foot straightedge. D. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Quality Control Testing During Construction: Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. B. If in opinion of Architect, based on testing service reports and inspection, subgrade or fills that have been placed are below specified moisture content, plasticity index, and density, additional compaction and testing will be performed until specified requirements are obtained. The cost for retesting will be borne by the Contractor. 3.11 MAINTENANCE A. Protection of Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. EARTHWORK 31 20 00- 6 B. Repair and reestablish grades in settled,eroded, and rutted areas to specified tolerances. C. Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse weather, scarify surface, reshape, and compact to required density prior to further construction. D. Settling: Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact,and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance,quality,and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible. 3.12 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste or excess materials, including unacceptable excavated material,trash,and debris,and dispose of it off Owner's property. -END OF SECTION 31 20 00.10- EARTHWORK 3120 00- 7 SECTION 31 22 00-TRENCH SAFETY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes the basic requirements which the Contractor must comply with in order to assure the safety and health of workers in a trench. B. The trench safety system shall be used for all trench excavation deeper than five(5)feet. 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. The Excavating and Trenching Operation Manual of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration, U.S. Department of Labor;Subpart P shall be the minimum governing requirement of this item and is hereby made a part of this specification. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and calculations to the Owner's Representative for approval of the following methods of trench safety systems. 1. Deviation from the allowable angle of repose resulting in a steeper slope. 2. Trench shield method. 3. Deviation from the allowable trench shoring,sheeting,and bracing method. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 METHODS A. There are three acceptable methods of trench safety system. 1. Angle of Repose Method: If the wall or face of the excavation is sloped to preclude collapse, slope shall not be steeper than 1-foot vertical to 2-feet horizontal. Any deviation from this angle of repose (26°34') resulting in a steeper slope must be designed by a registered Professional Engineer and submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval. The angle of repose method of trench safety system will not be permitted in the following situations. a. Within an existing paved street. b. Adjacent to/or crossing existing structures, utilities,others. 2. Trench Shield Method: Where trench boxes or shields are used they shall be designed and certified by a Registered Professional Engineer and submitted to the Owner's Representative TRENCH SAFETY 31 22 00- 1 for approval. They shall be constructed and maintained in a manner which will provide protection equal to or greater than the sheeting or shoring required for the trench. In all cases if the top of the trench box is below the existing grade,that portion above the trench box shall be sloped back to the angle of repose of 1-foot vertical to 2-feet horizontal unless as specified in Part A above. 3. Trench Shoring, Sheeting, and Bracing Method: For depths greater than 5 feet all members shall be sized and spaced in accordance with the 15 to 20 feet deep all kinds or conditions of earth category in Table P-2 of OSHA Excavating and Trenching Operations Manual. Any deviation shall be designed by a registered Professional Engineer and furnished to the Owner for approval. All materials shall be of structural or construction grade. -END OF SECTION 3122 00- TRENCH SAFETY 3122 00- 2 SECTION 3123 00- EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Divisions 00 and 01 Specification sections apply to this section. B. Related Sections 1. Division 31 Section "Trench Safety". 2. Division 31 Section "Earthwork". 1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent of excavation, backfilling and compacting for utilities work required by this section is indicated on drawings and by requirements of this section. B. This section includes excavation, backfilling and compacting for buried building piping and site utility piping systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Initial bedding material or granular cradle is clean gravel or crushed stone placed and compacted from at least 6"below bottom of pipe or conduit to centerline of pipe or conduit or as shown on plan details. B. Final bedding material or selected granular backfill is clean gravel or crushed stone placed and compacted from centerline of pipe or conduit to at least 6"above top of pipe or conduit or as shown in plan details. C. Structural areas are areas where any type of foundation slab,roadway,building,structure,or sidewalk is to be constructed. D. Non-structural areas are landscaped areas with no structural area features. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM D698-Tests for moisture-density relations for soils,using 5.5 lb. rammer and 12"drop. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Notify utility companies and Facility Utility Engineer for exact location of all utilities prior to excavating. B. Protect all existing utilities serving the existing facilities. Do not interrupt service. Cooperate with the User and others having jurisdiction in keeping respective services and facilities in operation. C. Barricade open excavations and post with warning lights. Operate warning lights during hours of darkness. D. Protect all adjacent work,structures,and property. Damage to adjacent work,structures,or property shall be reimbursed in full. All benchmarks, monuments and other reference points shall be protected, maintained, and if disturbed or destroyed, must be replaced as directed by the Architect/Engineer. EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 31 23 00- 1 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Bedding Material: Materials used for water and sanitary sewer shall be in accordance with the City Standard Specifications. The material for storm pipe shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. Clean gravel or crushed stone conforming to the following gradation shall be used for all other utilities: 1. Initial and Final Pipe and Conduit Bedding Material Percent Passing Pipe or Conduit Maximum Minimum No. 200 U.S.Std. Size Size Size Square Mesh Sieve 4"and less 3/8" 1/8" 0 5"thru 42" 3/4" 1/8" 0 48"and over 1" 1/8" 0 2. Structures Bedding Material Under 48"square or diameter 3/4" 1/8" 0 48"square or diameter and larger 1" 1/8" 0 B. Fill Material: Conform to the following: 1. Structural Areas: Well-graded sands and gravels; gravel sand mixtures; crushed, well-graded rock;little or no fines. Plasticity Index: Non-plastic.Gradation: Percent passing No.200<_5% 2. Non-Structural Areas: Poorly graded gravels and sands;silty sands and gravels;little or no fines. Plasticity Index: Non-plastic to 12. Gradation: Percent passing NO. 200<_ 12%. 3. Clay Plug: Existing unscheduled clean excavated soil material,free of rock. C. Refer to Embedment and Trench Backfill Detail for Foundation Drainage System embedment and trench backfill. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Establish line,grade and cuts to attain invert elevations shown on the drawings. EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 3123 00- 2 B. Establish the location and identify all existing utility lines,drainage and sewer lines at point of connection and all interference. C. Examine the areas and conditions under which trenching,backfilling,and compaction will be performed and notify the Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work and request resolution. 3.2 EXCAVATING A. Perform excavating in a manner which will provide the depth for installation at pipe or conduit plus allowance for the bedding material. Excavated trenches shall be cut wide enough to provide adequate working space to align and install pipe or conduit, make up and inspect joints and allow placing and compaction of bedding material. B. Where trenches are excavated through existing paved areas the paving shall be saw-cut to a depth of 1-1/2 inches minimum on all sides of the excavation and the paving shall be removed along the saw-cut lines. When sawing would occur less than three feet from an existing pavement joint the paving shall be removed back to the existing pavement joint. Pavement shall be sawed and removed so that the opening is at least 12 inches wider than the top of the trench on each side to prevent undermining of pavement. C. Over excavation shall be brought back to proper grade with bedding material compacted as specified herein for backfill. D. When unsuitable soils are encountered during excavation which will not provide satisfactory supportive strength,such soil shall be removed as directed by Architect/Engineer and placed in an off-site disposal area furnished by Contractor. This unsuitable soil shall be replaced with suitable soil and compacted to meet the density requirements hereinafter specified under"Backfilling". E. Trench excavation shall include the removal of all earth,rock,concrete rubble or other materials encountered in performing the work. F. Where bell and spigot pipe is used,bell holes shall be excavated to ensure uniform bedding under the pipe. G. Excavating in Rock: 1. Rock is a natural solid mineral matter occurring in masses of one-half cubic yard or more which cannot be excavated and removed by the use of standard earth moving equipment. 2. Trenching in rock shall include the removal of all rock to attain the specified lines and grades. A tolerance of plus 0.1 feet and minus 0.5 feet will be allowed for new rock grades. 3. When rock excavations are carried below the specified elevations, or to a depth greater than directed by Architect/Engineer,the excavation shall be maintained and filled to meet the desired elevations. In trench excavations, the over excavation shall be filled with bedding material compacted as specified herein. 4. Explosives shall not be used in rock excavation. 5. All rock excavation shall be placed in an off-site disposal area furnished by Contractor. H. Sheeting,Shoring and Bracing: EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 31 23 00- 3 1. Provide sheeting, shoring, and bracing necessary to support earth banks, adjacent structures, services and utilities. Trenches shall be maintained in a safe condition at all times for the protection of all persons having access to the work. Sheeting shall not be withdrawn until the excavation is sufficient to prevent caving or damage to adjacent structures. I. Dewatering: 1. Labor and equipment to maintain all excavations free from water during the progress of the work shall be provided until backfill is completed. Water shall be disposed of in a manner that will not cause ponding in the work area or hamper or damage in any way the work of other crafts. Do not contaminate existing sewer system with sediment or debris from Contractor's pumping operations. Clean all such deposits from sewer system upon completion of the work. 3.3 BEDDING A. Bedding shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe or conduit at every point along its length except where it is necessary to excavate for bells and the proper sealing of joints. Such bell holes and depressions shall be dug after the bedding has been placed and graded. B. Unstable soil encountered at the bottom of pipe trenches shall be removed and replaced in accordance with this specification. C. Initial pipe bedding shall be placed and compacted from at least 6"below bottom of pipe to the centerline of the pipe. Final pipe bedding shall be placed and compacted from centerline of pipe to at least 6"above top of pipe. D. Omit bedding at locations where clay plugs are required. 3.4 BACKFILLING A. All excavations shall be filled or backfilled with suitable soil specified as rapidly as conditions will permit except that backfill or fill shall not be placed until work to be covered has been inspected and approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. Backfill or fill shall not be placed against frozen soils. 2. Clay plugs, minimum 24" in length and the full trench depth, shall be installed where piping excavations cross exterior wall lines and edge of pavement. Minimum 200'-0"between clay plugs. B. Backfill or fill placed against free standing concrete or masonry walls shall not be placed until concrete or mortar has attained adequate strength or until adequate bracing has been installed to resist loads imposed by backfilling. C. Suitable material that has been excavated from the trench or footing excavation may be used as backfill provided the compaction requirements are met. No large rock or stone larger than 1", or frozen material or trash or rubble of any kind shall be used in the backfill. D. Contractor for his convenience may use imported material for fill as specified,the material not used from the excavation shall be disposed of as directed by the Architect/Engineer. EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 31 23 00- 4 E. Excavations in cohesive soils shall be backfilled with at least 12 inches of cohesive soil,placed so that the top of the cohesive soil backfill is(1) at the same elevation as the proposed grade for top of soil or(2)at the top of cohesive soil encountered in the excavation,whichever is lower. F. When excavated material which is normally suitable for backfill absorbs excessive moisture, dry it to reduce the moisture content to acceptable limits or replace it with suitable material compacted as specified herein. G. Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass within 18 inches of column or wall footings and which are carried below bottom of such footings,or which pass under wall footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footing. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3100. H. Do not backfill trenches until tests and inspections have been made and backfilling authorized by Architect/Engineer. Use care in backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems. 3.5 COMPACTION A. All bedding,fill and backfill material shall be placed in layers not exceeding a compacted thickness of 6 inches and compacted as follows: 1. In non-structural areas materials shall be compacted to a minimum density of 90 percent of maximum compaction as determined by ASTM D-698. 2. In structural areas materials shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of maximum compaction as determined by ASTM D-698. B. All compaction of bedding fill, and backfill in structural areas shall be done by hand or with mechanical tamping machines. Running the tires or treads of heavy equipment down the trench is not allowed. C. Jetting or watersoaking,as a method of backfill compaction,will not be allowed. 3.6 TESTING OF COMPACTION A. Provide one test per 100 linear feet of trench per lift. Test locations shall be as directed by the Architect/Engineer. If test results in a failure to comply with compaction requirements Contractor shall re- compact entire lift the length of the excavation and provide additional tests per lift not to exceed five(5)as directed by the Architect/Engineer. 3.7 GRADING AND RESTORATION A. Backfilled trenches shall be finish graded to the specified elevation or match existing elevations and restored to the condition satisfactory to Architect/Engineer. -END OF SECTION 31 23 00- EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 31 23 00- 5 EXCAVATION,BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING FOR UTILITIES 31 23 00- 6 SECTION 3124 00 CEMENT STABILIZED SAND BASE PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES This Section includes the furnishing of all plant, labor, materials, and equipment, and the performance of all operations required for the construction of Cement Stabilized Sand Base in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections shown on the construction drawings for the ramp and pavement. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02210—Excavation and Backfill 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to construction the Contractor shall submit a proposed mix design for review and approval by the Engineer. The design data shall include type and amount of cement;source,gradation and amount of fine aggregate,and compressive strength verification tests. Compressive strength shall be in the range of 800 to 1200 psi at 7 days. PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Portland Cement Stabilized Base in accordance with mix design requirement provided in Part 1.3 of this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION METHODS CENTRAL MIXING PLANT A. The base material,cement,and water shall be dry-mixed in a pugmill of either the batch or continuous- flow type. The plant shall be equipped with feeding and metering devices which will add the base material, cement,and water into mixer in the specified quantities. Base material and cement shall be mixed sufficiently to prevent cement balls from forming when water is added. Mixing shall continue until a uniform and intimate mixture of base or sub-base material,cement,and water is obtained. B. The mixture shall be hauled to the construction site in suitable vehicles equipped with protective covers. The mixture shall be placed on the moistened subgrade in a uniform layer by an approved spreader or spreaders. Not more than 30 minutes shall elapse between the placement of Cement Stabilized Base in adjacent lanes at any location except at longitudinal construction joints or at locations as directed by the Engineer. Not more than 30 minutes shall elapse between the start of spreading the base material and cement mixture and the start of compaction. Not more than 60 minutes shall elapse between the start of moist mixing and the start of compaction. The layer of Cement Stabilized Sand Base shall be uniform in thickness and surface contour, and in such quantity that the completed base will conform to the required grade,cross section, and governing base specification. 3.2 COMPACTION &FINISHING A. A vibratory flat wheel roller, as approved by the Engineer, shall be used by the Contractor for final compaction of the stabilized base. CEMENT STABLIZED SAND BASE 31 24 00 - 1 B. The final stabilized base shall be of a thickness as shown on the plans and compacted to not less than 95%of Standard Proctor Density within two(2) hours. C. The Cement Stabilized Base shall be allowed to cure at least two (2) weeks before the final wearing surface is applied (if applicable). During the first seven (7) days of the curing period, the Contractor shall place and maintain barricades and flares as approved by the Engineer, restricting use of the completed base to residents in the block. D. At the end of each day's operation or at a lapse of more than two hours between loads, a transverse header(butt joint)shall be installed so that proper compaction and performance can be achieved. No longitudinal joints will be allowed. CEMENT STABLIZED SAND BASE 31 24 00 - 2 SECTION 31 31 16-TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 00 and 01 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section Includes:Soil treatment. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EPA: Environmental Protection Agency. B. PCO: Pest control operator. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Treatments and application instructions,including EPA-Registered Label. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of termite control products certifying that treatments furnished comply with requirements. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in"Quality Assurance"Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners,and other information specified. D. Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's record information,including the following as applicable: 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Brand name and manufacturer of termiticide. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions, methods,volumes, and rates of application used. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in the Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A PCO who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced and has completed termite control treatment similar to that indicated for this Project and whose work has a record of successful in-service performance. TERMITE CONTROL 3131 16- 1 B. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides, and label with a Federal registration number,to comply with EPA regulations and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with EPA-Registered Label requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, and grading and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs, before construction. 1.8 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by applicator and Contractor certifying that termite control work, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites. If subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period,re- treat soil as required at no cost to the Owner. C. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Continuing Service: Provide a proposal for continuing service, including monitoring, inspection, and retreatment for occurrences of termite activity, from applicator to Owner, in the form of a standard yearly(or other period)continuing service agreement,starting on the date of Substantial Completion. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-registered termiticide complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in a soluble or emulsible, concentrated formulation that dilutes with water or foaming agent,and formulated to prevent termite infestation. Use only soil treatment solutions that are not harmful to plants. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to the product's EPA-Registered Label. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. BASF Chemical Company;Termidor. 2. Bayer Corporation; Premise 75. TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16- 2 3. Dow AgroSciences LLC; Equity. 4. Syngenta; Demon TC. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of the soil, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping,and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's written instructions for preparing substrate. Remove all extraneous sources of wood cellulose and other edible materials such as wood debris,tree stumps and roots,stakes, formwork,and construction waste wood from soil and around foundations. B. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended by termiticide manufacturer. C. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.3 APPLICATION,GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.4 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute the treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Void Form Slabs: Under ground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil including soil along entire inside perimeter of foundation walls, along both sides of interior partition walls, around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating slab, and around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Crawlspaces: Soil under and adjacent to foundations as previously indicated. Treat adjacent areas including around entrance platform,porches,and equipment bases. Apply overall treatment only where attached concrete platform and porches are on fill or ground. TERMITE CONTROL 31 31 16- 3 4. Masonry: Treat voids. 5. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. B. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. C. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground- supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. D. Post warning signs in areas of application. E. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation,grading,landscaping, or other construction activities following application. -END OF SECTION 3131 16- TERMITE CONTROL 3131 16- 4 SECTION 32 25 20 -CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This section includes on-site concrete improvements over prepared subbase as shown on drawings,including curbs,gutters,walks,pavement,walls,painted parking and lane markings,etc. B. Prepared subgrade is specified in "Earthwork"section, Division 31. C. Concrete and related materials are specified in Division 3. D. Joint fillers and sealers are specified in Division 31. E. Additional requirements are specified in the "Geotechnical Engineering Study" located in the Appendix of this Project Manual. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with local governing regulations if more stringent than herein specified. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms,free of distortion and defects. Coat forms with a nonstaining form release agent that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. 1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. B. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars ASTM A615,Grade 60. C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. D. Concrete Materials: Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete materials, admixtures, bonding materials, curing materials,and others as required. E. Lime:Type A, hydrated or Type B,commercial lime slurry,grade 1 per TxDOT Item 264. F. Sealants: In accordance with plan details and requirements of applicable Division 2 sections for sealants. G. Irrigation System Sleeves: Schedule 40 PVC pipe,size as indicated on drawings. H. Parking and Lane Marking Paint: Chlorinated rubber type, ready-mixed complying with Federal Specification TTP-115E. CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20- 1 1. Color: White, except firelane and handicap lane and symbol paint, which shall be color required by code. I. Dry - Shake Color Hardener: Packaged dry combination of materials consisting of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers'standards for use at handicap ramps, unless indicated otherwise. J. Wheel Stops: Minimum 6'-0"long x 1,-0"wide x 6"high,accurately formed and smoothly finished. 2.2 CONCRETE MIX,DESIGN,AND TESTING A. Comply with requirements of applicable Division 3 sections for concrete mix design,sampling and testing,and quality control and as herein specified. 1. Concrete Pavement: 4,000 psi, 28 day compressive strength, 5.5 sack of cement content per cubic yard. 2. Concrete Flatwork and Sidewalk:3,000 psi, 28 day compressive strength. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SUBBASE PREPARATION A. Install subgrade per Division 31"Earthwork"section under all concrete site improvements. B. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work unit such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. C. Lime Stabilization: 1. Treat top 6"of subbase by introduction of lime to the clay soil at the rate of eight percent (7%) (approximately 32 pounds per square yard of surface area as determined by the geotechnical engineer). The treated subbase shall extend under all concrete paving and 2'outside(beyond)all curbs and gutters. 2. Treating, addition of lime, mixing, blending, and compaction shall be in accordance with Texas Department of Transportation TxDOT Item 260. 3. Compact blended subbase to 95% Standard Proctor density, per ASTM D698, at -2 to +4 percent of optimum moisture content. D. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface to check for unstable areas and areas requiring additional compaction. Over-excavate all unstable areas an additional 6" minimum (or more if required), treat with lime and recompact as specified above. 3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Generally, conform to size,shape,elevation,etc. as detailed on the drawings. B. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20- 2 C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. D. Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot to drain. 3.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Locate, place and support reinforcement as specified in Division 3 sections. B. Minimum Reinforcing,4"thick paving: No. 3 bars, 18"on center each way. C. Minimum Reinforcing,5",6",and 7"thick paving, No. 3 bars, 18"on center each way. D. Minimum Reinforcing,Curbs and Gutters: No.3 bars. Refer to details for locations. E. Minimum Reinforcing, Drive Approaches: Per city standards. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with requirements of Division 3 sections for mixing and placing concrete, and as herein specified. B. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. C. Place concrete by methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies,reinforcement,or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. D. The Contractor shall not back over the steel at anytime while pouring concrete. Construction sequencing efforts shall be utilized in order to successfully make each concrete pour. If necessary,the Contractor shall utilize concrete pumping to perform the work. E. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place a construction joint. G. When adjacent pavement lanes are placed in separate pours, do not operate equipment on concrete until pavement has attained sufficient strength to carry loads without injury. H. Minimum Thickness: 1. All walks and drives located in City right-of-way: Install per City Specifications. 2. All on-site walks and miscellaneous concrete work: 4", unless indicated otherwise. 3. All on-site parking areas: As indicated on drawings. CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20- 3 3.5 JOINTS A. General: Construct expansion, weakened-plane (contraction), and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise indicated. B. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints around fixed objects within or abutting concrete,and at intervals of not more than 35 ft.o.c.along walks and curbs and 150 ft.o.c.along drive and parking paving unless otherwise shown on the plans. 1. Install preformed filler with the top edge approximately 1/4" below the finished concrete surface to leave a neat, straight joint. 2. Joints shall be %" wide unless specifically dimensioned otherwise on the drawings. Joint edges shall be rounded with an edging tool. 3. All joints shall be sealed with cold applied joint sealant. 4. There shall be no connection by reinforcement or keyway across expansion joints. Joints shall be held in alignment with sleeved,smooth dowels where required. C. Scoring: 1. Saw cut,approaches,and paving using an abrasive or diamond blade.Cut joint width shall be 1/8" and depth shall be 1/4" deep at walks and 1/3 slab thickness at approaches and paving.Cutting of joints must be done as soon as concrete surface is firm enough not to be torn or damaged by the blade(within 4 to 12 hours),and before random shrinkage cracks can form in the concrete slab. a. Score walks at approximately 5-foot intervals each way. Where walks abut curbs, the scoring of walks and curbs shall align. JOINTS/SCORING IN WALKS SHALL BE TOOLED. b. Score curbs and curbs and gutters at approximately 5-foot intervals. c. Score approaches and paving at approximately 10-foot intervals each way or as shown. D. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. E. At expansion joints,install load transfer-slip dowel devices,installed so that one end of each dowel bar is free to move. F. Sealants: Comply with the requirements of applicable Division 7 sections. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking-off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. 1. Curbs and gutters: All curbs shall be formed and finished with a preformed mechanical mule. No hand formed curbs shall be allowed except in those areas that require CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20- 4 transitioning to a laydown curb, inlet or radii less than 4 feet. Cross brush surfaces with a soft fiber brush to produce a fine brush finish. 2. Paving:Vibratory screed the concrete.The vibratory screed shall run along the forms for all paving areas except intersections.The use of a hand-held vibratory screed may be used at intersections. The surface shall be troweled and edged with a steel trowel and then broomed to obtain a smooth,uniform brush finish. B. After floating,test surface for trueness with a 10-ft.straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities,and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. C. Work edges of slabs and formed joints with an edging tool and round to 1/2-inch radius.Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface as follows: 1. Broom finish by drawing a fine-hair broom across concrete surface perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a texture acceptable to Architect. Provide a medium texture finish for walks and a heavy texture finish for drives and parking areas. E. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed.After form removal,clean ends of joints and point-up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. F. Apply dry-shake color hardner at handicap ramps as required to meet TAS standards. 3.7 CURING A. Protect and cure finished concrete in compliance with applicable requirements of Division 3 sections. Use membrane-forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist-curing methods. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete Tests: Testing and acceptance of concrete shall meet the requirements specified in SECTION 03300-STRUCTURAL CONCRETE. B. Grade and Smoothness Tests: 1. Plan Grade: Finished surface of the flatwork shall not vary more than 0.04 ft. above or below the plan grade or elevation. Finished surfaces of abutting pavement and walks and coincide at their juncture. Where a new pavement or walk abuts an existing surface, transition pavement or walk strip shall be installed. 2. Surface Smoothness:Finished surface of the flatwork shall have no abrupt changes of more than 1/8" and shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 12 ft. straight edge more than 1/4"plus or minus tolerance. Flow line of gutters shall not deviate from the testing edge of a 10 ft.straight edge more than 1/8" plus or minus tolerance. 3. Concrete Cracking:Contractor is responsible for controlling all concrete cracking. If more than one (1) crack per panel occurs, the Contractor may be required to remove and replace the panel as directed by the Engineer or Owner. 3.9 REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20- 5 A. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete,as directed by Architect. B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. C. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. D. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains,discolorations,dirt,and other foreign material just before final inspection. 3.10 IRRIGATION SLEEVES A. Install at locations shown on drawings. Top of sleeve to be minimum 4" below finish subgrade of paving. Extend sleeve minimum 1'-0"beyond edge of paving. Cover end of sleeve and mark concrete with perminent tag at each end for identification purposes. 3.11 PARKING AND LANE MARKINGS A. Cleaning: Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. B. Do not apply parking and lane marking paint until layout and placement have been verified with Architect. C. Apply paint with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. Apply in 4" wide stripes at a spreading rate no greater than 330 lineal feet per gallon to provide minimum 12 to 15 mils dry thickness. D. Clean up spilled or dropped paint immediately. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS A. Where handicapped parking designation is indicated on drawings, Contractor shall furnish and install all painted striping, painted warning signs,etc.as required by the State to designate areas. Striping shall meet all requirements including size, colors, wording, etc. and shall be installed as specified for parking striping above. B. Where fire lane designation is required by the City, the Contractor shall furnish and install all painted striping as required. Striping shall meet all City requirements, including size, colors, wording,etc. Striping shall meet requirements for parking striping above. 3.13 WHEEL STOPS A. Anchor each unit with minimum of two, 12"long x No.3 rebar,through unit into pavement. -END OF SECTION 32 25 20- CONCRETE SITE IMPROVEMENTS 32 25 20- 6 SECTION 33 26 68-WATER IMPROVEMENTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established in the North Central Texas Council of Government (NCTCOG) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, per City, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work Included: 1. Installation of pipe material,fittings and concrete blocking. 2. Construction of fire hydrants, service lines,gate valves, double detector checks, and double check valve. 3. Coordination of City constructed water services. 4. Connection to existing water systems. B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections 1. Earthwork. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate installation of water system with other construction throughout the site. This includes the coordination with the City required for the installation of water services to be completed within the public right-of-way. B. All construction shall conform to NCTCOG and applicable City Standard Specifications for Construction. C. All work of this Section shall be completed within the limits of the site property boundary. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AWWA C900: Requirements for PVC pressure pipe 2"thru 8" pipe. B. AWWA C110 or C907: Ductile Iron Fittings. C. AWWA C500: Gate Valves 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All pipe,fittings and appurtenances not covered by this specification shall be approved by the engineer seven days prior to bid. WATER IMPROVEMENTS 33 26 68- 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)water pipe and fittings with dimension control. 1. Pipe shall be DR-14 per City specification (FIRE ONLY). 2. Pipe shall be DR-18 per City specification (DOMESTIC WATER LINE). 2.2 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Manufacturer and style per City specifications and applicable sections of NCTCOG Item 2.14. 2.3 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturer and type per City specifications and applicable sections of NCTCOG Item 2.13. 2.4 DOUBLE CHECK ASSEMBLY A. Manufacturer and type per City specifications. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The locations of all structures and lines and grades of all pipes shall be staked by a registered surveyor. All facilities shall be located according to the site layout plans. B. The Owners engineer shall be notified if any conflicts are encountered immediately. 3.2 PIPES A. All pipe shall be inspected prior to installation. Damaged pipes shall not be used. Replacement of damaged pipe shall be made by the Contractor at no expense to the owner. B. Pipe installation shall conform to the North Central Texas Council of Governments(NCTCOG)Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. -END OF SECTION 33 26 68- WATER IMPROVEMENTS 33 26 68- 2 SECTION 33 27 30 -SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification Sections,apply to work of this section. B. Provisions established in the North Central Texas Council of Governments(NCTCOG)Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction,City having jurisdiction, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Work included: 1. Installation of pipe material. 2. Construction of manholes. 3. Connection to existing sewer system. B. Related Work Specified in Other Sections. 1. Section 02200 Earthwork. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Verify flowline elevation at connection to existing manhole; notify architect/engineer if elevation is more than 0.1' above plan elevation. B. Coordinate installation with other construction throughout the site. This includes the coordination required with the City for the construction of the sanitary sewer manhole to be completed within the public sanitary sewer easement. C. All construction shall conform to NCTCOG and applicable City Standard Specifications for Construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM D3034:Specifications for PVC Sewer Pipe 4"through 15"in diameter. B. ASTM D2321: Practice for Installation of Underground Installation. C. City of Port Arthur Installation Manual. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. All pipe and fittings not covered by this specification shall be approved by the engineer seven SANITARY SEWERAGE 33 27 30-1 days prior to bid. B. Product data for each type of product and process specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE A. Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)sewer pipe and fittings with dimension control. 1. Pipe shall be SDR-35 for depths up to 12'-0"and SRD-26 for depths 12'-0" and deeper. 2. Pipe Fittings: Pipe fittings shall conform to ASTM D1784. Fittings approved by the Engineer shall also be acceptable. 3. Balance of specifications shall be covered by Item 2.12.14 per NCTCOG. 2.2 STRUCTURES A. Materials for the construction of manholes shall be as specified in Division 7,"Concrete Structures"of the NCTCOG's Standard Specifications for Construction. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The locations of all structures and lines and grades of all pipes shall be staked by a registered surveyor. All facilities shall be located according to the site layout drawings. B. The Owners engineer shall be notified if any conflicts are encountered immediately. 3.2 PIPES A. All pipe shall be inspected prior to installation. Damaged pipes shall not be used. Replacement of damaged pipe shall be made by the Contractor at no expense to the Owner. B. Installation shall be in accordance with NCTCOG and City specifications and as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Backfill shall be per plans. 3.3 STRUCTURES A. Construction of manholes shall be as specified in Division 7,"Concrete Structures"of NCTCOG and the City's Standard Specifications for Construction. B. Connections of pipe to structures shall be completely mortared around the perimeter of the pipe to ensure connection to the structure prior to backfilling. Pipe shall have a rubber boat placed over the end prior to pouring concrete structure or grouting. -END OFSECTION 332730- SANITARY SEWERAGE 33 27 30-2